Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

to-morrow+is+with+us

Толкование Перевод

21 desmoralizado

adj.

demoralized, discouraged, corrupt.

past part.

past participle of spanish verb: desmoralizar.

* * *

ADJ demoralized

* * *

= disheartened, dispirited.

Ex. This paper describes a case study where a proposal by the city manager to cut the budget of the public library by 40% has left the library director very disheartened.

Ex. The text around the rim of the teacup, from Marcel Proust, reads: ' Dispirited after a dreary day, with the prospect of a depressing morrow'.

* * *

= disheartened, dispirited.

Ex: This paper describes a case study where a proposal by the city manager to cut the budget of the public library by 40% has left the library director very disheartened.

Ex: The text around the rim of the teacup, from Marcel Proust, reads: ' Dispirited after a dreary day, with the prospect of a depressing morrow'.

* * *

desmoralizado, -a adj

demoralized

* * *

desmoralizado

adj demoralized

Spanish-English dictionary > desmoralizado
22 AT

I) prep.

A. with dative.

I. Of motion;

1) towards, against;

Otkell laut at Skamkatli, bowed down to S.;

hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge against A.;

2) close atup to;

Brynjólfr gengr alit at honum, quite up to him;

þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters with him;

3) to, at;

koma at landi, to come to land;

ganga at dómi, to go into court;

4) along (= eptir);

ganga at stræti, to walk along the street;

dreki er niðr fór at ánni (went down the river) fyrir strauminum;

refr dró hörpu at ísi, on the ice;

5) denoting hostility;

renna (sœkja) at e-m, to rush at, assault;

gerði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog;

6) around;

vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a veil round one’s head;

bera grjót at e-m, to heap stones upon the body;

7) denoting business, engagement;

ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after horses, watching sheep;

fara at landskuldum, to go collecting rents.

II. Of position, &c.;

1) denoting presence at, near, by, upon;

at kirkju, at church;

at dómi, in court;

at lögbergi, at the hill of laws;

2) denoting participation in;

vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, wedding;

vera at vígi, to be an accessory in man-slaying;

3) ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at;

kvalararnir, er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him;

var þar at kona nökkur at binda (was there busy dressing) sár manna;

4) with proper names of places (farms);

konungr at Danmörku ok Noregi, king of;

biskup at Hólum, bishop of Holar;

at Helgafelli, at Bergþórshváli;

5) used ellipt. with a genitive, at (a person’s) house;

at hans (at his house) gisti fjölmenni mikit;

at Marðar, at Mara’s home;

at hins beilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church;

at Ránar, at Ran’s (abode).

III. Of time;

1) at, in;

at upphafi, at first, in the beginning;

at skilnaði, at parting, when they parted;

at páskum, at Easter;

at kveldi, at eventide;

at þinglausnum, at the close of the Assembly;

at fjöru, at the ebb;

at flœðum, at the floodtide;

2) adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr’;

at ári komanda, next year;

at vári, er kemr, next spring;

generally with ‘komanda’ understood;

at sumri, hausti, vetri, vári, next summer, &c.;

3) used with an absolute dative and present or past part.;

at sér lifanda, duing his lifetime;

at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all;

at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the hearing of the chief;

at upprennandi sólu, at sunrise;

at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks are past;

at honum önduðum, after his death;

4) denoting uninterrupted succession, after;

hverr at öðrum, annarr at öðrum, one after another;

skildu menn at þessu, thereupon, after this;

at því (thereafter) kómu aðrar meyjar.

IV. fig. and in various uses;

1) to, into, with the notion of destruction or change;

brenna (borgina) at ösku, to burn to ashes;

verða at ormi, to become a snake;

2) for, as;

gefa e-t at gjöf, as a present;

eiga e-n at vin, to have one as friend;

3) by;

taka sverð at hjöltum, by the hilt;

draga út björninn at hlustunum, by the ears;

kjósa at afli, álitum, by strength, appearrance;

4) as regards as to;

auðigr at fé, wealthy in goods;

vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face;

5) as a law term, on the grounds of, by reason of;

ryðja ( to challenge) dóm at mægðum, kvið at frændsemi;

6) as a paraphrase of a genitive;

faðir, móðir at barni (= barns, of a child);

aðili at sök = aðili sakar;

7) with adjectives denoting colour, size, age, of;

hvítr, svartr, rauðr at lit, while, black, red of colour;

mikill, lítill at stœrð, vexti, tall, small of stature;

tvítugr at aldri, twenty years of age;

kýr at fyrsta, öðrum kálfi, a cow that has calved once, twice;

8) determining the source from which anything comes, of, from;

Ari nam ok marga frœði at Þuríði (from her);

þiggja, kaupa, geta, leigja e-t at e-m, to receive, buy, obtain, borrow a thing from one;

hafa veg (virðing) styrk at e-m, to derive honour, power, from one;

9) according, to, after (heygðr at fornum sið);

at ráði allra vitrustu manna, by the advice of;

at landslögum, by the law of the land;

at vánum, as was to be expected;

at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave;

10) in adverbial phrases;

gróa (vera grœddr) at heilu, to be quite healed;

bíta af allt gras at snøggu, quite bare;

at fullu, fully;

at vísu, surely;

at frjálsu, freely;

at eilífu, for ever and ever;

at röngu, at réttu, wrongly, rightly;

at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same;

at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent.

B. with acc., after, upon (= eptir);

sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, to take the inheritance after his father;

eiga féránsdóm at e-n, to hold a court of execution upon a person;

at þat (= eptir þat), after that, thereafter;

connected with a past part. or a., at Gamla fallinn, after the fall of Gamli;

at Hrungni dauðan, upon the death of Hrungnir.

II)

1) as the simple mark of the infinitive, to;

at ganga, at ríða, at hlaupa, to walk, to ride, to run;

2) in an objective sense;

hann bauð þeim at fara, sitja, he bade (ordered) them to go, sit;

gefa e-m at eta, at drekka, to give one to eat, to drink;

3) denoting design or purpose, in order to (hann gekk í borg at kaupa silfr).

III)

1) demonstrative particle before a comparative, the, all the, so much the;

hón grét at meir, she wept the more;

þykkir oss at líkara, all the more likely;

þú ert maðr at verri (so much the worse), er þú hefir þetta mælt;

2) rel. pron., who, which, that (= er);

þeir allir, at þau tíðindi heyrðu, all those who heard;

sem þeim er títt, at ( as is the custom of those who) kaupferðir reka.

IV)

conj., that;

1) introducing a subjective or objective clause;

þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, it happened once that H.;

vilda ek, at þú réðist austr í fjörðu, I should like you to go;

2) relative to svá, denoting proportion, degree;

svá mikill lagamaðr, at, so great a lawyer, that;

3) with subj., denoting end or purpose, in order that (skáru þeir fyrir þá (viz. hestana) melinn, at þeir dœi eigi af sulti);

4) since, because, as (= því at);

5) connected with þó, því, svá;

þó at (with subj.), though, although;

því at, because, for;

svá at, so that;

6) temp., þá at (= þá er), when;

þegar at (= þegar er), as soon as;

þar til at (= þar til er), until, till;

áðr at (= á. en), before;

7) used superfluously after an int. pron. or adv.;

Ólafr spurði, hvern styrk at hann mundi fá honum, what help he was likely to give him;

in a relative sense; með fullkomnum ávexti, hverr at (which) þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða.

V)

negative verbal suffix, = ata; var-at, was not.

VI)

n. an incited conflict or fight ( see etja);

odda at, Yggs at, battle.

* * *

1.

and að, prep., often used ellipt. dropping the case and even merely as an adverb, [Lat. ad; Ulf. at = πρός and παρά, A. S. ät; Engl. at; Hel. ad = apud; O. H. G. az; lost in mod. Germ., and rare in Swed. and Dan.; in more freq. use in Engl. than any other kindred language, Icel. only excepted]:—the mod. pronunciation and spelling is að (aþ); this form is very old, and is found in Icel. vellum MSS. of the 12th century, e. g. aþ, 623. 60; yet in earlier times it was sounded with a tenuis, as we may infer from rhymes, e. g. jöfurr hyggi at | hve ek yrkja fat, Egill: Sighvat also makes it rhyme with a t. The verse by Thorodd—þar vastu at er fjáðr klæðið þvat (Skálda 162)—is hardly intelligible unless we accept the spelling with an aspirate (að), and say that þvað is = þvá = þváði, lavabat; it may be that by the time of Thorodd and Ari the pure old pronunciation was lost, or is ‘þvat’ simply the A. S. þvât, secuit? The Icelanders still, however, keep the tenuis in compounds before a vowel, or before h, v, or the liquids l, r, thus—atyrða, atorka, athöfn, athugi, athvarf, athlægi; atvinna, atvik; atlaga, atlíðanði ( slope), atriði, atreið, atróðr: but aðdjúpr, aðfinsla (critic), aðferð, aðkoma, aðsókn, aðsúgr (crowding), aðgæzla. In some words the pronunciation is irregular, e. g. atkvæði not aðkv-; atburðr, but aðbúnaðr; aðhjúkran not athjúkran; atgörvi not aðgörfi. At, to, towards; into; against; along, by; in regard to; after.

Mostly with dat.; rarely with acc.; and sometimes ellipt.—by dropping the words ‘home,’ ‘house,’ or the like—with gen.

WITH DAT.

A. LOC.

I. WITH MOTION; gener. the motion to the borders, limits of an object, and thus opp. to frá:

1. towards, against, with or without the notion of arrival, esp. connected with verbs denoting motion (verba movendi et eundi), e. g. fara, ganga, koma, lúta, snúa, rétta at…; Otkell laut at Skamkatli, O. louted (i. e. bowed down) towards S., Nj. 77, Fms. xi. 102; sendimaðrinn sneri ( turned) hjöltum sverðsins at konungi, towards the king, i. 15; hann sneri egginni at Ásgrími, turned the edge towards A., Nj. 220; rétta e-t at e-m, to reach, hand over, Ld. 132; ganga at, to step towards, Ísl. ii. 259.

2. denoting proximity, close up to, up to; Brynjólfr gengr … allt at honum, B. goes quite up to him, Nj. 58; Gunnarr kom þangat at þeim örunum, G. reached them even there with his arrows, 115; þeir kómust aldri at honum, they could never get near him, to close quarters, id.; reið maðr at þeim (up to them), 274; þeir höfðu rakit sporin allt at ( right up to) gammanum, Fms. i. 9; komu þeir at sjó fram, came down to the sea, Bárð. 180.

3. without reference to the space traversed, to or at; koma at landi, to land, Ld. 38, Fms. viii. 358; ríða at dyrum, Boll. 344; hlaupa at e-m, to run up to, run at, Fms. vii. 218, viii. 358; af sjáfarganginum er hann gekk at landinu, of the surf dashing against the shore, xi. 6; vísa ólmum hundi at manni, to set a fierce hound at a man, Grág. ii. 118; leggja e-n at velli, to lay low, Eg. 426, Nj. 117; hníga at jörðu, at grasi, at moldu, to bite the dust, to die, Njarð. 378; ganga at dómi, a law term, to go into court, of a plaintiff, defendant, or bystander, Nj. 87 (freq.)

4. denoting a motion along, into, upon; ganga at stræti, to walk along the street, Korm. 228, Fms. vii. 39; at ísi, on the ice, Skálda 198, Fms. vii. 19, 246, viii. 168, Eb. 112 new Ed. (á is perh. wrong); máttu menn ganga bar yfir at skipum einum, of ships alone used as a bridge, Fas. i. 378; at höfðum, at nám, to trample on the slain on the battle-field, Lex. Poët.; at ám, along the rivers; at merkiósum, at the river’s mouth, Grág. ii. 355; at endilöngu baki, all along its back, Sks. 100.

5. denoting hostility, to rush at, assault; renna at, hlaupa at, ganga, fara, ríða, sækja, at e-m, (v. those words), whence the nouns atrenna, athlaup, atgangr, atför, atreið, atsókn, etc.

β. metaph., kom at þeim svefnhöfgi, deep sleep fell on them, Nj. 104. Esp. of weather, in the impers. phrase, hríð, veðr, vind, storm görir at e-m, to be overtaken by a snow storm, gale, or the like; görði þá at þeim þoku mikla, they were overtaken by a thick fog, Bárð. 171.

6. denoting around, of clothing or the like; bregða skikkju at höfði sér, to wrap his cloak over his head, Ld. 62; vefja motri at höfði sér, to wrap a snood round her head, 188; sauma at, to stick, cling close, as though sewn on; sauma at höndum sér, of tight gloves, Bs. i. 453; kyrtill svá þröngr sem saumaðr væri at honum, as though it were stitched to him, Nj. 214; vafit at vándum dreglum, tight laced with sorry tags, id.; hosa strengd fast at beini, of tight hose, Eg. 602; hann sveipar at sér iðrunum ok skyrtunni, he gathers up the entrails close to him and the skirt too, Gísl. 71; laz at síðu, a lace on the side, to keep the clothes tight, Eg. 602.

β. of burying; bera grjót at einum, to heap stones upon the body, Eg. 719; var gör at þeim dys or grjóti, Ld. 152; gora kistu at líki, to make a coffin for a body, Eb. 264, Landn. 56, Ld. 142.

γ. of summoning troops or followers; stefna at sér mönnum, to summon men to him, Nj. 104; stefna at sér liði, Eg. 270; kippa mönnum at sér, to gather men in haste, Ld. 64.

7. denoting a business, engagement; ríða at hrossum, at sauðum, to go looking after after horses, watching sheep, Glúm. 362, Nj. 75; fara at fé, to go to seek for sheep, Ld. 240; fara at heyi, to go a-haymaking, Dropl. 10; at veiðum, a-hunting; at fuglum, a-fowling; at dýrum, a-sbooting; at fiski, a-fishing; at veiðiskap, Landn. 154, Orkn. 416 (in a verse), Nj. 25; fara at landskuldum, to go a-collecling rents, Eg. 516; at Finnkaupum, a-marketing with Finns, 41; at féföngum, a-plundering, Fms. vii. 78; ganga at beina, to wait on guests, Nj. 50; starfa at matseld, to serve at table, Eb. 266; hitta e-n at nauðsynjum, on matters of business; at máli, to speak with one, etc., Fms. xi. 101; rekast at e-m, to pursue one, ix. 404; ganga at liði sér, to go suing for help, Grág. ii. 384.

β. of festivals; snúa, fá at blóti, veizlu, brullaupi, to prepare for a sacrificial banquet, wedding, or the like, hence at-fangadagr, Eb. 6, Ld. 70; koma at hendi, to happen, befall; ganga at sínu, to come by one’s own, to take it, Ld. 208; Egill drakk hvert full er at honum kom, drained every horn that came to him, Eg. 210; komast at keyptu, to purchase dearly, Húv. 46.

8. denoting imaginary motion, esp. of places, cp. Lat. spectare, vergere ad…, to look or lie towards; horfði botninn at höfðanum, the bight of the bay looked toward the headland, Fms. i. 340, Landn. 35; also, skeiðgata liggr at læknum, leads to the brook, Ísl. ii. 339; á þann arminn er vissi at sjánum, on that wing which looked toward the sea, Fms. viii. 115; sár þau er horft höfðu at Knúti konungi, xi. 309.

β. even connected with verbs denoting motion; Gilsáreyrr gengr austan at Fljótinu, G. extends, projects to F. from the east, Hrafh. 25; hjá sundi því, er at gengr þingstöðinni, Fms. xi. 85.

II. WITHOUT MOTION; denoting presence at, near, by, at the side of, in, upon; connected with verbs like sitja, standa, vera…; at kirkju, at church, Fms. vii. 251, K. f). K. 16, Ld. 328, Ísl. ii. 270, Sks. 36; vera at skála, at húsi, to be in, at home, Landn. 154; at landi, Fms. i. 82; at skipi, on shipboard, Grág. i. 209, 215; at oldri, at a banquet, inter pocula; at áti, at dinner, at a feast, inter edendum, ii. 169, 170; at samförum ok samvistum, at public meetings, id.; at dómi, in a court; standa (to take one’s stand) norðan, sunnan, austan, vestan at dómi, freq. in the proceedings at trials in lawsuits, Nj.; at þingi, present at the parliament, Grág. i. 142; at lögbergi, o n the hill of laws, 17, Nj.; at baki e-m, at the back of.

2. denoting presence, partaking in; sitja at mat, to sit at meat, Fms. i. 241; vera at veizlu, brullaupi, to be at a banquet, nuptials, Nj. 51, Ld. 70: a law term, vera at vígi, to be an accessory in manslaying, Nj. 89, 100; vera at e-u simply means to be about, be busy in, Fms. iv. 237; standa at máli, to stand by one in a case, Grág. ii. 165, Nj. 214; vera at fóstri, to be fostered, Fms. i. 2; sitja at hégóma, to listen to nonsense, Ld. 322; vera at smíð, to be at one’s work, Þórð. 62: now absol., vera at, to go on with, be busy at.

3. the law term vinna eið at e-u has a double meaning:

α. vinna eið at bók, at baugi, to make an oath upon the book by laying the band upon it, Landn. 258, Grág., Nj.; cp. Vkv. 31, Gkv. 3. 3, Hkv. 2. 29, etc.: ‘við’ is now used in this sense.

β. to confirm a fact (or the like) by an oath, to swear to, Grág. i. 9, 327.

γ. the law phrase, nefna vátta at e-u, of summoning witnesses to a deed, fact, or the like; nefna vátta at benjum, to produce evidence, witnesses as to the wounds, Nj., Grág.; at görð, Eg. 738; at svörum, Grág. i. 19: this summoning of witnesses served in old lawsuits the same purpose as modern pleadings and depositions; every step in a suit to be lawful must be followed by such a summoning or declaration.

4. used ellipt., vera at, to be about, to be busy at; kvalararnir er at vóru at pína hann, who were tormenting him; þar varstu at, you were there present, Skálda 162; at várum þar, Gísl. (in a verse): as a law term ‘vera at’ means to be guilty, Glúm. 388; vartattu at þar, Eg. (in a verse); hence the ambiguity of Glum’s oath, vask at þar, I was there present: var þar at kona nokkur ( was there busy) at binda sár manna, Fms. v. 91; hann var at ok smíðaði skot, Rd. 313; voru Varbelgir at ( about) at taka af, þau lög …, Fms. ix. 512; ek var at ok vafk, I was about weaving, xi. 49; þeir höfðu verit at þrjú sumur, they had been busy at it for three summers, x. 186 (now very freq.); koma at, come in, to arrive unexpectedly; Gunnarr kom at í því, G. came in at that moment; hvaðan komtú nú at, whence did you come? Nj. 68, Fms. iii. 200.

5. denoting the kingdom or residence of a king or princely person; konungr at Danmörk ok Noregi, king of…, Fms. i. 119, xi. 281; konungr, jarl, at öllum Noregi, king, earl, over all N., íb. 3, 13, Landn. 25; konungr at Dyflinni, king of Dublin, 25; but í or yfir England!, Eg. 263: cp. the phrase, sitja at landi, to reside, of a king when at home, Hkr. i. 34; at Joini, Fms. xi. 74: used of a bishop; biskup at Hólum, bishop of Hólar, Íb. 18, 19; but biskup í Skálaholti, 19: at Rómi, at Rome, Fbr. 198.

6. in denoting a man’s abode (vide p. 5, col. 1, l. 27), the prep. ‘at’ is used where the local name implies the notion of by the side of, and is therefore esp. applied to words denoting a river, brook, rock, mountain, grove, or the like, and in some other instances, by, at, e. g. at Hofi (a temple), Landn. 198; at Borg ( a castle), 57; at Helgafelli (a mountain), Eb. constantly so; at Mosfelli, Landn. 190; at Hálsi (a hill), Fms. xi. 22; at Bjargi, Grett. 90; Hálsum, Landn. 143; at Á ( river), 296, 268; at Bægisá, 212; Giljá, 332; Myrká, 211; Vatnsá, id.; þverá, Glúm. 323; at Fossi (a ‘force’ or waterfall), Landn. 73; at Lækjamoti (waters-meeting), 332; at Hlíðarenda ( end of the lithe or hill), at Bergþórshváli, Nj.; at Lundi (a grove), at Melum (sandhill), Landn. 70: the prep. ‘á’ is now used in most of these cases, e. g. á Á, á Hofi, Helgafelli, Felli, Hálsi, etc.

β. particularly, and without any regard to etymology, used of the abode of kings or princes, to reside at; at Uppsölum, at Haugi, Alreksstöðum, at Hlöðum, Landn., Fms.

γ. konungr lét kalla at stofudyrum, the king made a call at the hall door, Eg. 88; þeir kölluðu at herberginu, they called at the inn, Fms. ix. 475.

7. used ellipt. with a gen., esp. if connected with such words as gista, to be a guest, lodge, dine, sup (of festivals or the like) at one’s home; at Marðar, Nj. 4; at hans, 74; þingfesti at þess bóanda, Grág. i. 152; at sín, at one’s own home, Eg. 371, K. Þ. K. 62; hafa náttstað at Freyju, at the abode of goddess Freyja, Eg. 603; at Ránar, at Ran’s, i. e. at Ran’s house, of drowned men who belong to the queen of the sea, Ran, Eb. 274; at hins heilaga Ólafs konungs, at St. Olave’s church, Fms. vi. 63: cp. ad Veneris, εις Κίμωνος.

B. TEMP.

I. at, denoting a point or period of time; at upphafi, at first, in the beginning, Ld. 104; at lyktum, at síðustu, at lokum, at last; at lesti, at last, Lex. Poët., more freq. á lesti; at skilnaði, at parting, at last, Band. 3; at fornu, in times of yore, formerly, Eg. 267, D. I. i. 635; at sinni, as yet, at present; at nýju, anew, of present time; at eilífu, for ever and ever; at skömmu, soon, shortly, Ísl. ii. 272, v. l.

II. of the very moment when anything happens, the beginning of a term; denoting the seasons of the year, months, weeks, the hours of the day; at Jólum, at Yule, Nj. 46; at Pálmadegi, on Palm Sunday, 273; at Páskum, at Easter; at Ólafsvöku, on St. Olave’s eve, 29th of July, Fms.; at vetri, at the beginning of the winter, on the day when winter sets in, Grág. 1. 151; at sumarmálum, at vetrnáttum; at Tvímánaði, when the Double month (August) begins, Ld. 256, Grág. i. 152; at kveldi, at eventide, Eg. 3; at því meli, at that time; at eindaga, at the term, 395; at eykð, at 4 o’clock p. m., 198; at öndverðri æfi Abra hams, Ver. II; at sinni, now at once, Fms. vi. 71; at öðruhverju, every now and then.

β. where the point of time is marked by some event; at þingi, at the meeting of parliament (18th to the 24th of June), Ld. 182; at féránsdómi, at the court of execution, Grág. i. 132, 133; at þinglausnum, at the close of the parliament (beginning of July), 140; at festarmálum, eðr at eiginorði, at betrothal or nuptials, 174; at skilnaði, when they parted, Nj. 106 (above); at öllum minnum, at the general drinking of the toasts, Eg. 253; at fjöru, at the ebb; at flæðum, at flood tide, Fms. viii. 306, Orkn. 428; at hrörum, at an inquest, Grág. i. 50 (cp. ii. 141, 389); at sökum, at prosecutions, 30; at sinni, now, as yet, v. that word.

III. ellipt., or adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr,’ of the future time:

1. ellipt., komanda or the like being understood, with reference to the seasons of the year; at sumri, at vetri, at hausti, at vári, next summer, winter…, Ísl. ii. 242; at miðju sumri, at ári, at Midsummer, next year, Fas. i. 516; at miðjum vetri, Fms. iv. 237,

2. adding ‘komanda’ or ‘er kemr;’ at ári komanda, Bárð. 177; at vári er kemr, Dipl. iii. 6.

IV. used with an absolute dat. and with a pres. part.:

1. with pres. part.; at morni komanda, on the coming morrow, Fms. i. 263; at sér lifanda, in vivo, in his life time, Grág. ii. 202; at þeim sofundum, illis dormientibus, Hkr. i. 234; at öllum ásjándum, in the sight of all, Fms. x. 329; at úvitanda konungi, illo nesciente, without his knowledge, 227; at áheyranda höfðingjanum, in the chief’s bearing, 235.

2. of past time with a past part. (Lat. abl. absol.); at hræjum fundnum, on the bodies being found, Grág. ii. 87; at háðum dómum ok föstu þingi, during the session, the courts being set, i. 484; at liðnum sex vikum, after six weeks past, Band. 13; at svá búnu, so goru, svá komnu, svá mæltu (Lat. quibus rebus gestis, dictis, quo facto, dicto, etc.), v. those words; at úreyndu, without trial, without put ting one to the test, Ld. 76; at honum önduðum, illo mortuo.

3. ellipt. without ‘at;’ en þessum hlutum fram komnum, when all this has been done, Eb. 132.

V. in some phrases with a slight temp, notion; at görðum gildum, the fences being strong, Gþl. 387; at vörmu spori, at once, whilst the trail is warm; at úvörum, unawares, suddenly, Nj. 95, Ld. 132; at þessu, at this cost, on that condition, Eb. 38, Nj. 55; at illum leiki, to have a narrow escape, now við illan leik, Fms. ix. 473; at því, that granted, Grág. ii. 33: at því, at pessu, thereafter, thereupon, Nj. 76.

2. denoting succession, without interruption, one after another; hverr at öðrum, annarr maðr at öðrum, aðrir at öðrum; eina konu at annarri, Eg. 91, Fms. ii. 236, vi. 25, Bs. i. 22, 625. 80, H. E. i. 522.

C. METAPH. and in various cases:

I. denoting a transformation or change into, to, with the notion of destruction; brenna at ösku, at köldum kolum, to burn to ashes, to be quite destroyed, Fms. i. 105, Edda 3, Sturl. ii. 51: with the notion of transformation or transfiguration, in such phrases as, verða at e-u, göra e-t at e-u, to turn it into:

α. by a spell; verða at ormi, to become a snake, Fms. xi. 158; at flugdrekum, Gullþ. 7; urðu þau bönd at járni, Edda 40.

β. by a natural process it can often be translated by an acc. or by as; göra e-n at urðarmanni, to make him an outlaw, Eg. 728; græða e-n at orkumlamanni, to heal him so as to maim him for life, of bad treatment by a leech, Eb. 244: in the law terms, sár görist at ben, a wound turning into a ben, proving to be mortal, Grág., Nj.; verða at ljúgvætti, to prove to be a false evidence, Grág. i. 44; verða at sætt, to turn into reconciliation, Fms. i. 13; göra e-t at reiði málum, to take offence at, Fs. 20; at nýjum tíðindum, to tell as news, Nj. 14; verða fátt at orðum, to be sparing of words, 18; kveðr (svá) at orði, to speak, utter, 10; verða at þrifnaði, to geton well, Fms. vii. 196: at liði, at skaða, to be a help or hurt to one; at bana, to cause one’s death, Nj. 223, Eg. 21, Grág. ii. 29: at undrum, at hlátri, to become a wonder, a laughing-stock, 623. 35, Eg. 553.

II. denoting capacity, where it may be translated merely by as or for; gefa at Jólagjöf, to give for a Christmas-box, Eg. 516; at gjöf, for a present; at erfð, at láni, launum, as an inheritance, a loan; at kaupum ok sökum, for buying and selling, Ísl. ii. 223, Grág. i. 423; at solum, ii. 204; at herfangi, as spoil or plunder; at sakbótum, at niðgjöldum, as a compensation, weregeld, i. 339, ii. 171, Hkr. ii. 168; taka at gíslingu, to take as an hostage, Edda 15; eiga e-n at vin, at óvin, to have one as friend or foe, illt er at eiga þræl at eingavin, ‘tis ill to have a thrall for one’s bosom friend (a proverb), Nj. 77; fæða, eiga, at sonum (syni), to beget a son, Edda 8, Bs. i. 60 (but eiga at dóttur cannot be said); hafa möttul at yfirhöfn, Fms. vii. 201; verða nökkut at manni (mönnum), to turn out to be a worthy man; verða ekki at manni, to turn out a worthless person, xi. 79, 268.

2. in such phrases as, verða at orðum, to come towards, Nj. 26; var þat at erindum, Eg. 148; hafa at veizlum, to draw veizlur ( dues) from, Fms. iv. 275, Eg. 647; gora e-t at álitum, to take it into consideration, Nj. 3.

III. denoting belonging to, fitting, of parts of the whole or the like; vóru at honum (viz. the sword) hjölt gullbúin, the sword was ornamented with a hilt of gold, Ld. 330; umgörð at ( belonging to) sverði, Fs. 97 (Hs.) in a verse; en ef mór er eigi at landinu, if there be no turf moor belonging to the land, Grág. ii. 338; svá at eigi brotnaði nokkuð at Orminum, so that no harm happened to the ship Worm, Fms. x. 356; hvatki er meiðir at skipinu eðr at reiðinu eðr at viðum, damage done t o …, Grág. ii. 403; lesta ( to injure) hús at lásum, við eðr torfi, 110; ef land hefir batnað at húsum, if the land has been bettered as to its buildings, 210; cp. the phrase, göra at e-u, to repair: hamlaðr at höndum eðr fótum, maimed as to hands or feet, Eg. 14; heill at höndum en hrumr at fótum, sound in band, palsied in foot, Fms. vii. 12; lykill at skrá, a key belonging, fitting, to the latch; hurð at húsi; a key ‘gengr at’ ( fits) skrá; and many other phrases. 2. denoting the part by which a thing is held or to which it belongs, by; fá, taka at…, to grasp by …; þú tókt við sverði hans at hjöltunum, you took it by the bill, Fms. i. 15; draga út björninn at hlustum, to pull out the bear by the ears, Fas. ii. 237; at fótum, by the feet, Fms. viii. 363; mæla ( to measure) at hrygg ok at jaðri, by the edge or middle of the stuff, Grág. i. 498; kasta e-m at höfði, head foremost, Nj. 84; kjósa e-n at fótum, by the feet alone, Edda 46; hefja frændsemi at bræðrum, eða at systkynum, to reckon kinship by the brother’s or the sister’s side, Grág. i. 28; kjósa at afli, at álitum, by strength, sight, Gs. 8, belongs rather to the following.

IV. in respect of, as regards, in regard to, as to; auðigr at fé, wealthy of goods, Nj. 16, 30, 51; beztir hestar at reið, the best racehorses, 186; spekingr at viti, a man of great intellect, Ld. 124; vænn (fagr) at áliti, fair of face, Nj. 30, Bs. i. 61; kvenna vænst at ásjónu ok vits munum, of surpassing beauty and intellect, Ld. 122; fullkominn at hyggju, 18; um fram aðra menn at vinsældum ok harðfengi, of surpassing popularity and hardihood, Eb. 30.

2. a law term, of challenging jurors, judges, or the like, on account of, by reason of; ryðja ( to challenge) at mægðum, guðsifjum, frændsemi, hrörum …; at leiðarlengd, on account of distance, Grág. i. 30, 50, Nj. (freq.)

3. in arithm. denoting proportion; at helmingi, þriðjungi, fjórðungi, tíunda hluta, cp. Lat. ex asse, quadrante, for the half, third… part; máttr skal at magni (a proverb), might and main go together, Hkr. ii. 236; þú munt vera at því mikill fræðimaðr á kvæði, in the same proportion, as great, Fms. vi. 391, iii. 41; at e-s hluta, at… leiti, for one’s part, in turn, as far as one is con cerned, Grág. i. 322, Eg. 309, Fms. iii. 26 (freq.): at öðrum kosti, in the other case, otherwise (freq.) More gener., at öllu, öngu, in all (no) respects; at sumu, einhverju, nokkru, partly; at flestu, mestu, chiefly.

4. as a paraphrase of a genitive; faðir, móðir at barni (= barns); aðili at sök (= sakar a.); morðingi at barni (= barns), faðerni at barni (barns); illvirki at fé manna (cp. Lat. felo de se), niðrfall at sökum (saka), land gangr at fiskum (fiska), Fms. iv. 274, Grág. i. 277, 416, N. G. L. i. 340, K. Þ. K. 112, Nj. 21.

5. the phrase ‘at sér,’ of himself or in himself, either ellipt. or by adding the participle görr, and with the adverbs vel, ilia, or the like; denoting breeding, bearing, endowments, character …; væn kona, kurteis ok vel at sér, an accomplished, well-bred, gifted lady, Nj. I; vitr maðr ok vel at sér, a wise man and thoroughly good in feeling and bearing, 5; þú ert maðr vaskr ok vel at þér, 49; gerr at sér, accomplished, 51; bezt at sér görr, the finest, best bred man, 39, Ld. 124; en þó er hann svá vel at sér, so generous, Nj. 77; þeir höfðingjar er svá vóru vel at sér, so noble-minded, 198, Fms. i. 160: the phrase ‘at sér’ is now only used of knowledge, thus maðr vel að sér means clever, a man of great knowledge; illa að sér, a blockhead.

6. denoting relations to colour, size, value, age, and the like; hvitr, svartr, grár, rauðr … at lit, white, swarthy, gray, red … of colour, Bjarn. 55, 28, Ísl. ii. 213, etc.; mikill, lítill, at stærð, vexti, tall, small of size, etc.; ungr, gamall, barn, at aldri, young, old, a child of age; tvítugr, þrítugr … at aldri, twenty, thirty … years of age (freq.): of animals; kyr at fyrsta, öðrum … kálfi, a cow having calved once, twice…, Jb. 346: value, amount, currency of money, kaupa e-t at mörk, at a mark, N. G. L. 1. 352; ok er eyririnn at mörk, amounts to a mark, of the value of money, Grág. i. 392; verðr þá at hálfri murk vaðmála eyrir, amounts to a half a mark, 500.

β. metaph. of value, connected with verbs denoting to esteem, hold; meta, hafa, halda at miklu, litlu, vettugi, engu, or the like, to hold in high or low esteem, to care or not to care for (freq.): geta e-s at góðu, illu, öngu, to mention one favourably, unfavourably, indifferently … (freq.), prop. in connection with. In many cases it may be translated by in; ekki er mark at draumum, there is no meaning in dreams, no heed is to be paid to dreams, Sturl. ii. 217; bragð er at þá barnið finnr, it goes too far, when even a child takes offence (a proverb): hvat er at því, what does it mean? Nj. 11; hvert þat skip er vöxtr er at, any ship of mark, i. e. however small, Fms. xi. 20.

V. denoting the source of a thing:

1. source of infor mation, to learn, perceive, get information from; Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði, learnt as her pupil, at her hands, as St. Paul at the feet of Gamaliel, (just as the Scotch say to speer or ask at a person); Ari nam at Þorgeiri afraðskoll, Hkr. (pref.); nema kunnáttu at e-m, used of a pupil, Fms. i. 8; nema fræði at e-m, xi. 396.

2. of receiving, acquiring, buying, from; þiggja e-t at e-m, to receive a thing at his hands, Nj. 51; líf, to be pardoned, Fms. x. 173; kaupa land at e-m, to buy it from, Landn. 72, Íb. II, (now af is more freq. in this sense); geta e-t at e-m, to obtain, procure at one’s hands, impetrare; þeirra manna er þeir megu þat geta at, who are willing to do that, Grág. i. I; heimta e-t at e-m (now af), to call in, demand (a debt, money), 279; fala e-t at e-m (now af), to chaffer for or cheapen anything, Nj. 73; sækja e-t at e-m, to ask, seek for; sækja heilræði ok traust at e-m, 98; leiga e-t at e-m (now af), to borrow, Grág. ii. 334; eiga e-t (fé, skuld) at e-m, to be owed money by any one, i. 399: metaph. to deserve of one, Nj. 113; eiga mikit at e-m, to have much to do with, 138; hafa veg, virðing, styrk, at, to derive honour, power from, Fms. vi. 71, Eg. 44, Bárð. 174; gagn, to be of use, Ld. 216; mein, tálma, mischief, disadvantage, 158, 216, cp. Eg. 546; ótta, awe, Nj. 68.

VI. denoting conformity, according to, Lat. secundum, ex, after; at fornum sið, Fms. i. 112; at sögn Ara prests, as Ari relates, on his authority, 55; at ráði allra vitrustu manna, at the advice of, Ísl. ii. 259, Ld. 62; at lögum, at landslögum, by the law of the land, Grág., Nj.; at líkindum, in all likelihood, Ld. 272; at sköpum, in due course (poet.); at hinum sama hætti, in the very same manner, Grág. i. 90; at vánum, as was to be expected, Nj. 255; at leyfi e-s, by one’s leave, Eg. 35; úlofi, Grág. ii. 215; at ósk, vilja e-s, as one likes…; at mun, id. (poet.); at sólu, happily (following the course of the sun), Bs. i. 70, 137; at því sem …, as to infer from …, Nj. 124: ‘fara, láta, ganga at’ denotes to yield, agree to, to comply with, give in, Ld. 168, Eg. 18, Fms. x. 368.

VII. in phrases nearly or quite adverbial; gróa, vera græddr, at heilu, to be quite healed, Bárð. 167, Eb. 148; bíta at snöggu, to bite it bare, Fms. xi. 6; at þurru, till it becomes dry, Eb. 276; at endilöngu, all along, Fas. ii; vinnast at litlu, to avail little, 655 x. 14; at fullu, fully, Nj. 257, Hkr. i. 171; at vísu, of a surety, surely, Ld. 40; at frjálsu, freely, 308; at líku, at sömu, equally, all the same, Hom. 80, Nj. 267; at röngu, wrongly, 686 B. 2; at hófi, temperately, Lex. Poët.; at mun, at ráði, at marki, to a great extent; at hringum, utterly, all round, (rare), Fms. x. 389; at einu, yet, Orkn. 358; svá at einu, því at einu, allt at einu, yet, however, nevertheless.

VIII. connected with comparatives of adverbs and adjectives, and strengthening the sense, as in Engl. ‘the,’ so much the more, all the more; ‘at’ heldr tveimr, at ek munda gjarna veita yðr öllum, where it may be translated by so much the more to two, as I would willingly grant it to all of you; hon grét at meir, she grat (wept) the more, Eg. 483; þykir oss at líkara, all the more likely, Fms. viii. 6; þess at harðari, all the harder, Sturl. iii. 202 C; svá at hinn sé bana at nær, Grág. ii. 117; at auðnara, at hólpnara, the more happy, Al. 19, Grett. 116 B; þess at meiri, Fms. v. 64; auvirðismaðr at meiri, Sturl. ii. 139; maðr at vaskari, id.; at feigri, any the more fey, Km. 22; maðr at verri, all the worse, Nj. 168; ok er ‘at’ firr…, at ek vil miklu heldr, cp. Lat. tantum abest… ut, Eg. 60.

β. following after a negation; eigi at síðr, no less, Nj. 160, Ld. 146; eigi… at meiri maðr, any better, Eg. 425, 489; erat héra at borgnara, any the better off for that, Fms. vii. 116; eigi at minni, no less for that, Edda (pref.) 146; eigi at minna, Ld. 216, Fms. ix. 50; ekki at verri drengr, not a bit worse for that, Ld. 42; er mér ekki son minn at bættari, þótt…, 216; at eigi vissi at nær, any more, Fas. iii. 74.

IX. following many words:

1. verbs, esp. those denoting, a. to ask, enquire, attend, seek, e. g. spyrja at, to speer (ask) for; leita at, to seek for; gæta, geyma at, to pay attention to; huga, hyggja at; hence atspurn, to enquire, aðgæzla, athugi, attention, etc.

β. verbs denoting laughter, play, joy, game, cp. the Engl. to play at …, to laugh at …; hlæja, brosa at e-u, to laugh, smile at it; leika (sér) at e-u, to play at; þykja gaman at, to enjoy; hæða, göra gys at …, to make sport at …

γ. verbs denoting assistance, help; standa, veita, vinna, hjálpa at; hence atstoð, atvinna, atverk:—mode, proceeding; fara at, to proceed, hence atför and atferli:—compliance; láta, fara at e-u, v. above:— fault; e-t er at e-u, there is some fault in it, Fms. x. 418; skorta at e-u, to fall short of, xi. 98:—care, attendance; hjúkra at, hlýja at, v. these words:—gathering, collecting; draga, reiða, flytja, fá at, congerere:—engagement, arrival, etc.; sækja at, to attack; ganga at, vera at, to be about; koma at, ellipt. to arrive: göra at, to repair: lesta at, to impair (v. above); finna at, to criticise (mod.); telja at, id.: bera at, to happen; kveða at e-m, to address one, 625. 15, (kveða at (ellipt.) now means to pronounce, and of a child to utter (read) whole syllables); falla at, of the flood-tide (ellipt.): metaph. of pains or straits surrounding one; þreyngja, herða at, to press hard: of frost and cold, with regard to the seasons; frjósa at, kólna at, to get really cold (SI. 44), as it were from the cold stiffening all things: also of the seasons themselves; hausta, vetra að, when the season really sets in; esp. the cold seasons, ‘sumra at’ cannot be used, yet we may say ‘vára að’ when the spring sets in, and the air gets mild.

δ. in numberless other cases which may partly be seen below.

2. connected ellipt. with adverbs denoting motion from a place; norðan, austan, sunnan, vestan at, those from the north, east…; utan at, innan at, from the outside or inside.

3. with adjectives (but rarely), e. g. kærr, elskr, virkr (affectionate), vandr (zealous), at e-m; v. these words.

WITH ACC.

TEMP.: Lat. post, after, upon, esp. freq. in poetry, but rare in prose writers, who use eptir; nema reisi niðr at nið (= maðr eptir mann), in succession, of erecting a monument, Hm. 71; in prose, at þat. posthac, deinde, Fms. x. 323, cp. Rm., where it occurs several times, 2, 6, 9, 14, 18, 24, 28, 30, 35; sonr á at taka arf at föður sinn, has to take the inheritance after his father, Grág. i. 170 new Ed.; eiga féránsdóm at e-n, Grág. i. 89; at Gamla fallinn, after the death of G., Fms. x. 382; in Edda (Gl.) 113 ought to be restored, grét ok at Oð, gulli Freyja, she grat (wept) tears of gold for her lost husband Od. It is doubtful if it is ever used in a purely loc. sense; at land, Grág. (Sb.)ii. 211, is probably corrupt; at hönd = á hönd, Grág. (Sb.) i. 135; at mót = at móti, v. this word.

☞ In compounds (v. below) at- or að- answers in turn to Lat. ad- or in- or con-; atdráttr e. g. denotes collecting; atkoma is adventus: it may also answer to Lat. ob-, in atburðr = accidence, but might also be compared with Lat. occurrere.

2.

and að, the mark of the infinitive [cp. Goth. du; A. S. and Engl. to; Germ. zu]. Except in the case of a few verbs ‘at’ is always placed immediately before the infinitive, so as to be almost an inseparable part of the verb.

I. it is used either,

1. as, a simple mark of the infinitive, only denoting an action and independent of the subject, e. g. at ganga, at hlaupa, at vita, to go, to run, to know; or,

2. in an objective sense when following such verbs as bjóða segja…, to invite, command …; hann bauð þeim at ganga, at sitja, be bade, ordered them to go, sit, or the like; or as gefa and fá; gefa e-m at drekka, at eta, to give one to drink or to eat, etc. etc.

β. with the additional notion of intention, esp. when following verba cogitandi; hann ætlaði, hafði í hyggju at fara, he had it in his mind to go (where ‘to go’ is the real object to ætlaði and hafði í hyggju).

3. answering to the Gr. ινα, denoting intention, design, in order to; hann gékk í borg at kaupa silfr, in order to buy, Nj. 280; hann sendi riddara sína með þeim at varðveita þær, 623. 45: in order to make the phrase more plain, ‘svá’ and ‘til’ are frequently added, esp. in mod. writers, ‘svá at’ and contr. ‘svát’ (the last however is rare), ‘til at’ and ‘til þess at,’ etc.

II. in the earlier times the infin., as in Greek and Lat., had no such mark; and some verbs remain that cannot be followed by ‘at;’ these verbs are almost the same in Icel. as in Engl.:

α. the auxiliary verbs vil, mun ( μέλλω), skal; as in Engl. to is never used after the auxiliaries shall, will, must; ek vil ganga, I will go; ek mun fara, (as in North. E.) I mun go; ek skal göra þat, I shall do that, etc.

β. the verbs kunna, mega, as in Engl. I can or may do, I dare say; svá hygginn at hann kunni fyrir sökum ráða, Grág. ii. 75; í öllu er prýða má góðan höfðingja, Nj. 90; vera má, it may be; vera kann þat, id.: kunnu, however, takes ‘at’ whenever it means to know, and esp. in common language in phrases such as, það kann að vera, but vera kann þat, v. above.

γ. lata, biðja, as in Engl. to let, to bid; hann lét (bað) þá fara, he let (bade) them go.

δ. þykkja, þykjast, to seem; hann þykir vera, he is thought to be: reflex., hann þykist vera, sibi videtur: impers., mér þykir vera, mibi videtur, in all cases without ‘at.’ So also freq. the verbs hugsa, hyggja, ætla, halda, to think, when denoting merely the act of thinking; but if there be any notion of intention or purpose, they assume the ‘at;’ thus hann ætlaði, hugði, þá vera góða menn, he thought them to be, acc. c. inf.; but ætlaði at fara, meant to go, etc.

ε. the verbs denoting to see, bear; sjá, líta, horfa á … ( videre); heyra, audire, as in Engl. I saw them come, I heard him tell, ek sá þá koma, ek heyrði hann tala.

ζ. sometimes after the verbs eiga and ganga; hann gékk steikja, be went to roast, Vkv. 9; eiga, esp. when a mere periphrasis instead of skal, móður sína á maðr fyrst fram færa (better at færa), Grág. i. 232; á þann kvið einskis meta, 59; but at meta, id. l. 24; ráða, nema, göra …, freq. in poetry, when they are used as simple auxiliary verbs, e. g. nam hann sér Högna hvetja at rúnum, Skv. 3. 43.

η. hljóta and verða, when used in the sense of must (as in Engl. he must go), and when placed after the infin.of another verb; hér muntu vera hljóta, Nj. 129; but hljóta at vera: fara hlýtr þú, Fms. 1. 159; but þú hlýtr at fara: verða vita, ii. 146; but verða at vita: hann man verða sækja, þó verðr (= skal) maðr eptir mann lifa, Fms. viii. 19, Fas. ii. 552, are exceptional cases.

θ. in poetry, verbs with the verbal neg. suffix ‘-at,’ freq. for the case of euphony, take no mark of the infinitive, where it would be indispensable with the simple verb, vide Lex. Poët. Exceptional cases; hvárt sem hann vill ‘at’ verja þá sök, eða, whatever he chooses, either, Grág. i. 64; fyrr viljum vér enga kórónu at bera, en nokkut ófrelsi á oss at taka, we would rather bear no crown than …, Fms. x. 12; the context is peculiar, and the ‘at’ purposely added. It may be left out ellipt.; e. g. þá er guð gefr oss finnast (= at finnast), Dipl. ii. 14; gef honum drekka (= at drekka), Pr. 470; but mostly in unclassical writers, in deeds, or the like, written nastily and in an abrupt style.

3.

and að, conj. [Goth. þatei = οτι; A. S. þät; Engl. that; Germ, dass; the Ormul. and Scot. at, see the quotations sub voce in Jamieson; in all South-Teutonic idioms with an initial dental: the Scandinavian idioms form an exception, having all dropped this consonant; Swed. åt, Dan. at]. In Icel. the Bible translation (of the 16th century) was chiefly based upon that of Luther; the hymns and the great bulk of theol. translations of that time were also derived from Germany; therefore the germanised form það frequently appears in the Bible, and was often employed by theol. authors in sermons since the time of the Reformation. Jón Vidalin, the greatest modern Icel. preacher, who died in 1720, in spite of his thoroughly classical style, abounds in the use of this form; but it never took root in the language, and has never passed into the spoken dialect. After a relative or demonstr. pronoun, it freq. in mod. writers assumes the form eð, hver eð, hverir eð, hvað eð, þar eð. Before the prep. þú (tu), þ changes into t, and is spelt in a single word attú, which is freq. in some MS.;—now, however, pronounced aððú, aððeir, aððið …, = að þú…, with the soft Engl. th sound. It gener. answers to Lat. ut, or to the relat. pron. qui.

I. that, relative to svá, to denote proportion, degree, so…, that, Lat. tam, tantus, tot…, ut; svá mikill lagamaðr, at…, so great a lawyer, that…, Nj. 1; hárið svá mikit, at þat…, 2; svá kom um síðir því máli, at Sigvaldi, it came so far, that…, Fms. xi. 95, Edda 33. Rarely and unclass., ellipt. without svá; Bæringr var til seinn eptir honum, at hann … (= svá at), Bær. 15; hlífði honum, at hann sakaði ekki, Fas. iii. 441.

II. it is used,

1. with indic, in a narrative sense, answering partly to Gr. οτι, Lat. quod, ut, in such phrases as, it came to pass, happened that …; þat var einhverju sinni, at Höskuldr hafði vinaboð, Nj. 2; þat var á palmdrottinsdag, at Ólafr konungr gékk út um stræti, Fms. ii. 244.

2. with subj. answering to Lat. acc. with infin., to mark the relation of an object to the chief verb, e. g. vilda ek at þú réðist, I wished that you would, Nj. 57.

β. or in an oblique sentence, answering to ita ut…; ef svá kann verða at þeir láti…, if it may be so that they might…, Fms. xi. 94.

γ. with a subj. denoting design, answering to ϊνα or Lat. ut with subj., in order that; at öll veraldar bygðin viti, ut sciat totus orbis, Stj.; þeir skáru fyrir þá melinn, at þeir dæi eigi af sulti, ut ne fame perirent, Nj. 265; fyrsti hlutr bókarinnar er Kristindómsbálkr, at menn skili, in order that men may understand, Gþl. p. viii.

III. used in connection with conjunctions,

1. esp. þó, því, svá; þó at freq. contr. þótt; svát is rare and obsolete.

α. þóat, þótt (North. E. ‘thof’), followed by a subjunctive, though, although, Lat. etsi, quamquam (very freq.); þóat nokkurum mönnum sýnist þetta með freku sett… þá viljum vér, Fms. vi. 21: phrases as, gef þú mér þó at úverðugri, etsi indignae (dat.), Stj. MS. col. 315, are unclass., and influenced by the Latin: sometimes ellipt. without ‘þó,’ eigi mundi hón þá meir hvata göngu sinni, at (= þóat) hon hraeddist bana sinn, Edda 7, Nj. 64: ‘þó’ and ‘at’ separated, svarar hann þó rétt, at hann svari svá, Grág. i. 23; þó er rétt at nýta, at hann sé fyrr skorinn, answering to Engl. yet—though, Lat. attamen —etsi, K. Þ. K.

β. því at, because, Lat. nam, quia, with indic.; því at allir vóru gerfiligir synir hans, Ld. 68; því at af íþróttum verðr maðr fróðr, Sks. 16: separated, því þegi ek, at ek undrumst, Fms. iii. 201; því er þessa getið, at þat þótti, it i s mentioned because …, Ld. 68.

γ. svá at, so that, Lat. ut, ita ut; grátrinn kom upp, svá at eingi mátti öðrum segja, Edda 37: separated, so … that, svá úsvúst at …, so bad weather, that, Bs. i. 339, etc.

2. it is freq. used superfluously, esp. after relatives; hver at = hverr, quis; því at = því, igitur; hverr at þekkr ok þægiligr mun verða, Fms. v. 159; hvern stvrk at hann mundi fá, 44; ek undrumst hvé mikil ógnarraust at liggr í þér, iii. 201; því at ek mátti eigi þar vera elligar, því at þar var kristni vel haldin, Fas. i. 340.

IV. as a relat. conj.:

1. temp, when, Lat. quum; jafnan er ( est) mér þá verra er ( quum) ek fer á braut þaðan, en þá at ( quum) ek kem, Grett. 150 A; þar til at vér vitum, till we know, Fms. v. 52; þá at ek lýsta (= þá er), when, Nj. 233.

2. since, because; ek færi yðr (hann), at þér eruð í einum hrepp allir, because of your being all of the same Rape, Grág. i. 260; eigi er kynlegt at ( though) Skarphéðinn sé hraustr, at þat er mælt at…, because (since) it is a saying that…, Nj. 64.

V. in mod. writers it is also freq. superfluously joined to the conjunctions, ef að = ef, si, (Lv. 45 is from a paper MS.), meðan að = meðan, dum; nema að, nisi; fyrst að = fyrst, quoniam; eptir að, síðan að, postquam; hvárt að = hvárt, Lat. an. In the law we find passages such as, þá er um er dæmt eina sök, at þá eigu þeir aptr at ganga í dóminn, Grág. i. 79; ef þing ber á hina helgu viku, at þat á eigi fyrir þeim málum at standa, 106; þat er ok, at þeir skulu reifa mál manna, 64; at þeir skulu með váttorð þá sök sækja, 65: in all these cases ‘at’ is either superfluous or, which is more likely, of an ellipt. nature, ‘the law decrees’ or ‘it is decreed’ being understood. The passages Sks. 551, 552, 568, 718 B, at lokit (= at ek hefi lokit), at hugleitt (= at ek hefi h.), at sent (= at ek hefi sent) are quite exceptional.

4.

and að, an indecl. relat. pronoun [Ulf. þatei = ος, ος αν, οστις, οσπερ, οιος, etc.; Engl. that, Ormul. at], with the initial letter dropped, as in the conj. at, (cp. also the Old Engl. at, which is both a conj. and a pronoun, e. g. Barbour vi. 24 in Jamieson: ‘I drede that his gret wassalage, | And his travail may bring till end, | That at men quhilc full litil wend.’ | ‘His mestyr speryt quhat tithings a t he saw.’—Wyntoun v. 3. 89.) In Icel. ‘er’ (the relat. pronoun) and ‘at’ are used indifferently, so that where one MS. reads ‘er,’ another reads ‘at,’ and vice versâ; this may easily be seen by looking at the MSS.; yet as a rule ‘er’ is much more freq. used. In mod. writers ‘at’ is freq. turned into ‘eð,’ esp. as a superfluous particle after the relative pron. hverr (hver eð, hvað eð, hverir eð, etc.), or the demonstr. sá (sá eð, þeir eð, hinir eð, etc.):—who, which, that, enn bezta grip at ( which) hafði til Íslands komið, Ld. 202; en engi mun sá at ( cui) minnisamara mun vera, 242; sem blótnaut at ( quae) stærst verða, Fms. iii. 214; þau tiðendi, at mér þætti verri, Nj. 64, etc. etc.

5.

n. collision (poët.); odda at, crossing of spears, crash of spears, Höfuðl. 8.

β. a fight or bait of wild animals, esp. of horses, v. hesta-at and etja.

6.

the negative verbal suffix, v. -a.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > AT
23 VERÐA

(verð; varð, urðum; orðinn, vorðinn), v.

1) to happen, come to pass;

ætluðu allir, at þeir myndi tala um mál sitt, en þat varð ekki, but it came not to pass, it was not so;

þá varð óp mikit at lögbergi, then there arose a great shout at the Lawhill;

2) verða e-m, to happen to, befall one (slikt verðr opt ungum mönnum);

þat varð Skarphéðni, at stökk í sundr skóþvengr hans, it happened to S. that his shoe-string snapped asunder;

sjaldan verðr víti vörum, the wary man will seldom make a slip;

e-m verðr þörf e-s, one comes to be in need of;

3) to happen to be, occur;

í lœk þann, er þar verðr, in the brook that happens to be there;

varð fyrir þeim fjörðr, they came on a fjord;

verða á leið e-s, to be on one’s path, happen to one;

4) verða brottu, to leave, absent oneself (þeir sá þann sinn kost líkastan at verða á brottu);

verða úti, to go away (verð úti ok drag ongan spott at oss);

to perish in a storm from cold (sumir urðu úti);

þeim þótti honum seint heim verða, they thought that he was long in coming home;

5) with acc. to lose;

kváðust okkr hafa orðit bæði, said that they had lost us both;

6) followed by a noun, a., pp., adv., as predicate, to become;

þá verðr þat þinn bani, it will be thy death;

verða glaðr, hryggr, reiðr, to become glad, sad, angry;

verða dauðr to die (áðr Haraldr inn hárfagri yrði dauðr) with participles;

ok varð ekki eptir honum gengit, he was not pursued;

verða þeir ekki fundnir, they could not be found;

blóð hans varð ekki stöðvat, the blood could not be staunched;

þeim varð litit til hafs, they happened to look seaward;

impers., e-m verðr bilt, one is amazed;

Kolbeini varð ekki fyrir, K. lost his head, was paralysed;

with adverbs; hann varð vel við skaða sinn, he bore his loss well, like a man;

jarl varð illa við þetta, the earl was vexed by this;

7) with infin., denoting necessity, one must, needs, is forced, obliged to do;

þat verðr hverr at vinna, er ætlat er, every one must do the work that is set before him;

þar er bera verðr til grjót, where stones have to be carried;

verð ek nú flýja, now I must flee;

8) with preps., verða af e-u, to come to pass (var um rœtt, at hann skyldi leita fara, en eigi varð af);

varð ekki af ferðinni, the journey came to nought was given up;

verðr þetta af, at hann tekr við sveinunum, the end was that at last he took the boys;

starf ok kostnaðr varð af þessu, trouble and expenses arose from this;

livat verðr af e-u, what becomes of;

hvat varð af húnum mínum, what has become of my cubs?;

verða at e-u, to become (verða at undri, undrsjónum);

veiztu, hvat þér mun verða at bana, knowest thou what will be the cause of thy death?;

verða at engu, to come to nothing;

verða á, to come on, happen;

þvat sem á yrði síðan, whatever might happen later on;

e-m verðr á, one makes a blunder, mistake (þótti þér ekki á verða fyrir honum, er hann náði eigi fénu?);

verða eptir, to be left (honum varð þar eptir geit ok hafr);

verða fyrir e-u, to meet with (verða fyrir goða reiði);

to forebode (verða fyrir stórfundum);

verða fyrir e-m, to be in one’s way, as a hindrance (því meira sem oss verðr fyrir, því harðara skulu þér niðr koma);

verða í, to happen (tókust nú upp leikar sem ekki hefði í orðit);

verða til e-s, to come forth to do a thing, be ready to;

en sá er nefndr Hermóðr, er til þeirar farar varð, who undertook this journey;

verða við e-m, to respond to (bið ek þik, at þú verðir við mér, þó at engi sé verðleiki til).

* * *

pres. verð, verðr, verð; pret. varð, vart (mod. varðst), varð; pl. urðu; subj. yrði: imperat. verð; part. orðinn; pl. orðnir, spelt phonetically ornir, Niðrst. 6: in later vellums occur freq. the forms vurðu, vyrði, vorðinn, see Introd.; but the old poets use it for alliteration as if it began with a vowel: with neg. suff. verðr-at, Fm. 6; varð-at, Vþm. 38; urðu-a it, Gh. 3; urðu-t. Lex. Poët.: [Ulf. wairþan = γίγνεσθαι, ἔσεσθαι; A. S. weorðan; Old Engl. worth, as in the phrase ‘woe worth the day!’ Germ. werden; Dan. vorde; Swed. varda.]

A. To become, happen, come to pass; sá atburðr varð, at …, Ó. H. 196; varð hitt at lyktum, at …, 191; ef svá verðr, at …, Al. 20; ef svá verðr ( if it so happen), at ek deyja, Eg. 34; fundr þeirra varð á Rogalandi, 32; mörg dæmi hafa orðit í forneskju, Ó. H. 73; varð þar hin snarpasta orrosta. Eg. 297; at því sem nú er orðit, Blas. 46; þá varð ( arose) hlátr mikill, id.; varð óp mikit, Nj.; þat varð um síðir, and so they did at last, 240; er þetta allvel orðit, well done, well happened, 187; þau tíðendi eru hér vorðin, Fms. iv. 309 (orðin, Ó. H. 139, l. c.); þat varð ekki, but it came not to pass, Nj.

2. adding dat. to happen, to befall one; þat varð mér, it befell me, Ísl. ii. (in a verse); varð þeim af in mesta deila, Nj. 189; Eyjólfi varð orðfall, speechlessness befell E., he faltered, 225; þat varð Skarphéðni at stökk í sundr skóþvengr hans, 145; urðu þeim þegar in sömu undr, 21.

3. to blunder, make a slip; þat varð þinni konu, at hón átti mög við mér, Ls. 40; sjaldan verðr viti vörum, Hm. 6; þat verðr mörgum manni at um myrkvan staf villisk, Eg. (in a verse); skalat honum þat verða optarr enn um sinn … ef eigi verðr þeim optarr enn um sinn, Grág. (Kb.) i. 55; e-m verðr Þorf e-s, to come in need of, Hm. 149; ef þeim verðr nökkut er honum hefir fylgt, if anything should befall them, Hom. 65; annat man þér verða (another fate, death, will be thine), enn þú sprongir, Sturl. iii. 225; cp. verða úti, to perish in a storm from cold, Fms. vii. 122; sumir urðu úti, Bs. i. 71; verða til, to perish.

4. to happen to be, to occur, or the like; í læk þann er þar verðr, in the brook that happens to be there, Eg. 163; holt þat er þar verðr, 746; varð þá enn brátt á er þvers varð fyrir þeim, þá kölluðu þeir þverá, 132; varð fyrir þeim fjörðr, they came on a fiord, 130; verða á leið e-s, to be in one’s path, happen to one, Ó. H. 181; taka þat sem á leið hans verðr, Grág. ii. 346; verða á fætr, to fall on one’s, feet, Fb. iii. 301; verða ek á fitjum, Vkv. 27; þeim þótti honum seint heim verða, Fbr. 8 new Ed.: verða brottu, to leave, absent oneself; þeir sá þann sinn kost líkastan at verða á brottu, Fms. vii. 204; verð í brottu í stað, begone, Fs. 64: verða úti, id., Nj. 16.

II. followed by a noun, adjective, participle, adverb, as predicate; þá verðr þat þinn bani, Nj. 94; hann varð tveggja manna bani, he became the bane of, i. e. slew, two men, 97; hann mun verða engi jafnaðar-maðr, Ld. 24; ef hann vyrði konungr, Fms. i. 20; verða biskup, prestr …, Bs. i. passim; ok verðr eigi gjöf, ef …, it becomes not a gift, if …, Grág. (Kb.) i. 130; verða þær málalyktir, at …, the end was that …, Nj. 88: verða alls hálft annat hundrat, the whole amount becomes, Rb. 88; honum varð vísa á munni, Fms. xi. 144; varð henni þá ljóð á munni, Fb. i. 525; þat varð henni á munni er hón sá þetta, Sd. 139: hví henni yrði þat at munni, Fms. xi. 149; þá er í meðal verðr, when there is an interval, leisure, Skálda (Thorodd): cp. the mod. phrase, þegar í milli veiðr fyrir honum, of the empty hour; varð Skarpheðinn þar í millum ok gaflhlaðsins, S. was jammed in between, Nj. 203; prob. ellipt. = verða fastr.

2. with adjectives, to become so and so:

α. verða glaðr, feginn, hryggr, to become glad, fain, sad, Fms. i. 21, viii. 19, passim; verða langlífr, to be long-lived, Bs. i. 640; verða gamall, to become old, Nj. 85; verða sjúkr, veykr, to become sick; verða sjónlauss, blindr, to become blind, Eg. 759; verða ungr í annat sinn, Fms. i. 20; verða varr, to become aware (see varr); verða víss, Nj. 268; verða sekr, to become outlawed; verða vátr, to become wet, 15; verða missáttr við e-n, Landn. 150 (and so in endless instances): in the phrase, verða dauðr, to die; dauðr varð inn Húnski, Am. 98; áðr Haraldr inn Hárfagri yrði dauðr, Íb. 6; síðan Njáll var(ð) dauðr, Nj. 238, and a few more instances, very freq. on Runic stones, but now obsolete.

β. with participles; verða búinn, to be ready, Fms. vii. 121; verða þeir ekki fundnir, they could not be found, Gísl. 56; verða staddr við e-t, to be present, Eg. 744; in mod. usage with a notion of futurity, e. g. eg verð búinn á morgun, I shall be ready to-morrow; eg verð farinn um það. I shall be gone then: with neut, part., járn er nýtekit verðr ór afli, just taken out of the furnace, Sks. 209 B; varð ekki eptir honum gengit, he was not pursued, Nj. 270; þeim varð litið til hafs, they happened to look, 125; honum varð litið upp til hlíðarinnar, 112; blóð varð eigi stöðvat, the blood could not be stopped, Fms. i. 46, Nj. 210.

γ. phrases, e-m verðr bilt, to be amazed, Edda 29, Korm. 40, Nj. 169; verða felmt, 105; verða íllt við, hverft við, id.; Kolbeini varð ekki fyrir, K. lost his head, was paralysed, as if stunned, Sturl. iii. 285.

3. with adverbs or adverbial phrases; ef þat bíðr at verða vet, Hm.; ma þetta verða vel þótt hitt yrði ílla, Nj.; verða verr enn til er stýrt, Róm. 321; hann varð vel við skaða sinn, bore it well, like a man, Eg. 76, Nj. 75; faðir hans varð ílla við þetta ( disliked it), ok kvað hann taka stein um megn sér, Fær. 58; jarl varð ílla við þetta, was much vexed by it, Fms. ix. 341; varð hann údrengiliga við sitt líflát, Ld. 234; hvernig varð hann við þá er þér rudduð skipið, Ó. H. 116; hversu Gunnarr varð við, how G. bore it, Nj. 82; verra verðr mér við, enn ek ætla at gott muni af leiða, 109; mér hefir orðit vel við þik í vetr, I have been pleased with thee this winter, Fms. vii. 112; eigi vildi ek svá við verða blóðlátið, fiskbleikr sem þú ert—Ek ætla, segir hinn, at þá myndir verr við verða ok ódrengiligar, 269; þar varð ílla með þeim, things went ill with them, they became enemies, Nj. 39: to behave, varð engum jafnvel til mín sem þessum, Fms. vii. 158; hann lætr sér verða á alla vega sem bezt til Áka, xi. 76; hann lét henni hafa orðit stórmannliga, Hkr. iii. 372.

III. with prepp., verða af; hvat er orðit af e-u, what is come of it? where is it? of a thing lost; segðu mér þat, hvat varð af húnum mínum, Vkv. 30; hvat af motrinum er orðit, Ld. 208; nú hverfr Óspakr á brott svá at eigi vitu menn hvat af honum verðr, Band. 5; varð ekki af atlögu búanda, Ó. H. 184; ekki mun af sættum verða, Fb. i. 126: to come to pass, varð ekki af eptir-för, it came to naught; varð því ekki af ferðinni, Ísl. ii. 247; Símon kvað þá ekki mundu af því verða, S. said that could not be, Fms. vii. 250; ok verðr þetta af, at hann tekr við sveinunum, the end was that at last he took the boys, Fær. 36; eigi mun þér þann veg af verða, Karl. 197:—verða at e-u, to come to; hvat þér mun verða at bana, what will be the cause of thy death, Nj. 85; verða at flugu, Fas. i. 353 (see ‘at’ C. I. α); verða at undri, skömm, honum varð ekki at því kaupi, the bargain came to naught for him, Al. 7; cp. the mod. honum varð ekki að því, it failed for him:—e-m verðr á (cp. á-virðing), to make a blunder, mistake; kölluðu þat mjök hafa vorðit á fyrir föður sínum, at hann tók hann til sín, Fs. 35; þótti þér ekki á verða fyrir honum er hann náði eigi fénu, Nj. 33; Þorkell settisk þá niðr, ok hafði hvárki orðit á fyrir honum áðr né síðan, 185; aldri varð á um höfðingskap hans, 33:—verða eptir, to be left, Rb. 126, Stj. 124, 595; honum varð þar eptir geit ok hafr, Hrafn. 1:—verða fyrir e-u, to be hit, be the object of; fyrir víginu hefir orðit Svartr, S. is the person killed, Nj. 53; verða fyrir öfund, görningum, to be the victim of, Lex. Poët.: e-m verðr lítið fyrir e-u, it costs one small effort (see fyrir):—verða til e-s, to come forth to do a thing, volunteer, or the like; en sá er nefndr Hermóðr er til þeirrar farar varð, Edda 37; til þess hefir engi orðit fyrr en þú, at skora mér á hólm, Ísl. ii. 225; en engi varð til þess, no one volunteered, Nj. 86; einn maðr varð til at spyrja, 82; þá verðr til ok svarar máli konungs sá maðr, er …, Odd. 12; hverr sem til verðr um síðir at koma þeim á réttan veg, Fb. i. 273: fengu þeir ekki samit, því at þeim varð mart til, many things happened, i. e. so as to bring discord, Sturl. ii. 17 C; mundi okkr Einari eigi annat smátt til orðit, Hrafn. 9; eigi varð verri maðr til, there was no worse man, Stj. 482:—verða við, to respond to; bið ek þik at þú verðir við mér þó at engi sé verðleiki til, Barl. 59; at hann beiddi Snorra ásjá, en ef hann yrði eigi við bað hann Gretti fara vestr, Grett. 112 new Ed.; verða við bæn e-s, to grant one’s request, passim.

IV. with infin., denoting necessity, one must, needs, one is forced, obliged to do; þat verðr hverr at vinna er ætlað er, Nj. 10; varð ek þá at selja Hrafni sjálfdæmi, Ísl. ii. 245; eða yrði þeir út at hafa þann ómaga, Grág. (Kb.) ii. 21; þat munu þér þá reyna verða, you must try, Fbr. 23 new Ed.; þar er bera verðr til grjót, where stones have to be carried, Grág. (Kb.) ii. 90; lágu hestarnir í kafi svá at draga varð upp, Eg. 546; en vita verð ek ( I must know) hvar til þetta heyrir, Fms. ii. 146; munu þér því verða annars-staðar á leita, Nj. 223; at hann man verða sækja á ókunn lönd, Fms. viii. 19; ok verðr af því líða yfir þat, it must be passed by, Post.; maðr verðr eptir mann lifa, a saying, Fas. ii. 552; verð ek nú flýja, Ó. H. 188; urðu þeir at taka við Kristni, 105; vér höfum orðit til at hætta lífi ok sálu, hefir margr saklauss orðit at láta, sumir féit ok sumir fjörit, 31, 32; vér munum verða lifa við öðrum veiði-mat, Hým. 16; verða at skiljask við e-n, Skv. 1. 24: the same verb twice, þá varð ek verða hapta, then came I to become a prisoner, Gkv. 1. 9; eg verð að verða eptir, I must stay behind.

B. Peculiar isolated phrases, in some of which ‘verða’ is probably a different word, viz. = varða (q. v.), having been confounded with verða; thus, verða, verðr (= varða, varðar), to be liable, are frequent occurrences as a law phrase in the Grág.; svá fremi verðr beitin, ii. 226; þeim manni verðr fjörbaugs-garðr, er …, 212.

2. the phrase, eigi verðr (= varðar) einn eiðr alla, see eiðr; also ymsar verðr sá er margar ferr, in many warfares there will be some defeats, Eg. 182.

3. to forfeit, lose, prop. of paying a fine or penalty; heit ek á þann félaga er mik lætr eigi slíkt verða, Vápn. 11; æti þik ormar, yrða ek þik, kykvan, that snakes ate thee alive, and that I lost thee, Am. 22; fullhuginu sá er varð dróttinn, the brave man bereft of his master, Sighvat (Ó. H. 236); ek hefi orðinn þann guðföður, er …, I have lost a godfather who …, Hallfred (Js. 210); hér skaltú lífit verða, here shall thou forfeit life, i. e. die, Sturl. iii. (in a verse).

4. the law phrase, verða síns, to suffer a loss; leiglendingr bæti honum allt þat er hann verðr síns fyrir lands-drottni (i. e. verðr missa), whatever he has to lose, whatever damage, Gþl. 362; þræll skal ekki verða síns um, N. G. L. i. 85; allt þat er hann verðr síns í, þá skal hinn bæta honum, Jb. 207 A; hann kvað þá ekki skyldu síns í verða (varða Ed.) um þetta mál, they should lose nothing, Rd. 253: vildi hann (viz. Herode) eigi verða heit sitt (= fyrir verða?), he would not forfeit, break his vow, Hom. 106.

C. Reflex.; at þær ræður skyldi eigi með tjónum verðask, to be lost, forgotten, Sks. 561 B.

2. recipr.; bræðr munu berjask ok at bönum verðask, Vsp. (Hb.); þá er bræðr tveir at bönum urðusk, Ýt. 11.

3. part.; eptir orðna þrimu geira, Ód.; hluti orðna ok úorðna, past and future, MS. 623. 13; kvenna fegrst ok bezt at sér orðin, Nj. 268; þeir vóru svó vorðnir sik (so shapen, Germ. beschaffen), at þeir höfðu …, Stj. 7; þeir eru svá vorðnir sik, at þeir hafa eitt auga í miðju enninu, 68.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > VERÐA
24 thought

̈ɪθɔ:t сущ.
1) мысль;
мышление;
размышление (about, on) at a thought ≈ при мысли to collect/compose one's thoughts ≈ собраться с мыслями to entertain, harbor, have a thought ≈ вынашивать мысль to harbor thoughts of revenge ≈ вынашивать мысли об отмщении to express, present a thought ≈ выражать мысль to gather, sum up one's thoughts ≈ собраться с мыслями to read smb.'s thoughts ≈ читать чьи-л. мысли to relish a thought ≈ наслаждаться мыслью о чем-л. to take thought ≈ задуматься;
опечалиться evil thought ≈ жестокая мысль fleeting, passing thought ≈ мелькнувшая мысль happy thought ≈ удачная мысль intriguing, refreshing thought ≈ занимательная, интересная мысль sober, sobering thought ≈ здравая мысль ugly thought ≈ ужасная, гадкая мысль upsetting thought ≈ неприятная, печальная мысль (lost) in thought ≈ погруженный в размышления The thought struck me that... ≈ Мне вдруг пришло в голову, что... What are your thoughts on this matter? ≈ Что ты думаешь по этому поводу? My mind boggles at the very thought. ≈ Я боюсь даже думать об этом. in one's thoughts ≈ у кого-л. в мыслях She was always in my thoughts. ≈ Я всегда думаю о ней. That thought has crossed my mind. ≈ Я тоже думал об этом. a train of thought ≈ ход мыслей in thought and deed ≈ словом и делом The thought that we would soon reach home gave us courage. ≈ Нас поддерживала мысль о том, что скоро мы будем дома. Syn: conception, reflection, idea
2) намерение, цель Syn: intention, design
3) забота;
внимание, попечение, попечительство to take/show thought for smb. ≈ заботиться о ком-л. thank you for your kind thought of me ≈ благодарю вас за внимание ко мне Syn: care, concern
4) (a thought) чуточка( обыкн. употр. как нареч.: чуточку) a thought more polite ≈ чуть вежливей ∙ (as) quick as thought ≈ с быстротой молнии;
мгновенно second thoughts are best посл. ≈ семь раз отмерь, один раз отрежь мышление - freedom of * свобода мысли - * disorder психическое расстройство - after much * после долгих размышлений - to give a great deal of * to smth. много размышлять о чем-л. - after (giving the matter) some * поразмыслив немного( об этом деле) - to be deep /lost, absorbed/ in * погрузиться в размышления /в свои мысли/ - to spend whole hours in * проводить долгие часы в размышлениях - a few moments' * made him change his mind минутное размышление заставило его отказаться от этого намерения;
поразмыслив немного, он передумал - it's a pity he doesn't put more * into his books жаль, что он так легкомысленно относится к занятиям - animals are incapable of * животные неспособны мыслить воображение - beauty beyond * несказанная /необыкновенная/ красота мысль, идея;
мнение;
соображение - noble * благородная мысль - * control (неодобрительно) стеснение интеллектуальной свободы - full of dismal *s полный мрачных мыслей - at the * of smth. при мысли о чем-л. - at the * that... при мысли о том, что... - the mere * of it... одна /сама/ мысль об этом... - the mere * of it makes my blood boil при одной мысли об этом у меня закипает кровь - to speak one's *(s) прямо говорить, что думаешь - to collect /to compose/ one's *s собраться с мыслями - to read smb.'s *s читать чьи-л. мысли - to reject /to discard/ a * отбросить мысль (о чем-л.) - to exchange *s with one another обмениваться мыслями друг с другом - to keep one's *s to oneself ни с кем не делиться своими мыслями - to follow the thread of smb.'s * следить за ходом чьей-л. мысли - have you ever given it a single *? ты хоть когда-нибудь задумывался об этом? - you're always in my *s я не забываю о тебе ни на минуту - the * came suddenly to me /to my head/ мне вдруг пришла в голову мысль - such a * would never occur to me /enter my head/ такая мысль никогда бы не пришла мне в голову - I have very few *s on the subject у меня мало соображений по этому поводу, мне нечего сказать по этому вопросу - tell me your *s on the matter что ты думаешь по этому поводу? - he hasn't a * in his head он ни о чем не думает, он совсем пустоголовый - her *s were elsewhere мыслями /в мыслях/ она была /уносилась/ далеко - a penny for your *s о чем ты думаешь? мысль, взгляды, воззрения - modern * современная мысль - to keep specialists aware of current * держать специалистов в курсе современной (научной) мысли учение, философия - an excellent introduction to Gandhi's * прекрасное введение в философию /в учение/ Ганди намерение - to have no *(s) of going there не иметь ни малейшего намерения ехать туда - I had a * of asking him to dinner я хотел /думал/ пригласить его на обед - I had no * of offending you я не хотел вас обидеть, у меня и в мыслях не было вас обидеть ожидание, надежда - I had no * of meeting you here вот уж не думал вас здесь встретить - you must give up all *(s) of seeing him не рассчитывайте /не надейтесь/ увидеться с ним, вам придется отказаться от мыли увидеться с ним - he had no * of disaster он совершенно не думал о катастрофе /не ожидал катастрофы/, у него и в мыслях не было, что близка катастрофа забота, внимание;
думы - full of * for smb. заботящийся /постоянно думающий/ о ком-л. - to take /to show, to have/ * for smb. заботиться о ком-л. - to give smth. no * не обратить внимания на что-л. - don't give it a moment's * не думайте об этом;
можете быть совершенно спокойны на этот счет - I didn't give it another * я перестал думать об этом, я выбросил это из головы - her one * is to get married она во власти одной мысли /поглощена одной мыслью/ - выйти замуж( разговорное) немного;
капелька, чуточка, самая малость - a * shorter чуть короче - please, be a * more careful будьте, пожалуйста, поосторожней /повнимательней/ - the colour was a * too dark цвет был чуточку темнее, чем нужно( устаревшее) тревога;
печаль;
огорчение;
досада (диалектизм) причина тревоги, беспокойства > first *s первая мысль, первый импульс > on /upon/ second *(s) по зрелом размышлении > as quick /as swift/ as * быстрый, как мысль > to take * призадуматься > to take * for the morrow думать о завтрашнем дне > to take no * for the morrow не думать о завтрашнем дне, быть легкомысленным > second *s are best семь раз отмерь - один отрежь past и р.р. от think ~ мысль;
мышление;
размышление;
to collect (или to compose) one's thoughts собраться с мыслями (lost) in ~ погруженный в размышления;
to read (smb.'s) thoughts читать (чьи-л.) мысли;
to take thought задуматься;
опечалиться (as) quick as ~ = с быстротой молнии;
мгновенно (lost) in ~ погруженный в размышления;
to read (smb.'s) thoughts читать (чьи-л.) мысли;
to take thought задуматься;
опечалиться second thoughts are best посл. = семь раз отмерь, один раз отрежь ~ забота;
внимание;
to take (или to show) thought (for smb.) заботиться (о ком-л.) (lost) in ~ погруженный в размышления;
to read (smb.'s) thoughts читать (чьи-л.) мысли;
to take thought задуматься;
опечалиться thank you for your kind ~ of me благодарю вас за внимание ко мне thought past & p. p. от think ~ забота;
внимание;
to take (или to show) thought (for smb.) заботиться (о ком-л.) ~ мысль;
мышление;
размышление;
to collect (или to compose) one's thoughts собраться с мыслями ~ намерение ~ (а ~) чуточка (обыкн. употр. как adv чуточку) ;
a thought more polite чуть вежливей ~ (а ~) чуточка (обыкн. употр. как adv чуточку) ;
a thought more polite чуть вежливей

Большой англо-русский и русско-английский словарь > thought
25 thought

1. [θɔ:t] n
1. 1) мышление

freedom of thought - свобода мысли

thought disorder - психическое расстройство

after much thought - после долгих размышлений

to give a great deal of thought to smth. - много размышлять о чём-л.

after (giving the matter) some thought - поразмыслив немного (об этом деле)

to be deep /lost, absorbed/ in thought - погрузиться в размышления /в свои мысли/

to spend whole hours in thought - проводить долгие часы в размышлениях

a few moments' thought made him change his mind - минутное размышление заставило его отказаться от этого намерения; поразмыслив немного, он передумал

it's a pity he doesn't put more thought into his books - жаль, что он так легкомысленно относится к занятиям

animals are incapable of thought - животные неспособны мыслить

2) воображение

beauty beyond thought - несказанная /необыкновенная/ красота

2. 1) мысль, идея; мнение; соображение

noble [original, happy, striking, first] thought - благородная [оригинальная, счастливая, блестящая, первая] мысль

thought control - неодобр. стеснение интеллектуальной свободы

full of dismal thoughts - полный мрачных мыслей

at the thought of smth. - при мысли о чём-л.

at the thought that... - при мысли о том, что...

the mere thought of it... - одна /сама/ мысль об этом...

the mere thought of it makes my blood boil - при одной мысли об этом у меня закипает кровь

to speak one's thought(s) - прямо говорить, что думаешь

to collect /to compose/ one's thoughts - собраться с мыслями

to read smb.'s thoughts - читать чьи-л. мысли

to reject /to discard/ a thought - отбросить мысль (о чём-л.)

to exchange thoughts with one another - обмениваться мыслями друг с другом

to keep one's thoughts to oneself - ни с кем не делиться своими мыслями

to follow the thread of smb.'s thought - следить за ходом чьей-л. мысли

have you ever given it a single thought? - ты хоть когда-нибудь задумывался об этом?

you're always in my thoughts - я не забываю о тебе ни на минуту

the thought came suddenly to me /to my head/ - мне вдруг пришла в голову мысль

such a thought would never occur to me /enter my head/ - такая мысль никогда бы не пришла мне в голову

I have very few thoughts on the subject - у меня мало соображений по этому поводу, мне почти нечего сказать по этому вопросу

tell me your thoughts on the matter - что ты думаешь по этому поводу?

he hasn't a thought in his head - он ни о чём не думает, он совсем пустоголовый

her thoughts were elsewhere - мыслями /в мыслях/ она была /уносилась/ далеко

a penny for your thoughts - о чём ты думаешь?

2) мысль, взгляды, воззрения

modern [scientific, linguistic] thought - современная [научная, лингвистическая] мысль

to keep specialists aware of current thought - держать специалистов в курсе современной (научной) мысли

3) учение, философия

an excellent introduction to Gandhi's thought - прекрасное введение в философию /в учение/ Ганди

3. 1) намерение

to have no thought(s) of going there - не иметь ни малейшего намерения ехать туда

I had a thought of asking him to dinner - я хотел /думал/ пригласить его на обед

I had no thought of offending you - я не хотел вас обидеть, у меня и в мыслях не было вас обидеть

2) ожидание, надежда

I had no thought of meeting you here - вот уж не думал нас здесь встретить

you must give up all thought(s) of seeing him - не рассчитывайте /не надейтесь/ увидеться с ним, вам придётся отказаться от мысли увидеться с ним

he had no thought of disaster - он совершенно не думал о катастрофе /не ожидал катастрофы/, у него и в мыслях не было, что близка катастрофа

4. забота, внимание; думы

full of thought for smb. - заботящийся /постоянно думающий/ о ком-л.

to take /to show; to have/ thought for smb. - заботиться о ком-л.

to give smth. no thought - не обратить внимания на что-л.

don't give it a moment's thought - не думайте об этом; можете быть совершенно спокойны на этот счёт

I didn't give it another thought - я перестал думать об этом, я выбросил это из головы

her one thought is to get married - она во власти одной мысли /поглощена одной мыслью/ - выйти замуж

5. разг. немного; капелька, чуточка, самая малость

a thought shorter - чуть короче

please, be a thought more careful - будьте, пожалуйста, поосторожней /повнимательней/

the colour was a thought too dark - цвет был чуточку темнее, чем нужно

6. 1) уст. тревога; печаль; огорчение; досада

2) диал. причина тревоги, беспокойства

♢ first thoughts - первая мысль, первый импульс

on /upon/ second thought(s) - по зрелом размышлении

as quick /as swift/ as thought - быстрый, как мысль

to take thought - призадуматься

to take thought for the morrow - думать о завтрашнем дне

to take no thought for the morrow - не думать о завтрашнем дне, быть легкомысленным

second thoughts are best - ≅ семь раз отмерь - один отрежь
2. [θɔ:t] past и p. p. от think II

НБАРС > thought
26 mañana2

² = tomorrow, morrow.

Nota: Obsoleto.

Ex. As we will probably hear from Mr. Welsh tomorrow, we are at the point where the Library of Congress has all but committed itself to close its catalogs.

Ex. The text around the rim of the teacup, from Marcel Proust, reads: 'Dispirited after a dreary day, with the prospect of a depressing morrow'.

----

* como si no hubiera mañana = like there's no tomorrow.

* hasta mañana = I'll see you on the flipside, I'll catch you on the flipside.

* hoy por mí y mañana por ti = You scratch my back and I'll scratch yours, quid pro quo.

* mañana por la noche = tomorrow night.

* pan para hoy y hambre para mañana = rob Peter to pay Paul.

* pasado mañana = the day after tomorrow.

Spanish-English dictionary > mañana2
27 thought

I n
1) мислення

freedom of thought — свобода думки

thought disorder — психічний розлад

after much thought — після довгих роздумів

to give a great deal of thought to smth — багато думати про щось

after (giving the matter) some thought — помізкувавши трохи ( про цю справу)

to be deep /lost, absorbed/ in thought — поринути в роздуми; уява

2) думка, ідея; міркування

noble [original, happy, striking, first] thought — шляхетна [оригінальна, щаслива, блискуча, перша]думка

thought control — несхвальн. обмеження інтелектуальної свободи олі

full of dismal thought s — повний похмурих думок

at the thought of smth — з думкою про щось

at the thought that... — з думкою про те, що...

the mere thought or it... — одна /сама/ думка про це...

to speak one's thought (s) — прямо говорити, що думаєш

to collect /to compose/ one's thoughts — зібратися з думками

to read smb 's thoughts — читати чиїсь думки

to reject /to discard/ a thought — відкинути думка ( про щось)

to exchange thought s with one another — обмінюватися думками один з одним

to keep one's thoughts to oneself — ні з ким не ділитися своїми думками

to follow the thread of smb 's thought — стежити за ходом чиєїсь думки

he hasn't a thought in his head — він ні про що не думає, він зовсім пустоголовий; думка, погляди

modern [scientific, linguistic] thought — сучасна [наукова, лінгвістична]думка

to keep specialists aware of current thought — тримати фахівців у курсі сучасної ( наукової) думки; навчання, філософія

an excellent introduction to Gandhi's thought — прекрасне введення у філософію /у навчання/ Ганді

3) намір

I had по thought of offending you — я не хотів вас скривдити, у мене е у думках не було вас скривдити; очікування, надія

I had по thought of meeting you here — от вже не думав вас тут зустріти

4) турбота, увага; думи

full of thought for smb — що піклується /постійно думає/ про когось

to take /to show, to have/ thought for smb — піклуватися про когось

to give smth no thought — не звернути уваги на щось

don't give it a moment's thought — не думайте про це; можете бути зовсім спокійні з цього приводу

5) небагато; крапелька, трішки, трішечки

a thought shorter — трішечки коротше

the colour was a thought too dark — колір був трішки темніше, ніж потрібно

6) icт. тривога; сум; прикрість: досада; дiaл. причина тривоги, занепокоєння

••

first thoughts — перша думка, перший імпульс

as quick /as swift/ as thought — швидкий, як думка

to take thought — задуматися

to take thought for the morrow — думати про завтрашній день

to take no thought for the morrow — не думати про завтрашній день, бути легковажним

second thoughts are best — = сім разів відмір - один раз відріж
II past та р. p. від think II

English-Ukrainian dictionary > thought
28 CULTURE, LITERATURE, AND LANGUAGE

   ■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. The Oxford Book of Portuguese Verse: XIIth Century-XXth Century. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1925, 1952 (2nd edition, B. Vi-digal, ed.).

   ■. Portuguese Literature. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1922, 1970 (2nd edition, B. Vidigal, ed.).

   ■ Bleiberg, German, Maureen Ihrie, and Janet Pérez, eds. Dictionary of the Literature of the Iberian Peninsula, 2 vols. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1993.

   ■ Castro, Francisco Lyon de, ed. História da literatura portuguesa, 7 vols. Lisbon: Alfa, 2001-02.

   ■ Cidade, Hernani. Lições de Cultura e Literatura Portuguesa, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1960-62.

   ■ Cook, Manuela. Portuguese: A Complete Course for Beginners. London: Hodder and Stoughton, 1996. Figueiredo, Fidelino. História literária de Portugal. Coimbra, 1944. Gentile, Georges Le. La Littérature Portugaise. Rev. ed. Paris, 1951. Kunoff, Hugo. Portuguese Literature from Its Origins to 1990: A Bibliography Based on the Collections at Indiana University. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press, 1994.

   ■ Longland, Jean. Contemporary Portuguese Poetry. A Bilingual Selection. Irvington-on-Hudson: Harvey House, 1966. Prado Coelho, Jacinto do. Dicionário das Literaturas Portuguesas, Galega e Brasileira, 3rd ed. Oporto, 1978. Rossi, Giuseppe C. Storia della letteratura portoghesa. Florence, 1953.

   ■ Santos, João Camilo dos. "Portuguese Contemporary Literature." In Antônio Costa Pinto, ed., Modern Portugal, 218-42. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.

   ■ Saraiva, Antônio José. História da cultura em Portugal, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1950-60.

   ■. História da Literatura Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990 ed.

   ■, and Oscar Lopes. História da Literatura Portuguesa. Oporto and Coimbra, 1992 ed.

   ■ Seguier, Jaime de, ed. Dicionário Prático Ilustrado. Oporto: Lello, 1961 and later eds.

   ■ Simões, João Gaspar. História da poesia portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1955-56 and later eds.

   ■. História da poesia portuguesa do século XX. Lisbon, 1959 and later eds.

   ■ Stern, Irwin, ed.-in-chief. Dictionary of Brazilian Literature. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1988.

   ■ TRAVEL AND TOURIST GUIDES ON PORTUGAL

   ■ Adragão, José Victor. The Algarve: The Land, the Sea and Its People. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■ Ballard, Sam, and Jane Ballard. Pousadas of Portugal: Unique Lodgings in State-owned Castles, Palaces, Mansions and Hotels. Boston: Harvard Common, 1986.

   ■ Bridge, Ann, and Susan Lowndes Marques. The Selective Traveller in Portugal. London: Chatto & Windus, 1968.

   ■ Ellingham, Mark, et al. Portugal: The Rough Guide. London: Rough Guides, 2008 ed.

   ■ Hogg, Anthony. Travellers' Portugal. London: Solo Mio, 1983.

   ■ Kite, Cynthia, and Ralph Kite. Portuguese Country Inns & Pousadas. New York: Warner Books; Karen Brown's Country Inn Series, 1988.

   ■ Lowndes, Susan, ed. Fodor's Portugal 1991. New York: Fodor's, 1990.

   ■ Proença Raúl, and Sant'anna Dionísio, eds. Guía De Portugal. I. Generalidades. Lisboa E, Arredores. Lisbon: Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian, 1924; 1983.

   ■ Robertson, Ian. Portugal: Blue Guide. London: Benn; New York: Norton, 2000 and later eds.

   ■ Stoop, Anne de. Living in Portugal. Paris and New York: Flammarion, 1995. Wright, David, and Patrick Swift. Minho and North Portugal: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1968.

   ■. Lisbon: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1971.

   ■. Algarve: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1973.

   ■ HISTORY OF PORTUGAL Ancient and Medieval (2000 BCE-1415 CE)

   ■ Alarção, Jorge de. Roman Portugal. Volume I: Introduction. Warminster, U.K., 1988.

   ■ Almeida, Fortunato de. História de Portugal. Vol. I. Coimbra, 1922. Arnaut, Salvador Dias. A Crise Nacional dos fins do século XVI. Vol. 1. Coimbra, 1960.

   ■ Baião, Antônio, Hernani Cidade, and Manuel Múrias, eds. História de Expansão Portuguesa no Mundo, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1937-40. Caetano, Marcello. Lições de História do Direito Português. Coimbra, 1962. Cortesão, Jaime. Os Factores Democráticos no Formação de Portugal. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■ David, Pierre. Etudes Historiques sur la Galice et le Portugal du VI au XII siécle. Paris, 1947.

   ■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone. Portugal's Secret Jews: The End of an Era. Rumford, R.I.: Peregrinação Publications, 1999. Diffie, Bailey W. Prelude to Empire: Portugal Overseas before Henry the Navigator. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1960. Dutra, Francis A. "Portugal: To 1279." Dictionary of the Middle Ages. Vol. X: 35-48. New York: Scribners, 1987.

   ■. "Portugal: 1279-1481." Dictionary of the Middle Ages. Vol. X: 48-56. New York: Scribners, 1987. Gama Barros, Henrique de. História de Administração Pública em Portugal nos séculos XII à XV, 11 vols. Lisbon, 1945-51. Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. A Economia dos Descobrimentos Henriquinos. Lisbon, 1962.

   ■ Gonzaga de Azevedo, Luís. História de Portugal, 6 vols. Lisbon, 1939-44.

   ■ Herculano, Alexandre. História de Portugal, 8 vols., 9th ed. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Kennedy, Hugh. Muslim Spain and Portugal: A Political History of al-Anda-lus. London: Longman, 1996.

   ■ Lencastre e Tavora, Luía Gonzaga. O Estudo da Sigilografia Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. The Origins of Spain and Portugal. London: Allen & Unwin, 1971.

   ■ Lopes, David. "Os Árabes nas obras de Alexandre Herculano." Boletim da Segunda Classe. Lisbon: Academia Real das Sciéncias, III (1909-10). MacKendrick, Paul. The Iberian Stones Speak. New York: Funk & Wagnalls, 1969.

   ■ Martinez, Pedro Soares. História Diplomática De Portugal [chapter I, 114315]. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Mattoso, José, ed. A Nobreza Medieval Portuguesa: A Família e o Poder. Lisbon: Estampa, 1981.

   ■. Religião e cultura na Idade Média Portuguesa. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1982.

   ■. Identificaçao de um país ( ensaio sobre as orígens de Portugal), 2 vols. Lisbon: Estampa, 1985.

   ■. Novos Ensaios de História Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon: Edit. Presença, 1988.

   ■. Historia de Portugal. Vol. 2: A Monarquia Feudal ( 1096-1480). Lisbon: Estampa, 1993.

   ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. Hansa e Portugal na Idade Média. Lisbon, 1959.

   ■. Introduçao à História da Agricultura em Portugal. Lisbon, 1968.

   ■. Daily Life in Portugal in the Middle Ages. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1971.

   ■. Ensaios de História Medieval Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■. "Introduçao à História da Cidade Medieval Portuguesa." Bracara Augusta XXV, 92-93 (January-December 1981): 367-87.

   ■. Guía do Estudante de História Medieval Portuguesa, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■. Portugal Na Crise Dos Séculos XIV e XV-Vol. IV of Serrão and Oliveira Marques, Nova História de Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Peres, Damião de, ed. História de Portugal. Vols. I, II. Barcelos, 1928-29.

   ■ Rau, Virginia. Subsídios para o estudo das Feiras Medievais Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1943.

   ■. Sesma'rias Medievais Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1946.

   ■ Ribeiro, Orlando. "Portugal, formação de." Dicionário da História de Portugal. Vol. III, 432-51. Lisbon, 1966.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. The Travels of the Infante Dom Pedro of Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1961.

   ■ Russell, P. E. The English Intervention in Spain and Portugal in the Time of Edward III and Richard II. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1955.

   ■ Savory, H. N. Spain and Portugal: The Prehistory of the Iberian Peninsula. New York: Thames and Hudson, 1968.

   ■ Silva, Armando Coelho Ferreira. A Cultura Castreja no Noroeste de Portugal. Pacos de Ferreira, 1986.

   ■ Varagnac, André. O Homem antes da Escrita ( Pre-história). Lisbon, 1963.

   ■ Imperial and Early Modern (1415-1822)

   ■ Azevedo, J. Lúcio de. História de António de Vieira, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1918-20.

   ■. Épocas de Portugal Económico. Lisbon, 1929.

   ■ Borges de Macedo, Jorge. Problemas de História de Indústria Portuguesa no Século X VIII. Lisbon, 1963.

   ■. "Pombal." Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. III, 415-23. Lisbon, 1968.

   ■ Bovill, Edward W. The Battle of the Alcazar: An Account of the Defeat of Dom Sebastian at El-Ksar el-Kebir. London, 1952.

   ■ Boxer, C. R. Four Centuries of Portuguese Expansion, 1415-1825: A Succinct Survey. Johannesburg, South Africa: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1961.

   ■. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire 1415-1825. London: Hutchinson, 1969.

   ■. João de Barros: Portuguese Humanist and Historian of Asia. New Delhi, India: Xavier Centre, 1981.

   ■ Cheke, Marcus. Dictator of Portugal: A Life of the Marquis of Pombal, 16991782. London: Sidgwick & Jackson, 1938.

   ■ Cunha, Luís da. Testamento Político. Lisbon, 1820.

   ■ Davidson, Lillias C. Catherine of Bragança. London: John Murray, 1908.

   ■ Dutra, Francis A. "Membership in the Order of Christ in the Seventeenth Century." The Americas 27 (1970): 3-25.

   ■ Eberlein, H. D., and R. W. Ramsdell. The Practical Book of Italian, Spanish and Portuguese Furniture. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1927.

   ■ Ericeira, Luís de Meneses [Count of]. História de Portugal Restaurado, 4 vols. Oporto, 1945.

   ■ Fisher, H. E. S. "Anglo-Portuguese Trade, 1700-70." Economic History Review XVI, 2 (1963): 219-33.

   ■. The Portugal Trade: A Study of Anglo-Portuguese Commerce, 1700- 1770. London: Methuen, 1971.

   ■ Francis, A. D. The Methuens and Portugal: 1691-1708. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1966.

   ■. Portugal, 1715-1808. London: Tamesis, 1985.

   ■ Hanson, Carl A. Economy and Society in Baroque Portugal, 1668-1703. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1981.

   ■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. New York: AMS Press, 1968 reprint.

   ■ Kendrick, T. D. The Lisbon Earthquake. London: Methuen, 1956.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. "The Privileges of an Englishman in the Kingdom and Dominions of Portugal." Atlante 11 (1954): 57-77.

   ■ Macauley, Neil. Dom Pedro: The Struggle for Liberty in Brazil and Portugal, 1798-1834. Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 1986.

   ■ Macauley, Rose. They Went to Portugal. London: Jonathan Cape, 1946.

   ■. They Went to Portugal, Too. London: Carcanet, 1990.

   ■ Magalhães Godinho, Vitorino. Prix et Monnaies au Portugal. Paris, 1955.

   ■. "Portugal and Her Empire." In New Cambridge Modern History. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, Vol. V (1961): 384-97; Vol. VI (1961): 509-10.

   ■. A Economia dos descobrimentos henri-quinos. Lisbon, 1962.

   ■. Estructura da Antiga Sociedade Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Mauro, Frédéric. Le Portugal et l'Atlantique au XVII siécle ( 1570-1670). Paris: SEVPEN, 1960.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth. "Pombal and the Nationalization of the Luso-Brazilian Economy." Hispanic American Historical Review XLVIII (November 1968): 608-31.

   ■. Conflicts and Conspiracies: Brazil and Portugal, 1750-1808. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1973.

   ■ Norris, A. H., and R. W. Bremner. The Lines of Torres Vedras. Lisbon: British Historical Society of Portugal, 1980.

   ■ Oliveira, Antônio de. A Vida Económica e Social de Coimbra de 1537 à 1640, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1971-72.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. The Royal Power and the Cortes in Portugal. Watford, U.K.: Voss & Michael, 1927.

   ■. Portuguese Pioneers. London: Black, 1933.

   ■. "The Mode of Government in Portugal during the Restoration [1640-68] Period." In Edgar Prestage, ed., Melange d'Etudes Portugaises Offerts a M. Georges Le Gentil, 265-70. Lisbon, 1949.

   ■ Rabassa, Gregory. "Padre Antônio Vieira: Portugal's Amazing Polymath." Camões Centre Quarterly 2, 3-4 (Autumn and Winter 1990): 27-32. Rau, Virginia. D. Catarina de Bragança: Rainha de Inglaterra. Lisbon, 1944. Ricard, Robert. "Prophecy and Messianism in the Works of Antônio Vieira." The Americas 37 (1960): 357-88.

   ■ Roche, T. W. E. Philippa: Dona Filipa of Portugal. London: Phillimore, 1971.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. The Travels of the Infante Dom Pedro of Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1961.

   ■ Rooney, Peter T. "Hapsburg Fiscal Policies in Portugal, 1580-1640." Journal of European Economic History 23, 3 (1994): 545-62.

   ■ Roth, Cecil. "The Religion of the Marranos." Jewish Quarterly Review 22 (1931): 1-33.

   ■. A History of the Marranos. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society of America, 1932.

   ■ Saraiva, Antônio José. Inquisição e Cristãos-Novos. Oporto, 1969.

   ■. A Inquisição Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1969 and later eds.

   ■ Schneider, Susan. O Marquês De Pombal E O Vinho Do Porto: Dependência e subdesenvolvimento em Portugal no século XVIII. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■ Shaw, L. M. E. Trade, Inquisition and the English Nation in Portugal, 16401690. London: Carcancet, 1989.

   ■ Shillington, V. M., and A. B. W. Chapman. The Commercial Relations of England and Portugal. London: Routledge, 1907.

   ■ Sideri, Sandro. Trade and Power: Informal Colonialism in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. Rotterdam: Rotterdam University Press, 1970.

   ■ Smith, John Athelstone [Conde de Carnota]. Marquis of Pombal, 2nd ed. London, 1872.

   ■ Thomas, Gerturde Z. Richer Than Spices. New York: Knopf, 1965. Walford, A. R. The British Factory in Lisbon. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Constitutional Monarchy and Liberalism (1822-1910)

   ■ Baptista, Jacinto. O Cinco de Outubro. Lisbon, 1965. Brandão, Raúl. Memórias, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1969 ed.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. O desenvolvimento do capitalismo em Portugal no século XIX. Lisbon, 1981. Caetano, Marcello. História Breve das Constituções portuguesas. Lisbon, 1971 ed.

   ■ Carnota, Conde da. Memoirs of Marshal, the Duke of Saldanha, with Selections from His Correspondence, 2 vols. London: John Murray, 1880. Carvalho, Joaquim de. Estudos sobre a cultura portuguesa do século XIX. Coimbra, 1955.

   ■ Cheke, Marcus. Carlota Joaquina, Queen of Portugal. London: Sidgwick and Jackson, 1947.

   ■ França, José-Augusto. Zé Provinho na Obra de Rafael Bordalo Pinheiro. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Fuschini, Augusto. Liquidações políticas. Lisbon, 1896.

   ■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. Estrutura da Antiga Sociedade Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975 ed.

   ■ Hammond, Richard J. Portugal and Africa, 1815-1910: A Study in Uneconomic Imperialism. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1966.

   ■ Homem, Amadeu Carvalho. A Propaganda Republicana ( 1870-1910). Coimbra, 1990.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. Portugal: A Short History. Edinburgh, U.K.: Edinburgh University Press, 1973. Machado, Alvaro Manuel. A Geração de 70-uma revolução cultural e literária. Lisbon, 1986 ed.

   ■ Martins, Joaquim Pedro de Oliveira. Portugal Contemporâneo, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1953 ed.

   ■ Medina, João. Eça Político. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. Fontes Pereira de Melo. Oporto: Ed. Afrontamento, 1999.

   ■ Nobre, Eduardo. Paixoes Reais. Lisbon: Quimera, 2002.

   ■ Pereira, Miriam Halpern. Livre Câmbio e Desenvolvimento Económico: Portugal na segunda metade do século XIX. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■. Revolução, Finanças, Dependência Externa ( de 1820 à convenção de Gramido). Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Peres, Damião, ed. História de Portugal. Volume III. Barcelos, 1935 ed.

   ■ Ramos, Rui. D.Carlos. 1863-1908. Lisbon: Circulo de Leitores, 2006.

   ■. Liberal Reformism in Portugal. Oliveira Martins, the Movement for New Life and the Politics of the Constitutional Monarchy ( 1885-1908). Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998.

   ■ Rorick, David. Maria da Fonte: History and Myth. M.A. thesis, History Department, Sonoma State University, Sonoma, Calif., 1984.

   ■ Sá, Vítor de. Perspectivas do Século XIX. Lisbon, 1964.

   ■ Serrão, Joel. Sampaio Bruno: O homem e o pensamento. Lisbon, 1958.

   ■. Temas Oitocentistas, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1959-62.

   ■. "Liberalismo." In Joel Serrão, ed., Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. II, 732-41. Lisbon, 1965.

   ■. Do Sebastianismo ao Socialismo. Lisbon, 1975 ed.

   ■ Silbert, Albert. Do Portugal de Antiga Regime ao Portugal Oitocentista. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■ Teles, Basílio. Do Ultimatum ao 31 de Janeiro. Lisbon, 1968 ed.

   ■ Parliamentary, Republican Portugal (1910-26)

   ■ Antunes, José Freire. A Cadeira do Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1980. Arriaga, Manuel de. Na primeira presidência da República Portugueza: Um rápido relatório. Lisbon, 1916.

   ■ Bell, Aubrey, F. G. In Portugal. London, 1912.

   ■. Portugal of the Portuguese. London: Pitman, 1915.

   ■ Bragança-Cunha, V. de. Revolutionary Portugal, 1910-1936. London: Swift, 1937.

   ■ Brandão, Raúl. Memórias, 3 vols. In Brandão, Obras Completas. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■ Burity, Braz [Pseudonym of Joaquim Madureira]. A Forja da Lei. Coimbra, 1915.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel V. Portugal Na Alvorada Do Século XX. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■. 'The Aesthetics of Nationalism: Modernism and Authoritarianism in Early 20th-Century Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, Wisc.) 26, 1 (Summer 1989): 15-43. Campos, Ezequiel. Política. Oporto, 1924.

   ■ Cardia, Sottomayor, ed. Seara Nova: Antologia. Pela Reforma da República (1, 2) 1921-1926, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1971-72.

   ■ Carqueja, Bento. O Povo de Portugal. Oporto, 1916.

   ■. O Futuro de Portugal: Portugal Apos À Guerra. Oporto, 1920.

   ■ Chagas, João. Diário, 1914-1918, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1929-30.

   ■ Cortesão, Jaime. "Memórias da Grande Guerra." In Obras Completas de Jaime Cortesão. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■ Cunha Leal, Francisco. As Minhas Memórias, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1966-68.

   ■ Derou, Jean. Les Relations Franco-Portugaises ( 1910-1926). Paris: Publications de la Sorbonne, 1986.

   ■ Fazenda, Pedro. A Crise Política. Lisbon, 1926.

   ■ Ferrão, Carlos. História De la República. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Ferreira, David. "5 De Outubro de 1910." In Joel Serrão, ed., Dicionário de História De Portugal III (1968): 264-67. Ferreira Martins, Gen. Luís, ed. Portugal na Grande Guerra, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1945.

   ■ Gomes da Costa, Gen. Manuel. Memórias. Lisbon, 1930. História Política da Primeira República Portuguesa ( 1910-1915), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Lorenzo, Felix. Portugal ( cinco anos de republica). Madrid, 1915.

   ■ Machado, Bernardino. Depois de 21 de Maio. Lisbon, 1922.

   ■ Machado Santos, Antônio. 1907-1910: A revolução portugueza. Relatôrio.

   ■ Lisbon, 1911. Madureira, Arnaldo. 0 28 De Maio. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Magno, David. Livro da Guerra de Portugal na Flandres. Oporto, 1920.

   ■. A Situação Portuguesa. Oporto, 1926.

   ■ Marques Guedes, Armando. Cinco Meses no governo. Oporto, 1926.

   ■ Martins, Rocha. Memórias sobre Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1921.

   ■ Medeiros, Fernando. Nas Orígens Do A Sociedade E A Economia Portuguesas Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1978. Medina, João. "Oh! a República!...," Estudos sobre o Republicanismo e a Primeira República Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■, ed. História Contemporânea De Portugal: Primeira República, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. "Uma Aristocracia Operária: Os Chapeleiros (18701913)." Análise Social 60, 2nd series (1979). Montalvor, Luís de, ed. História de Regimen Republicano em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1930-32.

   ■ Oliveira, César. O Operariado E A República Democrática, 1910-1914. Oporto, 1972.

   ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. "The Portuguese 1920s: A General Survey." Iberian Studies 2 (1973): 32-40.

   ■. História De la República Portuguesa: As Estruturas De Base, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1973-74.

   ■. A Primeira República Portuguesa: Alguns aspectos estruturais. Lisbon, 1975 ed.

   ■. O Terceiro Governo Afonso Costa— 1917. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■. Pabôn, Jesus. La Revolución Portuguesa, 2 vols. Madrid, 1945-46; Portuguese edition: Lisbon, 1961. Paxeco, Oscar. Os Que Arrancaram Em 28 De Maio. Lisbon, 1937. Peres, Damião, ed. História De Portugal. Ediçao Monumental: Supplemento. Oporto, 1954.

   ■ Pessoa, Fernando. A Memória do Presidente— Rei Sidónio Pais. Lisbon, 1928.

   ■ Relvas, José. Memórias Políticas, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1977-78.

   ■ Schwartzman, Kathleen C. "Lucros, investimentos e coligações políticas na I República." Análise Social XVIII, 72-71 (1982): 741-58.

   ■. The Social Origins of Democratic Collapse: The First Portuguese Republic in the Global Economy. Lawrence: University of Kansas Press, 1989.

   ■ Serrão, Joel. Liberalismo, socialismo e republicanismo. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Silva, Antônio Maria da. O Meu Depoimento, 2 vols. Mem Martins, 1978-82.

   ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. O Poder e a guerra, 1914-1918. Lisbon: Estampa, 1996.

   ■, and Antônio Costa Pinto, eds. A Primeira República Portuguesa: Entre O Liberalismo E O Autoritarismo. Lisbon: Ed. Colibri, 2000.

   ■ Telo, Antônio José. Decadência E Queda Da I República Portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1980-84.

   ■ Torre (Gomez), Hipôlito dela, and J. Sanchez Cervello. Portugal En El Siglo XX. Madrid: Ediciones Istmo: Colecciôn La Historia en sus textos, 1992.

   ■ Valente, Vasco Pulido. "A República e as classes trabalhadores (Outubro 1910-Agosto 1911)." Análise Social IX, 31 (1972): 293-316.

   ■. O Poder e o Povo: A Revolução de 1910. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Veríssimo Serrao, Joaquim. História De Portugal. Volume XI: A Primeira República ( 1910-1926): História Política, Religiosa, Militar e Ultramarina. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■. História De Portugal Volume XII: História Diplomática, Social, Económica e Cultural. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Vincent-Smith, John. "Britain and Portugal, 1910-1916." Ph.D. dissertation, History, University of London, 1971.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese Revolution of 1910." Journal of Modern History 44 (June 1972): 172-94.

   ■. Republican Portugal: A Political History, 1910-1926. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978.

   ■. "Nightmare Republic: Portugal, 1910-1926." History Today (London) 32 (September 1981): 5-10.

   ■ Young, George. Portugal Old and Young: An Historical Study. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1917.

   ■ Authoritarian Portugal (1926-74)

   ■ Afonso, Rui. Injustiça: O Caso Sousa Mendes. Lisbon: Caminho, 1990.

   ■. Um Homem Bom: Aristides De Sousa Mendes, O " Wallenberg Portuguese' Lisbon: Caminho, 1995.

   ■ Antunes, José Freire. Os Americanos E Portugal. Vol. 1. Os anos de Ricard Nixon, 1969-1974. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. Os Americanos e Portugal. 1961. Kennedy e Salazar: O Leão e a Raposa. Lisbon, 1991.

   ■. Salazar/Caetano. Cartas Secretas. 1932-1968. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1993.

   ■. Jorge Jardim: Agente Secreto. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1996.

   ■. Portugal na guerra do petróleo: Os Açores E As Vitórias de Israel 1973. Lisbon: Edeline, 2000. Aquino, Acácio Tómas de. O Segredo das Prisões Atlânticas. Lisbon, 1978. Araquistain, Luis. "Dictatorship in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 7 (October 1928): 41-53.

   ■ Assac, Jacques Ploncard. Salazar. Paris: La Table Ronde, 1967.

   ■ Baklanoff, Eric N. "The Political Economy of Portugal's Old Regime: Growth and Change Preceding the 1974 Revolution." World Development 7, 8-9 (August-September 1979): 799-812.

   ■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. The Three Marias: New Portuguese Letters. New York: Doubleday, 1975.

   ■ Blume, Norman. "SEDES: An Example of Opposition in a Conservative Authoritarian State." Government and Opposition 12 (Summer 1977): 351-66.

   ■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel. A origem da democracia-cristã em Portugal e o Sala-zarismo. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■. "Notas para uma caracterização política do salazarismo." In Gabinete de Investigações Sociais. Análise Social: A Formação de Portugal Contemporâneo: 1900-1980. Vol. I, 72-74 (April-December 1981): 773-94.

   ■. "O Integralismo nas origens do Salazarismo." Análise Social XVIII (1982): 1409-19.

   ■. "A Oposição Eleitoral ao Salazarismo." Revista de História das Ideias V (1983).

   ■. Monárquicos e Republicanos no Estado Novo. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel V. "Sobre o fascismo e o seu avento em Portugal." Análise Social XII, 48 (1976), 873-915.

   ■ Caetano, Marcello. A Missão Dos Dirigentes. Lisbon, 1966, 4th ed.

   ■. Depoimento. São Paulo, 1974.

   ■. História Breve das Constituições Portugueses. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■. As Minhas Memórias de Salazar. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Campinos, Jorge. A Ditadura Militar, 1926-1933. Lisbon, 1975. Carrilho, Maria. Forças Armadas e Mudança Política em Portugal no Século XX. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■, et al. Portugal na Segunda Guerra Mundial Contributos para uma reavaliação. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Carvalho, Otelo Saraiva de. Alvorada em Abril. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Castanheira, Jose Pedro and Valdemar Cruz. A Filha Rebelde. Lisbon: Temas & Debates, 2003.

   ■ Costa Pinto, Antônio, et al. O Fascismo Em Portugal [Proceedings of Conference, Lisbon, March 1980]. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■. 'The Radical Right and the Military Dictatorship in Portugal: The National May 28 League (1928-1933)." Luso-Brazilian Review 23, 1 (Summer 1986): 1-15.

   ■. "O Salazarismo No Recente Investigação Sobre o Fascismo Europeu...." Análise Social XXV (1990): 695-713.

   ■. As camisas azuis: Ideologias, elites e movimentos fascistas em Portugal, 1914-1945. Lisbon: Estampa, 1994.

   ■. Salazar's Dictatorship and European Fascism: Problems of Interpretation. New York: Columbia University Press, 1995.

   ■. The Blue Shirts: Portuguese Fascists and the New State. New York: Columbia University Press, 2000.

   ■ Delgado, Humberto. The Memoirs of General Delgado. London: Cassell, 1964.

   ■. Memórias De Humberto Delgado. Iva Delgado and Antônio de Figueiredo, eds. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1991.

   ■ Duarte Silva, A. E., et al. Salazar E O Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Egerton, F. C. C. Salazar, Rebuilder of Portugal. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1943.

   ■ Ferraz, Artur Ivens. A Asenção de Salazar: Memórias de Ivens Ferraz. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■ Ferro, Antônio. Salazar: O Homem E A Sua Obra. Lisbon, 1933. English edition: Salazar: Portugal and Her Leader. London: Faber & Faber, 1939, and editions in other languages.

   ■. Portugal: Breviário Da Pátria Para Os Ausentes. Lisbon, 1946.

   ■ Figueiredo, Antônio. Portugal and Its Empire: The Truth. London: Gollancz, 1961.

   ■. "The Case Against Portugal." In Philip Mason, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 46-57. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1962.

   ■. Portugal. Fifty Years of Dictatorship. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1975.

   ■ Fox, Ralph. Portugal Now. London, 1937.

   ■ Freitas do Amaral, Diogo. O Antigo Regime E A Revolução. Memórias Políticas ( 1941-1975). Lisbon: Bertrand, 1995.

   ■ Fryer, Peter, and Patricia McGowan Pinheiro. Oldest Ally: A Portrait of Sala-zar's Portugal. London: Dobson, 1961.

   ■ Gallagher, Tom. "Controlled Repression in Salazar's Portugal." Journal of Contemporary History 14, 3 (July 1979): 385-403.

   ■. "The Mystery Train: Portugal's Military Dictatorship 1926-32." European Studies Review 11 (1981): 325-54.

   ■. "From Hegemony to Opposition: The Ultraright Before and After 1974." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 81-103. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. Portugal: A Twentieth Century Interpretation. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1983.

   ■ Galvão, Henrique. Santa Maria: My Crusade for Portugal. London: Weiden-feld and Nicholson, 1961.

   ■. Carta Aberta ao Dr. Salazar. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Gamier, Christine. Vacances avec Salazar. Paris, 1952; American edition: Salazar in Portugal: An Intimate Portrait. New York, 1954. Georgel, Jacques. O Salazarismo. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Gouveia, Fernando. Memórias de um Inspector da PIDE. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Graham, Lawrence S. "Portugal: The Bureaucracy of Empire." LADAC Occasional Papers series 2, 9 (1973). Austin, Tex.: Institute of Latin American Studies.

   ■. Portugal: The Decline and Collapse of an Authoritarian Order. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1975.

   ■. "The Military in Politics: The Politicization of the Portuguese Armed Forces." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 221-56. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■, and Harry M. Makler, eds. Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Guyomard, George. La Dictature Militaire au Portugal. Paris, 1927.

   ■ Janeiro, Helena Pinto. Salazar E Pétain. Relações Luso-Francesas Durante A II Guerra Mundial ( 1940-44). Lisbon: Cosmos, 1998.

   ■ Kay, Hugh. "A Catholic View." In Philip Mason, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 80-103. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1962.

   ■. Salazar and Modern Portugal. New York: Hawthorne, 1970.

   ■ Leeds, Elizabeth. "Labor Export, Development and the State: The Political Economy of Portuguese Emigration." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1984.

   ■ Lewis, Paul H. "Salazar's Ministerial Elite, 1932-1968."Journal of Politics 40 (August 1987): 622-47.

   ■ Lins, Alvaro. Missão em Portugal. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Linz, Juan. "Foreword." In L. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, xii-xi. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ Lucena, Manuel. A evolução do sistema corporativo português, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. "The Evolution of Portuguese Corporatism under Salazar and Caetano." In L. Graham and H. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 47-88. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ McCarthy, Mary. "Letter from Lisbon." The New Yorker XXX, 51 (February 5, 1955): 80-96.

   ■ Magalhães Godinho, Vitorino. O Socialismo e o Futuro da Peninsula. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■ Makler, Harry M. A " Elite" Industrial Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■. "The Portuguese Industrial Elite and Its Corporative Relations." Economic Development and Cultural Change 24, 3 (April 1976): 495-526.

   ■ Martins, Hermínio. "Opposition in Portugal." Government and Opposition 4 (Spring 1969): 250-63.

   ■. "Portugal." In S. J. Woolf, ed., European Fascism, 302-36. New York: Vintage, 1969.

   ■. "Introduction: Tristes durées." In R. Feijô, H. Martins and J. de Pina-Cabral, eds., Death in Portugal: Studies in Portuguese Anthropology and Modern History. Oxford: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford, 1983.

   ■ Medina, João. Salazar em França. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■. Salazar E Os Fascistas: Salazarismo e Nacional-Sindicalismo: A história dum conflito 1932/1935. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■. Ditadura: O " Estado Novo," 2 vols., in his História Contemporânea De Portugal. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Ministério dos Negôcios Estrangeiros, ed. Dez Anos de Política Externa ( 1936-1947): A Nação Portuguesa e a Segunda Guerra Mundial, 12 vols., and in progress. Lisbon, 1964.

   ■ Mônica, Maria Filomena. Educação e Sociedade no Portugal de Salazar. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Nogueira, Alberto Franco. Salazar, 6 vols. Coimbra and Oporto, 1978-85.

   ■. História de Portugal, 1933-1974: II Supplemento. Oporto, 1981.

   ■. Um político confessa-se ( Diário: 1960-1968), 3rd ed. Oporto, 1987.

   ■ Oliveira, César. Portugal e a II República de Espanha, 1931-l 936. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■. Salazar E A Guerra Civil De Espanha, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■. Os Anos Decisivos: Portugal 1962-1985. Um testemunho. Lisbon: Presença, 1993.

   ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. A Maçonaria Portuguesa e o Estado Novo. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. History of Portugal; 1 in 2 vols. New York: Columbia University Press, 1976 ed.

   ■. A Liga de Paris E A Ditadura Militar, 1927-1928. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. História de Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon: 1980 and later eds.

   ■, ed. A Literatura Clandestina Em Portugal, 1926-1932, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Patriarca, Fátima. A Questaão Social no Salazarismo. Vol. 1. Lisbon: INCM, 1995.

   ■. Sindicatos contra Salazar: A revolta do 18 de janeiro de 1934. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, 2000. Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wisc.: Bruce, 1957.

   ■ Payne, Stanley G. A History of Spain and Portugal. Volume 2. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1973.

   ■. "Salazarism: 'Fascism' or 'Bureaucratic Authoritarianism'?" In Estudos de história portuguesa: Homenagem à A. H. de Oliveira Marques. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Pereira, José Pacheco. Conflitos sociais nos campos do sul de Portugal. Mem Martins, 1978.

   ■. A Preparação Ideológica da Intervenção Militar de 28 de Maio de 1926. Oporto, 1978.

   ■. "Problemas da história do P. C. P." In A. Costa Pinto et al., eds., O Fascismo Em Portugal [Proceedings of Conference, University of Lisbon, March 1980], 269-85. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Pimentel, Irene Flunser. Judeus em Portugal durante a II Guerra Mundial. Em fuga de Hitler e do Holocausto. Lisbon: Esfera dos Livros, 2006.

   ■ Pires, José Cardoso. Dinossauro Excelentíssimo. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm, 1977.

   ■ Presidência do Conselho de Ministros. Comissão do Livro Negro Sobre o Regime Fascista ["Black Book" series]. Eleições No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■. A Política De Informação No Regime Fascista, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■. Livros Proibidos No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■. Presos Políticos No Regime Fascista, 5 vols. Lisbon, 1981-87.

   ■. Relatórios Para Oliveira Salazar, 1931-1939. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■. Discriminação Política No Emprego No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■. Proibição Da " Time" No Regime Fascista [ Time magazine July 23, 1946, with Dr. Salazar on cover]. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■. Os Estudantes No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■. Trabalho, Sindicatos E Greves No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■. Correspondência Entre Mário De Figueiredo E Oliveira Salazar. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. Repressão Política E Social No Regime Fascista. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. Correspondência de Pedro Teotónio Pereira para Oliveira Salazar vol. 1 ( 1931-1939), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1987-89.

   ■ Queiroga, Captain Fernando. Portugal Oprimido. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Raby, David L. "Populism and the Portuguese Left: From Delgado to Otelo." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 61-80. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. Fascism and Resistance in Portugal: Communists, Liberals and the Military Dissidents in the Opposition to Salazar, 1941-1974. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1988.

   ■ Raby, Dawn Linda. "The Portuguese Presidential Election of 1949: A Successful Government Maneuver?" Luso-Brazilian Review 27, 1 (Summer 1990): 63-77.

   ■ Rêgo, Raúl. Diário Político. Lisbon, 1969; 1974, 2nd ed.

   ■. Horizontes Fechados. Oporto, 1970.

   ■. Horizontes Fechados/ Páginas de Política, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Ribeiro, Aquilino. Volfrâmio. Lisbon, 1944.

   ■. Quando os Lobos Uivam. Lisbon, 1958; English ed. Patricia McGowan

   ■ Pinheiro, trans. London: Cape, 1963.

   ■ Robinson, Richard A. H. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London and Boston: Allen & Unwin, 1979.

   ■ Rocha, José Antônio De Oliveira. The Portuguese Administrative State. Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, University of South Carolina, 1986.

   ■ Rosa, Frederico Delgado. Humberto Delgado. Biografia Do General Sem Medo. Lisbon: Esfera dos Livros, 2008. Rosas, Fernando. O Estado Novo Nos Anos Trinta: 1928-1938. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. O Salazarismo E A Aliança Luso-Britânica. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■. Portugal Entre A Paz E A Guerra... 1939-1945. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■. O Estado Novo ( 1926-1974). Vol. VII of José Mattoso, ed. Historia De

   ■ Portugal. Lisbon: Edit. Estampa, 1994.

   ■. and Pedro Aires Oliveira (eds.). A Transicao Falhada. O Marcelismo e o Fim do Estado Novo ( 1968-1974). Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 2004.

   ■ Rudel, Christian. Salazar. Paris: Mercure de France, 1969.

   ■ Sá Carneiro, Francisco. Uma Tentativa de Participação política. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■. A Liberalização bloqueada. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■. Vale a Pena ser Deputado? Fundão, 1973.

   ■ Salazar, Antônio de Oliveira. Discursos E Notas Políticas. [Speeches, Broadcasts, Notes and Statements, 1928-1966, 6 vols. Coimbra, 1935-1966]. Several editions.

   ■. Doctrine and Action: Internal and Foreign Policy of the New Portugal, I928-1939. Robert Edgar Broughton, trans. London: Faber & Faber, 1939.

   ■. "Realities and Trends of Portugal's Policies." International Affairs XXXIX, 2 (April 1963): 169-83.

   ■. The Road for the Future [Speeches, statements of policy made during 1928-62]. Lisbon, 1963.

   ■. Entrevistas: 1960-1966 [interviews]. Coimbra, 1967.

   ■. Salazar: Pensamento e doutrina política. Textos anthológicos. [Anthology of speeches, writings, interviews granted, 1914-68]. Mendo C. Henriques and Gonçalo de Sampaio e Melo, eds. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Santana, Emilio. Historia de um Atentado. O atentado contra Salazar. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Schmitter, Philippe C. Corporatism and Public Policy in Authoritarian Portugal. London: Sage, 1975.

   ■. "Liberation by Golpe: Retrospective Thoughts on the Demise of Authoritarian Rule in Portugal." Armed Forces and Society 2 (Nov. 1975): 5-33.

   ■. "The Impact and Meaning of Elections in Authoritarian Portugal, 1933-74." In G. Hermet et al., eds., Elections Without Choice. Basingstoke, U.K.: Macmillan, 1978.

   ■. "'The 'Regime d'exception' That Became the Rule: Forty-Eight Years of Authoritarian Domination in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Mak-ler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 3-46. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■, and Gerhard Lehmbruch, eds. Trends towards Corporatist Intermediation. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1979.

   ■ Shelton, Richard L. "Development of the Communist Party of Portugal, 1921-1976." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of History, St. Louis University, 1984.

   ■ Silva, José. Memórias de um operário. Vol. 2. Oporto, 1971. Soares, Mário. Escritos Políticos. Lisbon, 1969.

   ■. Portugal Bailloné. Paris, 1972; Portuguese edition: Portugal Amordaçado, Lisbon, 1974; English edition: Portugal's Struggle for Liberty. Translated by Mary Gawsworth. London: Allen & Unwin, 1975.

   ■ Spínola, Antônio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon, 1974; English edition: Johannesburg: Perskor, 1974.

   ■ Teixeira, Luis [Sampaio]. Perfil de Salazar. Lisbon, 1938.

   ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. "From Neutrality to Alignment: Portugal in the Foundation of the Atlantic Pact." EUI: Working Papers in History. Florence, Italy: European University Institute, 1991.

   ■ Telo, Antônio José. Portugal na Segunda Guerra. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■. A Neutralidade Portuguesa e o Ouro Nazi. Lisbon: Quetzal, 2000.

   ■ Teotônio Pereira, Pedro. Memórias, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1972-73.

   ■ Vasco, Nuno. Vigiados e perseguidos. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Veríssimo, Serrão. Marcelo Caetano: Confidencias No Exílio. Lisbon, 1985. Vintras, R. E. The Portuguese Connection: The Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman & Turner, 1974. West, S. George. The New Corporative State of Portugal [Inaugural lecture, King's College, London, Feb. 1937]. London: New Temple Press, 1937. Wheeler, Douglas L. "Thaw in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 48, 4 (July 1970): 769-81.

   ■. "Days of Wine and Carnations: The Portuguese Revolution of [April 25] 1974." Bulletin. New Hampshire Council on World Affairs XX (July 1974): 1-10.

   ■. "Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970)." In Jacques Frémontier, ed., Les Hommes d'Siecle XX: Les Dictateurs. Paris: Mazenod, 1978.

   ■. "The Military and the Portuguese Dictatorship, 1926- 1974." In S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 191-219. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■. "In the Service of Order: The Portuguese Dictatorship's Political Police (PVDE; PIDE) and the British, German and Spanish Intelligence [Services]." Journal of Contemporary History 24, 2 (January 1983): 1-25.

   ■. Republican Portugal: A Political History, 1910-1926. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978. Portuguese edition: História Política de Portugal, 1910-l926. Mem Martins, 1985.

   ■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question, and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review [two part article] 12, 1-2 (Summer 1986; Winter 1986): 107-27.

   ■. A Ditadura Militar Portuguesa, 1926-1933. Mem Martins, 1988.

   ■. "The Third Pig: From Theory to Grubby Fact in Reassessing the Estado Novo." In B. F. Taggie and R. W. Clement, eds., Iberia & the Mediterranean, 145-68. Warrensburg: Central Missouri State Press, 1989.

   ■. "And Who Is My Neighbor? A World War II Hero of Conscience for Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review 26, 1 (Summer 1989): 119-39.

   ■. "Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970)." In Research Guide to European Historical Biography. Vol. 3. Washington, D.C.: Beacham, 1992.

   ■. "'Estado Presente de tranquilidade,' posto em causa: Portugal observado e analisado no contexto internacional de 1958-59." In Iva Delgado, Carlos Pacheco, and Telmo Faria, eds., Humberto Delgado: As eleições de 58, 448-71. Lisbon: Vega, 1998.

   ■, and René Pélissier. Angola. New York: Praeger and London: Pall Mall, 1971; reprinted: Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1977.

   ■ Wiarda, Howard J. "Toward a Framework for the Study of Political Change in Iberic-Latin Tradition: The Corporative Model." World Politics 25 (January 1973): 206-35.

   ■. Corporatism and Development: The Portuguese Experience. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1977.

   ■. "The Corporatist Tradition and the Corporative System in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal. The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 89-122. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ World War II and Portugal

   ■ Afonso, Rui. Um Homem Bom. Aristides De Sousa Mendes O " Wallenberg Portugues." Lisbon: Caminho, 1995.

   ■. Injustica-o Caso Sousa Mendes. Lisbon: Caminho, 1990.

   ■ Agudo, Manuel Ros. La Guerra Secreta de Franco ( 1939-1945). Barcelona, 2002.

   ■ Anon., Fugindo a Hitler e a Salazar e ao Holocausto-Refugiados em Portugal entre 1933-1945. Lisbon: Soc. Tipografica, 1994.

   ■ Barreiros, Jose Antonio. A Lusitania Dos Espioes. Lisbon: Hugin, 1995.

   ■. O Espiao Alemao Em Goa. Operacao Long Shanks, 1943. Lisbon, 2001.

   ■ Beevor, J. G. SOE. Recollections and Reflections 1940-45. London, 1981. Bloch, Michael. Operation Willi: The Plot to Kidnap the Duke of Windsor July 1940. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1984. Carrilho, Maria et. al., Portugal Na Segunda Guerra Mundial. Contributos para uma reavaliacao. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1989. Cole, Robert. Britain and the War of Words in Neutral Europe, 1939-45. New York: St. Martin's, 1990. Colvin, Ian. Flight 777. London: Evans, 1957. Dias, Mariana Tavares. Lisboa nos Anos 40. Lisbon: Quimera, 1997. Eizenstadt, Stuart E. Coord. U.S. and Allied Efforts to Recover and Restore Gold and Other Assets Stolen or Hidden by Germany during World War II. New York, 2001.

   ■ Fralon, Jose-Alain. A Good Man in Evil Times. The Story of Aristides De Sousa Mendes: The Man Who Saved the Lives of Countless Refugees in World War II. New York: Carroll & Graf, 2001.

   ■ Giraudoux, Jean. Portugal. Paris: Grasset, 1958.

   ■ Johns, Philip. Within Two Cloaks. Missions With SIS and SOE. London, 1979.

   ■ Koestler, Arthur. Arrival and Departure. London, 1943.

   ■ Leitz, Christian. Sympathy for the Devil: Neutral Portugal and Nazi Germany in World War II. New York, 2001.

   ■ Louca, Antonio. Hitler e Salazar. Comercio em tempos de Guerra 1940-1944. Lisbon, 2000.

   ■ Luca, Antonio. "Portugal's Double Game: Between the Nazis and the Allies." In Avi Beker, ed., The Plunder of Jewish Property during the Holocaust. Confronting European History. New York, 2001. MacIntyre, Ben. Agent Zigzag. New York: Harmony, 2007. Martins, Maria Joao. O Paraiso Triste. O Quotidiano em Lisboa durante a II Grande Guerra. Lisbon: Vega, 1994. Masterman, J.C. The Double-Cross System in the War of 1939 to 1945. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1972. Muggeridge, Malcolm. Chronicles of Wasted Time. Chronicle 2: The Infernal Grove. New York: William Morrow, 1974.

   ■ Nery, Julia. O Consul. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1991.

   ■ Pimentel, Irene Flunser. Judeus em Portugal na Segunda Guerra Mundial. Lisbon, 2006.

   ■ Popov, Dusko. Spy/ Counterspy. London, 1974.

   ■ Prokosch, Frederick. The Conspirators. New York, 1943.

   ■ Remarque, Erich Maria. The Night in Lisbon. New York, 1966.

   ■ Ribeiro, Aquilino. Volfarmio Romance. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1943.

   ■ Rosas, Fernando. Portugal entre a Paz e a Guerra. Lisbon: Estampa, 1990.

   ■ Saint-Exupery, Antoine. Wartime Writings, 1939-1944. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1986.

   ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano, ed. Portugal E A Guerra. Historia das Intervencoes militares portuguesas nos grandes conflitos mundiais seculos XIX e XX. Lisbon: Colibri, 1998.

   ■ Telo, Antonio Jose. Propagandal E Guerra Secreta Em Portugal 1939-45. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■. Portugal na Segunda Guerra ( 1941-1945), 2 vols. Lisbon, 1991.

   ■. Os Acores E O Controlo Do Atlantico ( 1898/ 1948). Lisbon: Ed. Asa, 1993.

   ■. A neutralidade portuguesa e o ouro nazi. Lisbon, 2000.

   ■ Vintras, R.E. The Portuguese Connection: The Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman and Turner, 1974. Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Age Old Business of Espionage." 1987 World Book Year Book. Chicago, 1987.

   ■. "'In the Service of Order.' The Portuguese Political Police and the British, Germany and Spanish Intelligence [Services]." Journal of Contemporary History 36: no. 3 (Jan. 1983), 1-25.

   ■. "And Who is My Neighbor? A World War II Hero of Conscience for Portugal." Luso-Brazilian Review 23 (no. 2) (Summer 1989), 119-39.

   ■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question, and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, WI), 23 (nos.1, 2) (Summer, 1986; Winter, 1986). 97-111; 108-127.

   ■. "Last of the Great Air Mysteries of the War [World War II]." Bridport and Lyme Regis Gazette (Dorset, U.K.), June 5, 2003, 24-25.

   ■. "Leslie Howard Helped Win World War II," St. Louis Post-Dispatch (St. Louis, Mo.), April 3, 5, 2005.

   ■ Wilson, Robert. A Small Death in Lisbon. London, 2000.

   ■. The Company Of Strangers. San Diego, 2002.

   ■ Wylie, Neville. "An Amateur Learns His Job? Special Operations Executive in Portugal, 1940-42." Journal of Contemporary History. 36: no. 3 (2001), 441-57.

   ■ The Military

   ■ Ferreira Martins, General. Historia do Exercito Portugues. Lisbon: Inquerito, 1945.

   ■ Kaulza de Arriaga, General. Guerra e Politica. Em nome da verdade. Os anos decisivos. Lisbon: Referendo, 1987.

   ■ Medeiros Ferreira, Jose. O Comportamento Politico dos Militares, Forcas Armadas e Regimes Politicos em Portugal no seculo XX. Lisbon: Estampa, 1992.

   ■ Pereira Marques, Fernando. Exercito e Sociedade em Portugal. No Declinio do Antigo Regime e advento do Liberalismo. Lisbon: Regra do Jogo, 1981.

   ■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm, 1977.

   ■ Ribeiro Dos Santos, Antonio Pedro. O Estado E A Order Publica. As Institui-coes Militares Portuguesas. Lisbon: Instituto Superior De Ciencias Sociais E Politicas, 1999.

   ■ Saraiva de Carvalho, Otelo. Alvorada em Abril. Amadora (Portugal): Bertrand, 1977.

   ■ Selvagem, Carlos. Portugal Militar. Compendio de Historia Militar e Naval de Portugal. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional, 1931.

   ■ Spinola, Antonio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon: Arcadia, 1974.

   ■. Pais Sem Rumo. Contributo para a historia de uma Revolucao. Lisbon: Scire, 1978.

   ■ Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. Portugal e a Guerra. Historia das intervencoes militares portuguesas nos grandes conflitos mundiais do seculo XX. Lisbon: Ed. Colibri, 1999.

   ■. Coord., Nova Historia Militar de Portugal, 5 vols. Lisbon: Circulo de Leitores, 2003-.

   ■ Valente, Vasco Pulido. O Poder e o Povo. A Revolucao de 1910. Lisbon: Moraes, 1976, 1982.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. Republican Portugal: A Political History ( 1910-1926). Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1978, 1998.

   ■. A Ditadura Militar Portuguesa ( 1926-1933). Mem Martins: Europa- America, 1988.

   ■. "The Military and the Portuguese Dictatorship, 1926-1974: "The Honor of the Army." In Lawrence S. Graham and Harry M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. 191-219. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ Government and Politics since 1974

   ■ Aguiar, Joaquim. "Hidden Fluidity in an Ultra-Stable Party System." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 101-27. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel, ed. Sistema Eleitoral Portugües: Debate Político e Parlamentar. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional/ Casa da Moeda, 1998.

   ■, ed. "Portugal Político 25 Anos Depois." In Análise Social XXXV, 154/155 (Summer, 2000): 1-404.

   ■ Bruneau, Thomas C., and Alex Macleod. Politics in Contemporary Portugal: Parties and the Consolidation of Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1986.

   ■ Bruneau, Thomas C., ed. Political Parties and Democracy in Portugal. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1997. Carlucci, Frank. "Confiei no Povo Portugues." Visao (Lisbon), April 10, 1997, 46-47.

   ■. "The View from the U.S. Embassy." In Hans Binnendijk, ed., Authoritarian Regimes in Transition. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of State, Foreign Service Institute, Center for the Study of Foreign Affairs, 1987.

   ■ Coelho, Mário Baptista, ed. Portugal. O Sistema Política a Constitucional, 1974-87. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, UNL, 1989.

   ■ Costa Pinto, Antonio. "Settling Accounts with the Past in a Troubled Transition to Democracy: The Portuguese Case." In Alexandra Barahona De Brito, Carmen Gonzalez-Enriquez, and Paloma Aguilar, eds., The Politics of Memory: Transitional Justice in Democratizing Societies, 65-91. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2001.

   ■ Cruzeiro, Maria Manuela. Costa Gomes-o Ultimo Marechal. Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 1998.

   ■ Domingos, Emídio Da Veiga. Portugal Político. Análise das Instituiçoes. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Goldey, David. "Elections and the Consolidation of Portuguese Democracy: 1974-1983." Electoral Studies 2, 3 (1983): 229-40.

   ■ Graham, Lawrence S. "Institutionalizing Democracy: Governance in Post-1974 Portugal." In Ali Farazmand, ed., Handbook of Comparative and Development Public Administration, 81-90. New York: Dekker, 1991.

   ■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Gunther, Richard. "Spain and Portugal." In G. A. Dorfman and P. J. Duignan, eds., Politics in Western Europe, 186-236. Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1988.

   ■ Magone, José Maria. European Portugal: The Difficult Road to Sustainable Democracy. Basingstoke, U.K.: Macmillan, 1997.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth. The Making of Portuguese Democracy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.

   ■, ed. Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth R., and Scott C. Monje, eds. Portugal: The Constitution and the Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-1989. New York: Camões Center, RIIC, Camões Center Special Report No. 2, Columbia University, 1991.

   ■ Opello, Walter C., Jr. "The New Parliament in Portugal." Legislative Studies Quarterly, 3 (May 1978): 309-334.

   ■. "Local Government and Political Culture in a Portuguese Rural County." Comparative Politics 13 (April 1981): 271-89.

   ■. "Portugal's Administrative Elite: Social Origins and Political Attitudes." West European Politics 6 (Jan. 1983): 63-74.

   ■. Portugal's Political Development: A Comparative Approach. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1985.

   ■ Pinto Balsemão, Francisco. "The Constitution and Politics: Options for the Future." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 197-232. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Sartori, Giovanni. "Portugal." In Sartori, G, ed., Parties and Party Systems. Vol. 1, 131-45. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976. Secretary of State for Mass Communications. Constitution of the Portuguese Republic [1976]. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Contemporary Portugal since 1974

   ■ Aguiar, Joaquim. A Ilusão do poder: Analise do Sistema Partidário, 19761982. Lisbon, 1983. Almeida, Diniz de. Orígens e Evolução do Movimento dos Capitães. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■. Ascensao, Apogeu e Queda do MFA, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Alves, Márcio Moreira. Les Soldats Socialistes du Portugal. Paris: Gallimard, 1975.

   ■ Antunes, José Freire. Sá Carneiro: Um Meteoro Nos Anos Setenta. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■. O Segredo do 25 de Novembro. Mem Martins, 1983.

   ■ Arouca, Manuel. Os Filhos Da Costa Do Sol. Mem Martins, 1989. Audibert, Pierre, and Daniel Brignon. Portugal: Les nouveaux centurions. Paris, 1974.

   ■ Baptista, Jacinto. Caminhos para uma revolução. Lisbon, 1975. Barreto, Antônio. Memórias da Reforma Agrária. Mem Martins: Europa-Amé-rica, 1983.

   ■, and C. V. Preto, eds. A Situação Social em Portugal, 1960-1996. Lisbon: Instituto de Ciências Sociais, 1996.

   ■ Bermeo, Nancy Gina. "Worker Management in Industry: Reconciling Representative Government and Industrial Democracy in a Polarized Society." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 181-98. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. The Revolution within the Revolution: Workers' Control in Rural Portugal. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.

   ■ Braeckman, Colette. Portugal: Revolution surveilée. Brussels: Rossei, 1975.

   ■ Braga da Cruz, Manuel. "O Presidente da República na génese e evolução do sistema de governor portugües." Análise social XXIX, 125-26 (1994): 237-65.

   ■, coord. "Portugal Político 25 Anos Depois." Análise Social XXXV, 154/155 (Summer 2000): 1-404. Bruneau, Thomas C. "Popular Support for Democracy in Post-revolutionary Portugal: Results from a Survey." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 21-42. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. Politics and Nationhood: Post-Revolutionary Portugal. New York: Praeger, 1984.

   ■. "Portugal Fifteen Years after the April Revolution." Field Staff Reports ( 1989-90/ No. 1, Europe), 3-11. Indianapolis, Ind.: Universities Field Staff International, 1990.

   ■, and Alex Macleod. Politics in Contemporary Portugal: Parties and the Consolidation of Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1986.

   ■ Carvalho, Ortelo Saraiva de. Cinco Meses Mudaram Portugal. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. Alvorada em Abril. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Cid, Augusto. PREC-Processo Revolucionário Eventualmente Chocante. Viseu, 1977.

   ■ Costa Lobo, Marina, and Pedro C. Magalhaes. "From 'Third Wave' to 'Third Way': Europe and the Portuguese Socialists (1975-1999)," Journal of Southern Europe and the Balkans 3, no. 1 (2001), 25-35.

   ■ Costa Pinto, Antônio, ed. Modern Portugal. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.

   ■, and Nuno Severiano Teixeira, eds. Southern Europe and the Making of the European Union. New York: Columbia Univ. Press, 2002.

   ■ Cunhal, Alvaro. A Revolução Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone. Portugal's Secret Jews: The End of an Era. Rumford, R.I.: Peregrinação Publications, 1999.

   ■ Downs, Charles. "Comissões de Moradores and Urban Struggles in Revolutionary Portugal." International Journal of Urban and Regional Research 4 (1986): 267-94.

   ■. Revolution at the Grassroots: Community Organizations in the Portuguese Revolution. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1989.

   ■ Dufour, Jean-Marc. Prague sur Tage. Paris, 1975.

   ■ Durão Barroso, José. Le systémepolitiqueportugais face à l'intégration euro-péenne. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Eisfeid, Rainer. "Portugal: What Role/What Future?" In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal Ten Years after the Revolution. New York: RIIC, Columbia University, 1984.

   ■. Sozialistischer Pluralismus in Europa: Ansãtze und Scheitern am Beispiel Portugal. Cologne: Verlag Wissenchaft ünd Politik, 1985.

   ■. "Portugal and Western Europe." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 29-62. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Farinha, Luis. "Regresso a Europa. Uma opcao feliz." Historia. XXIX; 95, III series (March 2007), 23-33.

   ■ Faye, Jean-Pierre, ed. Portugal: The Revolution in the Labyrinth. Nottingham, U.K.: Spokesman, 1976. Ferreira, Hugo Gil, and Michael W. Marshall. Portugal's Revolution: Ten Years On. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1986. Figueira, João Costa. Cavaco Silva: Homem de Estado. Lisbon, 1987. Filoche, Gérard. Printemps Portugais. Paris: Editions Action, 1984. Frémontier, Jacques. Os Pontos nos ii. Lisbon, 1976. Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian. 25 de Abril-10 anos depois. Lisbon, 1984. Futscher Pereira, Bernardo. "Portugal and Spain." In K. Maxwell, ed. Portugal in the 1980s, 63-87. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Gama, Jaime. Política Externa Portuguesa 1983-85: Ministério dos Negôcios Estrangeiros. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. "Preface." In J. Calvet de Magalhães, A. de Vasconcelos, and J. Ramos Silva, eds., Portugal: An Atlantic Paradox, 9-11. Lisbon, 1990. Gaspar, Jorge, and Nuno Vitorino. As Eleições De 25 De Abril: Geografia E Imagem Dos Partidos. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. "10 Anos de Democracia: Reflexos na geografia política." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opelio, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal 1974-1984/ Conflitos e Mudanças em Portugal, 1974-1984, 135-55. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■, et al. As Eleições para assembleia da república, 1979-1983: Estudos de geografia eleitoral. Lisbon, 1984. Gaspar, Jorge, and Nuno Vitorino, eds. Portugal em mapas e em números. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Giaccone, Fausto. Una Storia Portoghese/ Uma História Portuguesa. Palermo: Randazzo Focus, 1987.

   ■ Gladdish, Ken. "Portugal: An Open Verdict." In Geoffrey Pridham, ed. Securing Democracy: Political Parties and Democratic Consolidation in Southern Europe, 104-25. London and New York: Routledge, 1990.

   ■ Graham, Lawrence S. The Decline and Collapse of an Authoritarian Order. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1975.

   ■, and Harry M. Makler, eds. Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■, and Douglas L. Wheeler, eds. In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Grayson, George W. "Portugal and the Armed Forces Movement." Orbis XIX, 2 (Summer 1975): 335-78.

   ■ Green, Gil. Portugal's Revolution. New York: International, 1976.

   ■ Hammond, John L. Building Popular Power: Workers' and Neighborhood Movements in the Portuguese Revolution. New York: Monthly Review Press, 1988.

   ■ Harsgor, Michael. Naissance d'un Nouveau Portugal. Paris: Ed. du Seuil, 1975.

   ■. Portugal in Revolution. Washington, D.C.: CSIS and Sage, 1976.

   ■ Harvey, Robert. Portugal, Birth of a Democracy. London: Macmillan, 1978.

   ■ Herr, Richard, ed. Portugal: The Long Road to Democracy and Europe. Berkeley, Calif.: International and Area Studies, 1992.

   ■ Insight Team of the Sunday [London] Times. Insight on Portugal: The Year of the Captains. London: Deutsch, 1975.

   ■ Janitschek, Hans. Mario Soares: Portrait of a Hero. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1985.

   ■ Keefe, Eugene K., et al. Area Handbook for Portugal, 1st ed. Washington, D.C.: Foreign Area Studies of American University, 1977. Kramer, Jane. "A Reporter at Large: The Portuguese Revolution." The New Yorker (Dec. 15, 1975): 92-131.

   ■ Lauré, Jason, and Ettagal Lauré. Jovem Portugal: After the Revolution. New York: Straus, Farrar and Giroux, 1977.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. A New History of Portugal. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976.

   ■ Lourenço, Eduardo. Os Militares e O Poder. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. O Fascismo Nunca Existiu. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. "Identidade e Memôria: o caso português." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-l 984, 17-22. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Lucena, Manuel. Evolução e Instituições: A Extinção dos Grémios da Lavoura Alentejanos. Mem Martins, 1984.

   ■. "A herança de duas revoluções." In M. Baptista Coelho, ed., Portugal: O Sistema Político e Constitucional, 1974-87, 505-55. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Macedo, Jorge Braga de, and S. Serfaty. Portugal since the Revolution: Economic and Political Perspectives. New York: Praeger, 1981.

   ■ Magone, José M. European Portugal: The Difficult Road to Sustainable Democracy. New York: St. Martin's, 1997. Mailer, Phil. Portugal: The Impossible Revolution. London: Solidarity, 1977. Manta, João Abel. Cartoons/ 1969-1975. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Manuel, Paul C. Uncertain Outcome: The Politics of Portugal's Transition to Democracy. Lanham, Md. and London: University Press of America, 1994.

   ■ Mateus, Rui. Contos Proibidos. Memorias de Um PS Desconhecido, 3rd ed. Lisbon: Dom Quixote, 1996.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth. "Portugal under Pressure." The New York Review of Books (May 2, 1974).

   ■. "The Hidden Revolution in Portugal." The New York Review of Books (April 17, 1975).

   ■. "The Thorns of the Portuguese Revolution." Foreign Affairs 54, 2 (Jan. 1976): 250-70.

   ■. "The Communists and the Portuguese Revolution." Dissent 27, 2 (Spring 1980): 194-206.

   ■. Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■. The Making of Portuguese Democracy. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.

   ■, ed. "Portugal: Toward the Twenty-First Century." Camoes Center Quarterly 5, 3-4 (Fall 1995): 6-55.

   ■, ed. The Press and the Rebirth of Iberian Democracy. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1983.

   ■. Portugal Ten Years after the Revolution: Reports of Three Columbia University-Gulbenkian Workshops. New York: Research Institute on International Change, Columbia University, 1984.

   ■ Maxwell, Kenneth, and Michael H. Haltzel, eds. Portugal: Ancient Country, Young Democracy. Washington, D.C.: Wilson Center Press, 1990.

   ■ Medeiros Ferreira, José. Ensaio Histórico sobre a revolução do 25 de Abril. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Medina, João, ed. Portugal De Abril: Do 25 Aos Nossos Dias. In Medina, ed., História Contemporãnea De Portugal. Lisbon, 1985. Merten, Peter. Anarchismus ünd Arbeiterkãmpf in Portugal. Hamburg: Libertare, 1981.

   ■ Miranda, Jorge. Constituição e Democracia. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■. A Constituição de 1976. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Morrison, Rodney J. Portugal: Revolutionary Change in an Open Economy. Boston: Auburn House, 1981.

   ■ Mujal-Leôn, Eusebio. "The PCP [Portuguese Communist Party] and the Portuguese Revolution." Problems of Communism 26 (Jan.- Feb. 1977): 21-41.

   ■ Neves, Mário. Missão em Moscovo. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Oliveira, César. M. F. A. e Revolução Socialista. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. Os Anos Decisivos: Portugal 1962-1985. Um testemunho. Lisbon: Presença, 1993.

   ■ Opello, Waiter C., Jr. Portugal's Political Development: A Comparative Approach. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1985.

   ■. Portugal: From Monarchy to Pluralist Democracy. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1991.

   ■ Pell, Senator Claiborne H. Portugal ( Including the Azores and Spain) in Search of New Directions: Report to the Committee on Foreign Relations, U.S. Senate. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1976.

   ■ Pereira, J. Pacheco. "A Case of Orthodoxy: The Communist Party of Portugal." In Waller and Fenema, eds., Communist Parties in Western Europe: Adaptation or Decline? Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1988.

   ■ Pilmott, Ben. "Socialism in Portugal: Was It a Revolution?" Government and Opposition 7 (Summer 1977).

   ■. "Were the Soldiers Revolutionary? The Armed Forces Movement in Portugal, 1973-1976." Iberian Studies 7, 1 (1978): 13-21.

   ■, and Jean Seaton. "Political Power and the Portuguese Media." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 43-57. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Porch, Douglas. The Portuguese Armed Forces and the Revolution. London: Croom Helm and Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1977.

   ■ Pouchin, Dominique. Portugal, quelle révolution? Paris, 1976.

   ■ Pulido Valente, Vasco. "E Viva Otelo." In Pulido Valente, V., ed., O País das Maravilhas, 451-54. Lisbon, 1979 [anthology of articles from weekly Lisbon paper, Expresso].

   ■. Estudos Sobre a Crise Nacional. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■ Rebelo de Sousa, Marcelo. O Sistema de Governo Português antes e depois da Revisão Constitucional, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1981. Rêgo, Raúl. Militares, Clérigos e Paisanos. Lisbon, 1981. Robinson, Richard A. H. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London: Allen & Unwin, 1979.

   ■ Rodrigues, Avelino, Cesário Borga, and Mário Cardoso. O Movemento dos Capitães e o 25 de Abril. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■. Portugal Depois De Abril. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Ruas, H. B., ed. A Revolução das Flores. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Rudel, Christian. La Liberte couleur d'oeillet. Paris: Fayard, 1980.

   ■ Sa, Tiago Moreira de. Os Americanos na Revolucao Portuguesa ( 1974-1976). Lisbon: Edit. Noticias, 2004.

   ■ Sá Carneiro, Francisco. Por Uma Social-Democracia Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Sanches Osôrio, Helena. Um Só Rosto. Uma Só Fé. Conversas Com Adelino Da Palma Carlos. Lisbon, 1988. Sanches Osôrio, J. The Betrayal of the 25th of April in Portugal. Madrid: Sedmay, 1975.

   ■ Schmitter, Philippe C. "Liberation by Golpe: Retrospective Thoughts on the Demise of Authoritarian Rule in Portugal." Armed Forces and Society 2 (1974): 5-33.

   ■. "An Introduction to Southern European Transitions from Authoritarian Rule: Italy, Greece, Portugal, Spain and Turkey." In G. O'Donnell,

   ■ P. C. Schmitter, and L. Whitehead, eds., Transitions from Authoritarian Rule, 3-10. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1986.

   ■ Silva, Fernando Dioga da. "Uma Administração Envelhecido." Revista da Ad-ministraçao Pública 2 (Oct.-Dec. 1979).

   ■ Simões, Martinho, ed. Relatório Do 25 De Novembro: Texto Integral, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Soares, Isabel, ed. Mário Soares: O homem e o político. Lisbon, 1976. Soares, Mário. Democratização e Descolonização: Dez meses no Governo Provisório. Lisbon, 1975. Sobel, Lester A., ed. Portuguese Revolution, 1974-1976. New York: Facts on File, Inc., 1976.

   ■ Spínola, Antônio de. Portugal e o Futuro. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■. País Sem Rumo: Contributo para a História de uma Revolução. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Stock, Maria José. Os Partidos do Poder: Dez Anos Depois do " 25 De Abril." Evora, 1986.

   ■ Story, Jonathan. "Portugal's Revolution of Carnations: Patterns of Change and Continuity." International Affairs 52 (July 1976): 417-34. Sweezey, Paul. "Class Struggles in Portugal." Monthly Review 27, 4 (Sept. 1975): 1-26.

   ■ Szulc, Tad. "Lisbon and Washington: Behind Portugal's Revolution." Foreign Policy 21 (Winter 1975-76): 3-62. Tavares de Almeida, Antônio. Balsemão: O retrato. Lisbon, 1981. "Vasco." Desenhos Políticos. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Vasconcelos, Alvaro. "Portugal in Atlantic-Mediterranean Security." In Douglas T. Stuart, ed., Politics and Security in the Southern Region of the Atlantic Alliance, 117-36. London: Macmillan, 1988.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "Golpes militares e golpes literários. A literatura do golpe de 25 de Abril de 1974 em contexto histôrico." Penélope. Fazer E Desfazer A História, 19-20 (1998): 191-212.

   ■. "Tributo ao Historiador dos Historiadores. Memorias de A.H.de Oliveira Marques (1933-2007)," Historia XXIX, 95, III series (March 2007), 18-22.

   ■ Wiarda, Howard J. Transcending Corporatism? The Portuguese Corporative System and the Revolution of 1974. Columbia: Institute of International Studies, University of South Carolina, 1976.

   ■. The Transition to Democracy in Spain and Portugal. Washington, D.C.: American Enterprise Institute for Public Policy Research, 1989. Wise, Audrey. Eyewitness in Revolutionary Portugal. With a Preface by Judith Hart, MP. London: Spokesman, 1975.

   ■ PHYSICAL FEATURES: GEOGRAPHY, GEOLOGY, FAUNA, AND FLORA

   ■ Birot, Pierre. Le Portugal: Étude de géographie régionale. Paris, 1950.

   ■ Embleton, Clifford. Geomorphology of Europe. London: Macmillan, 1984.

   ■ Girão, Aristides de Amorim. Divisão regional, divisão agrícola e divisão administrativa. Coimbra, 1932.

   ■. Condições geográficos e históricas de autonomia política de Portugal. Coimbra, 1935.

   ■. Atlas de Portugal, 2nd ed. Coimbra, 1958.

   ■ Ribeiro, Orlando. Portugal, O Mediterrâneo e o Altântico. Coimbra, 1945 and later eds.

   ■. Portugal. Volume V of Geografia de Espana y Portugal. Barcelona, 1955.

   ■. Ensaios de Geografia Humana e regio nal. Lisbon, 1970.

   ■. A geografia e a divisão regional do país. Lisbon, 1970.

   ■ Stanislawski, Dan. The Individuality of Portugal. Austin: The University of Texas Press, 1959.

   ■. Portugal's Other Kingdom: The Algarve. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1963.

   ■ Taylor, Albert William. Wild Flowers of Spain and Portugal. London: Chatto & Windus, 1972.

   ■ Way, Ruth, and Margaret Simmons. A Geography of Spain and Portugal. London: Methuen, 1962.

   ■ ARCHAEOLOGY AND PREHISTORY

   ■ "Actas do Colóquio Inter-Universitário do Noroeste Peninsular (Porto-Baião, 1988), vol. II, Proto-História, romanização e Idade Média." In Trabalhos de antropologia e etnologia. 28, 3-4 (1988).

   ■ Alarcão, Jorge de, ed. "Do Paleolítico va arte visigótica." Vol. 1, História da

   ■ Arte em Portugal. Lisbon: Alfa, 1986.

   ■. Roman Portugal, 3 vols. Warminister, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1988.

   ■. Portugal Das Orígens A Romanização. Vol. I. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds. Nova História de Portugal. Lisbon: Presença, 1990. Anderson, James M., and M. S. Lea. Portugal 1001 Sights: An Archaeological and Historical Guide. Calgary, Alberta: University of Calgary and Robert Hale, 1994.

   ■ Balmuth, Miriam S., Antonio Gilman, and Lourdes Prados-Torreira, eds. Encounters and Transformations: The Archaeology of Iberia in Transition. Monographs in Mediterranean Archaeology, no. 7. Sheffield, U.K.: Sheffield Academic Press, 1997.

   ■ Beirão, C. M. M. Une civilization protohistorique du Sud au Portugal ( 1er Age du Fer). Paris: D. Boccard, 1986.

   ■ Cardoso, João Luís, Santinho A. Cunha, and Delberto Aguiar. O Homem Pre-Histórico no Concelho de Oeiras. Oeiras, Portugal: Estudos Arquelógicos de Oeiras, 1991.

   ■ Harrison, Richard J. The Bell Beaker Cultures of Spain and Portugal. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1977.

   ■ Mangas, Júlio, ed. Hispania epigraphica. Madrid, 1989.

   ■ Maloney, Stephanie J. "The Villa of Toerre de Palma, Portugal: Archaeology and Preservation." Portuguese Studies Review VIII, 1 (Fall-Winter, 1999-2000): 14-28.

   ■ Savory, H. N. Spain and Portugal: The Prehistory of the Iberian Peninsula. London, 1968.

   ■ Silva, A. C. F. A cultura castreja no Noroeste de Portugal. Paços de Ferreira:

   ■ Museu da Citânia de Sanfins, 1986. Straus, L. G. Iberia before the Iberians. Albuquerque, N.M., 1992.

   ■ FOREIGN TRAVELERS AND RESIDENTS' ACCOUNTS

   ■ Andersen, Hans Christian. A Visit to Portugal 1866. London: Peter Owen, 1972.

   ■ Beckford, William. Italy, with Sketches of Spain and Portugal. Paris: Baudry's European Library, 1834.

   ■. The Journal of William Beckford in Portugal and Spain 1787-1788.

   ■ Boyd Alexander, ed. London: Hart-Davies, 1954.

   ■. Recollections of an Excursion to the Monasteries of Alcoboca and Batalha. Fontwell, U.K.: Centaur Press, 1972.

   ■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. In Portugal. London: Bodley Head, 1912.

   ■ Borrow, George. The Bible in Spain, 2 vols. London: Constable, 1923 ed.

   ■ Chaves, Castelo Branco. Os livros de viagens em Portugal no século XVIII e a sua projecção europeia. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Costigan, Arthur William. Sketches of Society and Manners in Portugal. London: T. Vernon, 1787.

   ■ Crawfurd, Oswald. Portugal Old and New. London: Kegan, Paul, 1880.

   ■. Round the Calendar in Portugal. London: Chapman & Hall, 1890.

   ■ Darymple, William. Travels through Spain and Portugal in 1774. London: J. Almon, 1777.

   ■ Dumouriez, Charles Francois Duperrier. An Account of Portugal as It Appeared in 1766. London: C. Law, 1797.

   ■ Fielding, Henry. Jonathan Wild and the Journal of a Voyage to Lisbon. London: J. M. Dent, 1932.

   ■ Fullerton, Alice. To Portugal for Pleasure. London: Grafton, 1945.

   ■ Gibbons, John. I Gathered No Moss. London: Robert Hale, 1939.

   ■ Gordon, Jan, and Cora Gordon. Portuguese Somersault. London: Harrap, 1934.

   ■ Hewitt, Richard. A Cottage in Portugal. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1996.

   ■ Huggett, Frank. South of Lisbon: Winter Travels in Southern Portugal. London: Gollancz, 1960.

   ■ Hume, Martin. Through Portugal. London: Richards, 1907.

   ■ Hyland, Paul. Backwards Out of the Big World: A Voyage into Portugal. Hammersmith, U.K.: HarperCollins, 1996.

   ■ Jackson, Catherine Charlotte, Lady. Fair Lusitania. London: Bentley, 1874.

   ■ Kelly, Marie Node. This Delicious Land Portugal. London: Hutchinson, 1956.

   ■ Kempner, Mary Jean. Invitation to Portugal. New York: Athenaeum, 1969.

   ■ Kingston, William H. G. Lusitanian Sketches of the Pen and Pencil. 2 vol. London: Parker, 1845.

   ■ Landmann, George. Historical, Military and Picturesque Observations on Portugal. 2 vol. London: Cadell and Davies, 1818.

   ■ Latouche, John [Pseudonym of Oswald Crawfurd]. Travels in Portugal. London: Ward, Lock & Taylor, ca. 1874.

   ■ Link, Henry Frederick. Travels in Portugal and France and Spain. London: Longman & Rees, 1801.

   ■ Macauley, Rose. They Went to Portugal. London: Jonathan Cape, 1946.

   ■. They Went to Portugal, Too. Manchester: Carcanet Books, 1990.

   ■ Merle, Iris. Portuguese Panorama. London: Ouzel, 1958.

   ■ Murphy, J. C. Travels in Portugal. London: 1795.

   ■ Proper, Datus C. The Last Old Place: A Search through Portugal. New York: Simon & Schuster, 1992.

   ■ Quillinan, Dorothy [Wordsworth]. Journal of a Few Months in Portugal with Glimpses of the South of Spain. 2 vol. London: Moxon, 1847. Sitwell, Sacheverell. Portugal and Madeira. London: Batsford, 1954. Smith, Karine R. Until Tomorrow: Azores and Portugal. Snohomish, Wash.: Snohomish Publishing, 1978. Southey, Robert. Journals of a Residence in Portugal, 1800-1801 and a Visit to France, 1838. London and New York: Oxford Univ. Press, 1912. Thomas, Gordon Kent. Lord Byron's Iberian Pilgrimage. Provo, Utah: Brigham Young University Press, 1983. Twiss, Richard. Travels through Portugal and Spain in 1772-1773. London, 1775.

   ■ Watson, Gilbert. Sunshine and Sentiment in Portugal. London: Arnold, 1904. Wheeler, Douglas L. "A[n American] Fulbrighter in Lisbon, Portugal, 196162." Portuguese Studies Review 1 (1991): 9-16.

   ■ PORTUGUESE CARTOGRAPHY, DISCOVERIES, AND NAVIGATION

   ■ Albuquerque, Luís de. Curso de História de Naútica. Coimbra, 1972.

   ■. Introdução a história dos descobrimentos, 3rd ed. Mem Martins, 1983.

   ■. Os Descobrimentos Portugueses. Lisbon: Alfa, 1983.

   ■. Navegadores, viajantes e adventureiros portugueses: Séculos XV e XVI. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■. Portuguese Books on Nautical Science from Pedro Nunes to 1650. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■. Os Descobrimentos Portugueses. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Boorstin, Daniel. The Discoverers. New York: Random House, 1983. Boxer, C. R. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire, 1415-1825. London: Hutchinson, 1969.

   ■ Brazão, Eduardo. La découverte de Terre-Neuve. Montreal: Les Presses de l'Université, 1964.

   ■. "Les Corte-Real et le Nouveau Monde." Revue d'histoire d'Amérique Française 19, 1 (1965): 335-49. Cortesão, Armando, and Avelino Teixeira de Mota. Cartografia Portuguesa Antiga. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■. Portugalia Monumenta Cartográfica, 6 vols. Lisbon, 1960-62.

   ■. História da Cartografia Portuguesa, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1969-70.

   ■ Cortesão, Jaime. L'expansion des portugais dans l'historie de la civilisation. Brussels, 1930.

   ■. Os descobrimentos portugueses, 2 vols. V. Magalhães Godinho and Joel Serrão, eds. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■. A expansão dos Portugueses no período henriquinho. Lisbon, 1965.

   ■. Descobrimentos precolombanos dos portugueses. Lisbon, 1966.

   ■ Costa, Abel Fontoura da. A Marinharia dos Descobrimentos, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■ Costa Brochado, Idalino F. Descobrimento do Atlântico. Lisbon, 1958. English ed., 1959-60.

   ■ Coutinho, Admiral Gago. A naútica dos descobrimentos, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1951-52.

   ■ Crone, G. R. Maps and Their Makers. New York: Capricorn Books, 1966.

   ■ Dias, José S. da Silva. Os descobrimentos e a problemática cultural do Século XVI, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Disney, Anthony, and Emily Booth, eds. Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.

   ■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães, ed. Documentos sobre a expansão portuguesa [ to 1460], 3 vols. Lisbon, 1945-54.

   ■ Guedes, Max, and Gerald Lombardi, eds. Portugal. Brazil: The Age of Atlantic Discoveries. Lisbon: Bertrand; Milan: Ricci; Brazilian Culture Foundation, 1990. [Catalogue of New York Public Library Exhibit, Summer 1990]

   ■ Harley, J. B., and David Woodward. The History of Cartography. Volume 1: Cartography in Prehistoric, Ancient and Medieval Europe and Mediterranean. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1987.

   ■ Leite, Duarte. História dos Descobrimentos: Colectânea de esparsos, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1958-61.

   ■ Ley, Charles. Portuguese Voyages, 1498-1663. London: Dent, 1953.

   ■ Marques, J. Martins da Silva. Descobrimentos portugueses, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1944-71.

   ■ Martyn, John R. C., ed. Pedro Nunes ( 1502-1578): His Lost Algebra and Other Discoveries. John R. C. Martyn, trans. New York: Peter Lang, 1996.

   ■ Morison, Samuel Eliot. The European Discovery of America: The Northern Voyages, A. D. 500-1600. New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.

   ■. Portuguese Voyages to America in the Fifteenth Century. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1974.

   ■ Mota, Avelino Teixeira da. Mar, Além-Mar-Estudos e Ensaios de História e Geografia. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■ Nemésio, Vitorino. Vida e Obra do Infante D. Henrique. Lisbon, 1959.

   ■ Parry, J. H. The Discovery of the Sea. New York: Dial, 1974.

   ■ Penrose, Boies. Travel and Discovery in the Renaissance, 1420-1620. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1952.

   ■ Peres, Damião. História dos Descobrimentos Portugueses. Oporto, 1943.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. The Portuguese Pioneers. London, 1933; New York: Barnes & Noble, 1967.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. Precision Astrolabe: Portuguese Navigators and Transoceanic Aviation. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■ Seary, E. R. "The Portuguese Element in the Place Names of Newfoundland." In Luís Albuquerque, ed., Vice-Almirante A. Teixeira da Mota: In Memo-riam. Vol. II, 359-64. Lisbon: Academia da Marinha, 1989.

   ■ Subrahmanyam, Sanjay. The Career and Legend of Vasco Da Gama. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997.

   ■ Velho, Alvaro. Roteiro ( Navigator's Route) da Primeira Viagem de Vasco da Gama ( 1497-1499). Lisbon, 1960.

   ■ Winius, George, ed. Portugal, the Pathfinder: Journeys from the Medieval toward the Modern World 1300-ca. 1600. Madison, Wisc.: Hispanic Seminary of Medieval Studies, 1995.

   ■ PORTUGAL AND HER OVERSEAS EMPIRES (1415-1975)

   ■ Abshire, David M., and Michael A. Samuels, eds. Portuguese Africa: A Handbook. New York: Praeger, 1969.

   ■ Afonso, Aniceto, and Carlos de Matos Gomes. Guerra Colonial. Lisbon: Noticias, 2001.

   ■ Albuquerque, J. Moushino de. Moçambique. Lisbon, 1898.

   ■ Alden, Dauril. The Making of an Enterprise: The Society of Jesus in Portugal, Its Empire & Beyond. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1995.

   ■ Alexandre, Valentim. Orígens do Colonialismo Português Moderno ( 18221891). Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1979.

   ■. Velho Brasil, Novas Africas: Portugal e o Império ( 1808-1975). Oporto: Afrontamento, 2000.

   ■, and Jill Dias, eds. "O Império Africano 1825-1890. Volume X." In J.

   ■ Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds., Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1998.

   ■ Ames, Glen J. "The Carreira da India, 1668-1682: Maritime Enterprise and the Quest for Stability in Portugal's Asian Empire." Journal of European Economic History 20, 1 (1991): 7-28.

   ■. Renascent Empire? The House of Braganza and the Quest for Stability in Portuguese Monsoon Asia, ca. 1640-1683. Amsterdam: Amsterdam Univ.Press, 2000.

   ■. Vasco da Gama. Renaissance Crusader. New York: Pearson/Longman, 2005.

   ■ Antunes, José Freire. O Império com Pés de Barro: Colonizaçao e Descolonização: As Ideologias em Portugal. Lisbon: D. Quixote, 1980.

   ■. O Factor Africano 1890-1990. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1990.

   ■. A Guerra De Africa 1961-1974, 2 vols. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1995-96.

   ■. Jorge Jardim: Agente Secreto 1919-1982. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1996.

   ■ Axelson, Eric A. South-East Africa, 1488-1530. London: Longmans, 1940.

   ■. "Prince Henry and the Discovery of the Sea Route to India." Geographical Journal (U.K.) 127, 2 (June 1961): 145-58.

   ■. Portugal and the Scramble for Africa, 1875-1891. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1967.

   ■. Portuguese in South-East Africa, 1488-1699. Cape Town: Struik, 1973.

   ■. Congo to Cape: Early Portuguese Explorers. New York: Harper & Row, 1974.

   ■ Azevedo, Mário. Historical Dictionary of Mozambique, 2nd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2003.

   ■ Baião, António, Hernãni Cidade, and Manuel Murias, eds. História da Expansão Portuguesa no Mundo, 4 vols. Lisbon, 1937-40.

   ■ Bender, Gerald J. "The Limits of Counterinsurgency [in the Angolan War, 1961-72]." Comparative Politics (1972): 331-60.

   ■. Angola under the Portuguese: The Myth Versus Reality. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1978.

   ■ Bhíla, H. H. K. Trade and Politics in a Shona Kingdom: The Manyika and Their Portuguese and African Neighbours, 1875-1902. Harlow, U.K.: Longman, 1990.

   ■ Birmingham, David. The Portuguese Conquest of Angola. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1965.

   ■. Trade and Conflict in Angola. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1966.

   ■. Frontline Nationalism in Angola & Mozambique. London: James Currey, 1992.

   ■. Portugal and Africa. New York: St. Martins, 1999.

   ■ Bottineau, Yves. Le Portugal Et Sa Vocation Maritime. Paris: Boccard, 1977. Boxer, C. R. Fidalgos in the Far East— Fact and Fancy in the History of Macau. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1948. ———. The Christian Century in Japan. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1951.

   ■ ———. Salvador de Sá and the Struggle for Brazil and Angola, 1602-1688. London, 1952.

   ■ ———. Four Centuries of Portuguese Expansion, 1415-1825: A Succinct Survey. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1961.

   ■ ———. The Golden Age of Brazil, 1695-1750. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1962.

   ■ ———. Race Relations in the Portuguese Colonial Empire, 1415-1825. Oxford:

   ■ Clarendon Press, 1963. ———. Portuguese Society in the Tropics. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1965.

   ■ ———. The Portuguese Seaborne Empire 1415-1825. London: Hutchi nson, 1969.

   ■ ———, and Carlos de Azevedo, eds. Fort Jesus and the Portuguese in Mombasa. London: Hollis and Carter, 1960.

   ■ Broadhead, Susan H. Historical Dictionary of Angola, 2nd ed. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow Press, 1992.

   ■ Burton, Richard. Goa and the Blue Mountains. London: Bentley, 1851.

   ■ Cabral, Luís. Crónica da Libertação. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Caetano, Marcello. Colonizing Traditions, Principles and Methods of the Portuguese. Lisbon, 1951.

   ■ ———. Portugal E A Internacionalização Dos Problemas Africanos, 3rd ed. Lisbon, 1965.

   ■ Cann, John P. Counterinsurgency in Africa: The Portuguese Way of War, 1961-1974. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1997. Castelo, Claudia. " O modo portugues de estar no mundo." O luso-tropicalismo e a ideologia colonial portuguesa ( 1931-1961). Oporto: Afrontamento, 1998. Castro, Armando. O Sistema Colonial Português em Africa ( meados do Século XX). Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Chaliand, Gerard. "The Independence of Guinea-Bissau and the Heritage of [Amilcar] Cabral." In Revolution in the Third World. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1978.

   ■ Chilcote, Ronald H. Portuguese Africa. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1967.

   ■ Clarence-Smith, Gervase. Slaves, Peasants and Capitalists in Southern Angola 1840-1926. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1979.

   ■ ———. The Third Portuguese Empire 1825-1975: A Study in Economic Imperialism. Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1985.

   ■ Coates, Timothy J. Convicts and Orphans: Forced and State-Sponsored Colonizers in the Portuguese Empire, 1550-1720. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 2001.

   ■ Davies, Shann. Macau. Singapore: Times Editions, 1986.

   ■ Dias, C. Malheiro, ed. História da colonização portuguesa no Brasil, 3 vols. Oporto, 1921-24.

   ■ Diffie, Bailey W., and George Winius. Foundations of the Portuguese Empire, 1415-1580. Minneapolis: Minnesota University Press, 1977.

   ■ Disney, Anthony R. Twilight of the Pepper Empire: Portuguese Trade in Southwest India in the Early Seventeenth Century. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1978.

   ■ ———, and Emily Booth, eds. Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.

   ■ Duffy, James. Shipwreck and Empire: Being an Account of Portuguese Maritime Disaster in a Century of Decline. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1955.

   ■ ———. Portuguese Africa. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1959. ———. Portugal in Africa. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1962.

   ■. "The Portuguese Territories." In Colin Legum, ed., Africa: A Handbook to the Continent. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1967. ———. A Question of Slavery. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1967. Felgas, Hélio. História do Congo Português. Carmona, Angola, 1958. ———. Guerra em Angola. Lisbon, 1961.

   ■ Galvão, Henrique, and Carlos Selvagam. O Império Ultramarino Português, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1953.

   ■ Gleijeses, Piero. Conflicting Missions: Havana, Washington and Africa, 19591976. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2002.

   ■ Godinho, Vitorino Magalhães. "Portugal and Her Empire." In The New Cambridge Modern History. Vol. V (1961): 384-97; Vol. VI (1963): 509-TO.

   ■ Grenfell, F. James. História da Igreja Baptista em Angola, 1879-1975. Queluz, Portugal: Núcleo, 1998.

   ■ Hammond, Richard J. "Economic Imperialism: Sidelights on a Stereotype." Journal of Economic History XXI, 4 (1961): 582-98.

   ■ ———. Portugal and Africa, 1815-1910: A Study in Uneconomic Imperialism. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1966.

   ■ Hanson, Carl. Portugal and the Wider World 1147-1497. New Orleans, La.: University Press of the South, 2001.

   ■ Harris, Marvin. Portugal's African Wards. New York: American Committee on Africa, 1957.

   ■ ———. "Portugal's Contribution to the Underdevelopment of Africa and Brazil." In Ronald H. Chilcote, ed., Protest & Resistance in Angola & Brazil: Comparative Studies, 209-23. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1972.

   ■ Henderson, Lawrence W. Angola: Five Centuries of Conflict. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1979. ———. A Igreja Em Angola. Lisbon: Edit. Além-Mar, 1990. Heywood, Linda. Contested Power in Angola 1840s to the Present. Rochester, N.Y.: University of Rochester Press, 2000.

   ■ Hilton, Anne. The Kingdom of Kongo. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1985.

   ■ Hower, Alfred, and Richard Preto-Rodas, eds. Empire in Transition: The Portuguese World in the Time of Camões. Gainesville: University Presses of Florida, 1985.

   ■ Isaacman, Allen. "The Prazos da Coroa 1752-1830: A Functional Analysis of the Political System." STUDIA (Lisbon) 26 (1969): 149-78.

   ■. Mozambique: The Africanization of a European Institution: The Zambezi Prazos, 1750-1902. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1972.

   ■ ———. The Tradition of Resistance in Mozambique: Anti-Colonial Activity in the Zambesi Valley 1850-1921. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1976.

   ■ James, Martin. Historical Dictionary of Angola, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 2004.

   ■ Jardim, Jorge. Sanctions Double-Cross: Oil to Rhodesia. Lisbon, 1978. Johnson, Harold, and Maria Beatriz Nizza da Silva. O Império Luso-Brasileiro 1500-1620. Volume VI. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds. Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1992. Joliffe, Jill. East Timor: Nationalism & Colonialism. University of Queensland Press, 1978.

   ■ Kea, Ray A. Settlements, Trade and Politics in the Seventeenth Century Gold Coast. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1982.

   ■ Kohen, Arnold. From the Place of the Dead. The Epic Struggles of Bishop Belo of East Timor. New York: St Martins, 1999.

   ■ Livingstone, Charles, and David Livingstone. Narrative of an Expedition to the Zambezi and Its Tributaries. New York: 1866.

   ■ Livingstone, David. Missionary Travels and Researches in South Africa. London, 1857.

   ■ Lobban, Richard, and Joshua Forrest. Historical Dictionary of the Republic of Guinea-Bissau, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 1996. Lobban, Richard, and Marilyn Halter. Historical Dictionary of Cape Verde, 3rd ed. Lanham, Md.: Scarecrow Press, 1993. Martino, Antonio M. Joao de Azevedo Coutinho. Marinheiro e soldado de Portugal. Lisbon: Colibri, 2002. Martins, Rocha. História das Colónias Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1933. Marvaud, Angel. Le Portugal et Ses Colonies. Paris, 1912. Mason, Philip, ed. Angola: A Symposium; Views of a Revolt. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1961. Melo, João de, ed. Os Anos Da Guerra 1961-1975: Os Portugueses em Africa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1988. Miller, Joseph C. Way of Death: Merchant Capitalism and the Angolan Slave Trade, 1730-1830. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1988.

   ■ Ministry of Foreign Affairs. Portugal. Vinte Anos de Defesa do Estado Português de India. Lisbon, 1967.

   ■. Portugal Replies in the United Nations. Lisbon, 1970.

   ■ Mondlane, Eduardo. The Struggle for Mozambique. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1969.

   ■ Moreira, Adriano. Política Ultramarina. Lisbon, 1956.

   ■. Portugal's Stand in Africa. New York: University Publishers, 1962.

   ■, and Jose Carlos Venancio. Eds. Luso-Tropicalismo. Uma Teoria Social em Questao. Lisbon: Vega, 2000.

   ■ Múrias, Manuel, ed. História da expansão portuguesa no mundo, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1937-42.

   ■. Short History of Portuguese Colonization. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Newitt, Malyn. Portuguese Settlement on the Zambesi: Exploration, Land Tenure and Colonial Rule in East Africa. New York: Holmes & Meier, 1973.

   ■. Portugal in Africa: The Last Hundred Years. London: Longmans, 1981.

   ■. A History of Mozambique. London: Hurst, 1995.

   ■. A History ofPortuguese Overseas Expansion, 1400-1668. London: Routledge, 2005.

   ■. Diálogos Interditos: A Política Externa Portuguesa E A Guerra De Africa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■. História De Portugal. 1933-1974: II Suplemento. Oporto, 1981.

   ■. Um político confessa-se ( Diário: 1960-1968), 3rd ed. Oporto, 1987.

   ■. Salazar. Vol. V: A Resistência ( 1958-1964). Oporto, 1981.

   ■ Nowell, Charles E. "Portugal and the Partition of Africa." Journal of Modern History XIX, 1 (1947): 1-17.

   ■ Nunes, Antonio Lopes Pires. Angola 1961. Da Baixa do Cassange a Nambu-angongo. Lisbon: Prefacio, 2005.

   ■ Okuma, Thomas. Angola in Ferment: The Background and Prospects of Angolan Nationalism. Boston: Beacon, 1962.

   ■ Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wise.: Bruce, 1957.

   ■ Pélissier, René. Les Guerres Grises: Resistance Et Revoltes en Angola ( 18451941). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1977.

   ■. Naissance Du Mozambique: Tome 1, Tome 2, Resistance Et Revoltes Anticoloniales ( 1854-1981), 2 vols. Orgeval: Pélissier, 1984.

   ■. História de Moçambique. Vol. II. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■. Naissance de la Guinée: Portugais et Africains en Senegambie ( 1841-1936). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1989.

   ■. Timor En Guerre: Le Crocodile et les Portugais ( 1847-1913). Orgeval: Pélissier, 1996.

   ■ Pires, Adelino Serras, and Fiona Claire Capstick. The Winds of Havoc: A Memoir of Adventure and Destruction in Deepest Africa. New York: St. Martin's, 2001.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. The Portuguese Pioneers. London: Black, 1933.

   ■ Ranger, T. [Terence] O. "Revolt in Portuguese East Africa: The Makombe Rising of 1917." St. Anthony's Papers. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 15 (1963).

   ■ Remy. Goa, Rome of the Orient. Trans. from the French by Lancelot Sheppard. London, 1957.

   ■ Ribeiro, General Goncalves. A Vertigem da Descolonizacao. Da Agonia do Exodo a Cidadania Plena. Lisbon: Inquerito, 2002. Ricard, Robert. Etudes sur l'Histoire des Portugais au Maroc. Coimbra, 1955.

   ■ Richards, J. M. Goa. London: Hurst, 1982.

   ■ Rodney, Walter. A History of the Upper Guinea Coast, 1545-1800. New York: Oxford University Press, 1970. Rodrigues, José Honório. Africa e Brasil: Outro Horizonte. Rio de Janeiro, 1961.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. "Valentim Fernandes, Rodrigo de Santaella, and the Recognition of the Antilles as "Opposite India." Boletim da Sociedade de Geografia de Lisboa series 75 (July-September 1957): 279-309.

   ■. The Obedience of a King of Portugal. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1958.

   ■. The Quest for Eastern Christians: Travels and Rumors in the Age of Discovery. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1962.

   ■ Russell-Wood, A. J. Fidalgos and Philanthropists: The Santa Casa da Mi-sericordia of Bahia, 1550-1755. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1968.

   ■. "Colonial Brazil." In David W. Cohen and Jack Greene, eds., Neither Slave nor Free, 84-133. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1972.

   ■. "Local Government in Portuguese America: A Study in Cultural Divergence." Comparative Studies in Society and History 16 (1974): 187-231.

   ■. From Colony to Nation: Essays on the Independence of Brazil. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1975.

   ■. World on the Move: The Portuguese in Africa, Asia & America, 1415-1808. New York: St. Martins, 1993.

   ■ Salazar, António de Oliveira. Goa and the Indian Union. Lisbon, 1954.

   ■. "Portugal, Goa and the Indian Union." Foreign Affairs (New York) 34, 3 (April, 1956): 418-31.

   ■. "Realities and Trends of Portugal's Policies." International Affairs (London) XXXIX, 2 (April 1963): 169-83.

   ■ Saldanha, C. F. A Short History of Goa. Goa, 1957.

   ■ Sanceau, Elaine. Indies Adventure: The Amazing Career of Afonso de Albuquerque. London: Blackie, 1936.

   ■. Portugal in Quest of Prester John. London: Hutchinson, 1943.

   ■. The Land of Prester John. New York: Knopf, 1944.

   ■. Henry the Navigator. New York: Norton, 1947.

   ■. The Perfect Prince: Dom João II. Oporto, 1959.

   ■. Good Hope, the Voyage of Vasco da Gama. Lisbon, 1967.

   ■. The Reign of the Fortunate King ( Manuel I), 1495-1521. Hamden, Conn.: Archon, 1969.

   ■. Knight of the Renaissance: A Biography of Dom João de Castro. London: Hutchinson, n.d.

   ■ Schubert, Benedict. A Guerra e as Igrejas: Angola, 1961-1991. Basel, Switzerland: Schlettwein, 2000 [orig. ed. in German, Lucerne, Exodus Pub., 1997].

   ■ Schwartz, Stuart G. Sovereignty and Society in Colonial Brazil. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1973.

   ■ Serra, Carlos, ed. História de Moçambique, 2 vols. Maputo, Mozambique: Tempo, 1982-83.

   ■ Silva, Botelho da, ed. and comp. " Dossier" Goa. ( General Manuel) Vassalo e Silva. A Recusa do Sacrifício Inútil. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Silva, Maria Beatriz Nizza da, ed. O Império Luso-Brasileiro 1750-1822. Volume VIII. In J. Serrão and A. H. de Oliveira Marques, eds., Nova História Da Expansão Portuguesa. Lisbon: Estampa, 1986.

   ■ Silva Cunha J. M. da. Questões Ultramarinos e Internacionais. Lisbon, 1960.

   ■ Silva Rego, A. da. História das missões do padroado português do Oriente: India ( 1500-1542). 1 vol. Lisbon, 1949.

   ■. Portuguese Colonization in the Sixteenth Century: A Study of Royal Ordinances. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1957.

   ■. O Ultramar Português No Século XIX ( 1834-1910). Lisbon, 1966.

   ■ Sousa Dias, Gastão. Os Portugueses em Angola. Lisbon, 1959.

   ■ Sykes, John. Portugal and Africa: The People and the War. London: Hutchinson, 1971.

   ■ Telo, António José. Lourenço Marques na Política Externa Portuguesa. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1991.

   ■. Economia E Império No Portugal Contemporânea. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1994.

   ■. Os Açores e o Controlo do Atlântico. Lisbon: Asa, 1993.

   ■ Vail, Leroy, and Landeg White. Capitalism and Colonialism in Mozambique: A Study of Quelimane District. Minneapolis: Minnesota University Press, 1980.

   ■ Veen, Ernst van. Defeat or Decay? An Inquiry into the Portuguese Decline in Asia 1580-1645. Leiden: University of Leiden, 2000.

   ■ Verlinden, Charles. "Italian Influence on Iberian Colonization." Hispanic American Historical Review 33 (1953): 99-211.

   ■. The Beginnings of Modern Colonization. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1970.

   ■ Vogel, Charles. Le Portugal et Ses Colonies. Paris, 1860.

   ■ Vogt, John. Portuguese Rule on the Gold Coast 1469-1682. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1979.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese in Angola. 1836-1891: A Study in Expansion and Administration." Ph.D. dissertation, Boston University, Department of History, 1963.

   ■. "Anti-Imperialism Traditions in Portugal, Yesterday and Today." Boston University Graduate Journal XII, 2 (Spring 1964): 125-37.

   ■. 'The Portuguese and Mozambique: The Past against the Future." In John A. Davis and James K. Baker, eds., Southern Africa in Transition. 180-96. New York: Praeger, 1966.

   ■. "Gungunhana." In Norman R. Bennett, ed., Leadership in Eastern Africa, Six Political Biographies, 165-220. Boston: Boston University Press, 1968.

   ■. "Gungunyane the Negotiator." Journal of African History IX, 4 (1968): 585-602.

   ■. "Nineteenth-Century African Protest in Angola: Prince Nicolas of Kongo (1830?-1860)." African Historical Studies (Boston) I (1968): 40-59.

   ■. "The Portuguese Army in Angola." Journal of Modern African Studies (Cambridge U.K.), 7, 3 (Oct. 1969): 425-39.

   ■. "Thaw in Portugal." Foreign Affairs 48, 4 (July 1970): 769-81.

   ■. "Portugal in Angola: A Living Colonialism?" In C. Potholm and R. Dale, eds., Southern Africa in Perspective, 172-82. New York: Free Press, 1972.

   ■. "The First Portuguese Colonial Movement, 1835-1875." Iberian Studies (Keele, U.K.) I, 1 (Spring 1975): 25-27.

   ■. "Rebels and Rebellions in Angola, 1672-1892." In Mark Karp, ed., African Dimensions: Essays in Honor of William O. Brown, 81-93. Boston: Boston University Press, 1975.

   ■. "African Elements in Portugal's Armies in Africa (1961-1974)." Armed Forces and Society (Chicago) 2, 2 (Feb. 1976): 233-50.

   ■. "Portuguese Colonial Governors in Africa, 1870-1974." In L. H. Gann and Peter Duignan, eds., African Proconsuls: European Governors in Africa, 415-26. New York: Free Press, 1978; and "J. Mousinho de Albuquerque (1855-1902)" and "J. Norton de Matos (1867-1955)": 427-44; 445-63.

   ■. "The Portuguese Withdrawal from Africa, 1974-1975; The Angolan Case." In John Seiler, ed., Southern Africa Since the Portuguese Coup, 3-21. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1980.

   ■. "The Portuguese Exploration Expeditions and Expansion in Angola, 1877-1883." In Academia de Marinha and Instituto de Investigação Científica Tropical, eds., Vice Almirante A. Teixeira Da Mota: In Memoriam. Volume I, 267-76. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■. "'Aqui é Portugal!': The Politics of the Colonial Idea during the Estado Novo, 1926-1974." In Pavilhão de Portugal, EXPO'98 and Instituto de História Contemporânea, eds., Portugal No Transição Do Milênio: Colóquio Internacional, 375-105. Lisbon: Fim de Século, 1998.

   ■. The Empire Time Forgot: Writing a History of the Portuguese Overseas Empire, 1808-1975. Oporto: Universidade Fernando Pessoa, 1998.

   ■. "Filho Do Porto, Filho Do Império: Antônio Francisco Da Silva Porto (1817-1890) and the Politics of Motivation in Portugal's First and Second Scrambles for Africa (1836-1861; 1875-1891)." Revista da UFP [Universidade Fernando Pessoa] 4 (Dec. 1999): 225-54.

   ■. "'Mais leis do que mosquitos': A Primeira República Portuguesa e o Império Ultramarino (1910-1926)." In Nuno Severiano Teixeira and Antó-nio Costa Pinto, eds., A Primeira República Portuguesa Entre O Liberalismo E O Autoritarismo, 133-68. Lisbon: University Nova de Lisboa, 2000.

   ■. "Spiritual Peoples at Odds: Portugal, India and the Goa Question, 1947-61." In Anthony Disney and Emily Booth, eds., Vasco Da Gama and the Linking of Europe and Asia, 452-70. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2000.

   ■. "Portugal, Africa and the future." In Stewart Lloyd-Jones and Antonio Costa Pinto, eds., The Last Empire: Thirty Years of Portuguese Decolonization, 113-25. Bristol, U.K.: Intellect, 2003.

   ■. "The Forced Labor 'System' in Angola, 1903-1947: Reassessing Origins and Persistence in the Context of Colonial Consolidation, Economic Growth and Reform Failures." In CEAUP, Centro de Estudos Africanos da Universidade do Porto, ed., Trabalho forcado africano-experiencias coloniais comparadas, 367-393. Oporto: CEAUP, 2006.

   ■. "As Raizes Do Nacionalismo Angolano: Publicacoes De Protesto Dos Assimilados, 1870-1940." In Nuno Vidal and Justino Pinto De Andrade, eds., O Processo De Transicao Para O Multipartidarismo Em Angola, 73-92. Lisbon: Ed. Firmamento, 2006.

   ■, and René Pélissier. Angola. London: Pall Mall and New York: Praeger, 1971; reprinted, Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1977; Portuguese lang. edition, Lisbon: Tinta-da-China, 2009. Whiteway, R. W. The Rise of the Portuguese Power in India, 1497-1550. London: Constable, 1899.

   ■ Winius, George D. The Fatal History of Portuguese Ceylon: Transition to Dutch Rule. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1971.

   ■. "The Portuguese Asian 'Decadência' Revisited." In Alfred Hower and Richard Preto-Rodas, eds., Empire in Transition, 106-17. Gainesville: University Presses of Florida, 1980.

   ■. The Black Legend of Portuguese India. New Delhi: New Concept, 1985.

   ■ Portuguese Migration and Communities Abroad

   ■ Alves, Marcial. Os Portugueses no Mundo. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Anderson, Grace M., and David Higgs, eds. A Future to Inherit: Portuguese Communities in Canada. Toronto: McClelland and Stewart, 1976. Arroteia, Jorge Carvalho. A emigração Portuguesa-suas origens e distribuição. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Brettell, Caroline B. "Nineteenth- and Twentieth-Century Portuguese Emigration: A Bibliography." Portuguese Studies Newsletter 3 (Fall-Winter, 1977-78).

   ■. "Emigrar Para Voltar: A Portuguese Ideology of Return Migration." Papers in Anthropology 20 (1979): 1-20.

   ■. We Have Already Cried Many Tears: The Stories of Three Portuguese Migrant Women. Cambridge, Mass.: Schenkman Publishing Co., 1982.

   ■. Men Who Migrate, Women Who Wait: Population and History in a Portuguese Parish. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.

   ■ Carvalho, Eduardo de. Os portugueses na Nova Inglaterra. Rio de Janeiro, 1931.

   ■ Caspari, Andrea. "The Return Orientation among Portuguese Migrants in France." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 193-203. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Dias, Eduardo Mayone, ed. Portugueses na América do Norte. Baden: Peregrinação, 1983.

   ■ Fagundes, Francisco Cota. Hard Knocks: An Azorean-American Odyssey.

   ■ [Memoir]. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 2000. Felix, John Henry, and Peter F. Senecal. The Portuguese in Hawaii. Honolulu, Hawaii: Authors' edition, 1978. Fernandes, Ferreira. Os Primos da América. Lisbon: Relógio D'Agua, 1991. Ferreira, Eduardo de Sousa. As orígens e formas de emigração. Lisbon, 1976. Freitas, J. F. Portuguese-American Memories. Honolulu, Hawaii, 1930.

   ■ Giles, Wenona. "Motherhood and Wage Labour in London, England: Portuguese Migrant Women and the Politics of Gender." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. University of Toronto, 1987.

   ■ Higgs, David, ed. Portuguese Migration in Global Perspective. Ontario: Multicultural Historical Society of Ontario, 1990.

   ■ Klimt, Andrea. "Portuguese Migrants in Germany: Class, Ethnicity and Gender." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. Stanford University, 1987.

   ■ Lavigne, Gules. Les ethniques et la ville: L'aventure des immigrants portugais à Montreal. Montreal: Preamble, 1987.

   ■ Leder, Hans Howard. Cultural Persistence in a Portuguese-American Community. New York: Arno Press, 1980.

   ■ Lewis, J. R., and A. M. Williams. "Emigrants and Retornados: A Comparative Analysis of the Economic Impact of Return Migration in the Região Centro." In E. D. Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 227-50. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ McCabe, Marsha L., and Joseph D. Thomas, eds. Portuguese Spinner: An American Story; Stories of History, Culture and Life from Portuguese Americans in Southeastern New England. New Bedford, Mass.: Spinner, 1998.

   ■ Marques, D., and J. Medeiros. Portuguese Immigrants: 25 Years in Canada. Toronto: West End YMCA, 1989.

   ■ Martins, J. Oliveira. Fomento Rural e emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1956.

   ■ Mira, Manuel. The Forgotten Portuguese: The Melungeons and Other Groups; The Portuguese Making of America. Franklin, N.C.: Portuguese-American Historical Research Foundation, 1998.

   ■ Nazareth, J. Manuel. "Familia e Emigração em Portugal." Economia e Sociedade (Lisbon) 23 (1977): 31-50.

   ■ Nunes, Maria Luisa. A Portuguese Colonial in America: Belmira Nunes Lopes; The Autobiography of a Cape Verdean-American. Pittsburgh, Penn.: Latin American Literary Review Press, 1982.

   ■ Oliver, Lawrence. Never Backward: The Autobiography of Lawrence Oliver; A Portuguese-American. San Diego, 1972.

   ■ Pap, Leo. The Portuguese-Americans. Boston: Twayne, 1981.

   ■ Pereira, Miriam Halpern. A Política Portuguesa de Emigraçao, 1850 a 1930. Lisbon: Regra do Jogo, 1981.

   ■ Pereira da Rosa, Victor M., and Salvato V. Trigo. "Elementos para uma Caracterização da Família Imigrante Portuguesa na Africa do Sul." Economia e Sociologia 41 (1986): 61-71.

   ■. Azorean Emigration: A Preliminary Overview. Oporto: Fernando Pessoa University, 1994.

   ■. Portugueses e Moçambicanos no Apartheid: Da Ficção à Realidade. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Purves, James. "Portuguese in Bermuda." Bermuda Historical Quarterly 3 (1946): 133-42.

   ■ Ribeiro, F. G. Cassola. Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Rocha-Trinidade, Maria Beatriz da. "La Sociologie des Migrations au Portugal." Current Sociology 32, 2 (Summer 1984): 175-98.

   ■. "Towards Reintegration of Emigrants." In E. de Sousa Ferreira and Guy Clausse, eds., Closing the Migratory Cycle: The Case of Portugal, 183-94. Saarbrücken: Breitenbach, 1985.

   ■. "Emigração." In Dicionario Illustrado Da História De Portugal ( 1985): 205-7.

   ■. A Emigração. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■. "Espaços de herança cultural portuguesa-gentes, factos, políticas." Analise Social (Lisbon) XXIV (1988): 313-51.

   ■ Rocha-Trinidade, Maria Beatriz da, and Jorge Arroteia. Bibliografia da Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. Americans of Portuguese Descent: A Lesson in Differentiation. Beverly Hills, Calif.: Sage, 1974.

   ■. Testemunhos sobre a Emigração Portuguesa: Antologia. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Silva, F. Emídio da. A Emigração Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1917.

   ■ Silva, Manuela, et al. Retorno, Emigração e Desenvolvimento Regional em Portugal. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Simões, Mário Pinto. O Emigrante Português: Processos de Adaptação ( o exemplo da Suiça). Oporto, 1985.

   ■ Simões, Nuno. O Brasil e a Emigração Portuguesa. Coimbra, 1934.

   ■ Sousa Ferreira, Eduardo de, and Guy Clausse, eds. Closing the Migratory Cycle: The Case of Portugal. Saarbrucken: Verlag Breitenbach, 1986.

   ■ Teixeira, Carlos, and Victor M. Pereira da Rosa, eds. The Portuguese in Canada: From the Sea to the City. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2000.

   ■ Vicente, António Luís. Os Portuguese Nos Estados Unidos Da América: Política De Comunidades E Comunidade Política. Lisbon: FLAD, 1998.

   ■ Viera, David, et al. Portuguese in the United States: A Bibliography ( Supplement to the 1976 Leo Pap Bibliography). Essay Number 6 in Essays in Portuguese Studies. Durham, N.H.: International Conference Group on Portugal, 1989.

   ■ Williams, Jerry. And Yet They Come: Portuguese Immigration from the Azores to the United States. New York: Center for Migration Studies, 1982.

   ■ Portugal's Atlantic Islands (Azores, Madeiras)

   ■ Biddle, Anthony J. Drexel. The Madeira Islands, 2 vols. London: Hurst and Blackett, 1900.

   ■ Bryans, Robin. Madeira, Pearl of the Atlantic. London: Robert Hale, 1959.

   ■. The Azores. London: Faber & Faber, 1963.

   ■ Cooke, Rupert Croft. Madeira. London: Putnam, 1961.

   ■ Cossart, Noel. Madeira— the Island Vineyard. London: Christie's, 1984.

   ■ Da Silva, Fernando Augusto, and Carlos Azevedo de Menezes. Elucidário Madeirense, 3 vols. Funchal, 1940.

   ■ Duncan, T. Bentley. Atlantic Islands in the Seventeenth Century: Madeira, the Azores and the Cape Verdes in Seventeenth-Century Commerce andNavigation. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1972.

   ■ Guill, James H. A History of the Azores Islands. Menlo Park, Calif.: Author's Edition, 1972.

   ■ Instituto Histórico Da Ilha Terceira [Azores]. Os Açores E O Atlântico ( Séculos XIV-XVII) [Proceedings of International Colloquium, August 1983]. Angra do Heroismo, Terceira Island, Azores, 1984.

   ■ Koebel, William Henry. Madeira Old and New. London: Griffiths, 1909.

   ■ Mee, Jules. Histoire de la découverte des Iles Açores. Ghent, 1901.

   ■ Peres, Damião. A Madeira sob os donatórios-Séculos XV e XVI. Funchal, 1914.

   ■ Rogers, Francis M. Atlantic Islanders of the Azores and Madeiras. North Quincy, Mass.: Christopher House, 1979.

   ■ Serpa, Caetano Valadão. A Gente Dos Açores. Identificaçao-Emigraçio E Religiosidade: Séculos XVI-XX. Lisbon: 1978.

   ■ Silva, J. Donald. "With Columbus in Madeira." Portuguese Studies Review (Durham, NH) I, 1 (Spring-Summer 1991).

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Azores and the United States (1787-1987): Two Hundred Years of Shared History." Boletim do Instituto Histórico da Ilha Terceira XLV (1988): 55-71.

   ■ Anglo-Portuguese Alliance (1373-Present)

   ■ Almada, José de. A Aliança Inglesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1947.

   ■. Para a história da aliança luso-britânica. Lisbon, 1955.

   ■ Atkinson, William C. British Contributions to Portuguese and Brazilian Studies. London: British Council, 1974.

   ■ Bourne, Kenneth. The Foreign Policy of Victorian England 1830-1902. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1970.

   ■ British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC). 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance. London: BBC, 1973.

   ■ British Community Council of London. Souvenir Brochure Commemorating the 600th Anniversary of the Anglo-Portuguese Treaty of Alliance and Friendship, 1373-1973. Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. Portugal na Alvorada do Século XX. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Caetano, Marcello "Aliança Inglesa." Enciclopédia Luso-Brasileira da Cultura. Vol. 1 (1963): 1270-1271.

   ■. "L'alliance Anglo-Portuguese: Histoire et situation actuelle." Chronique de politique etrangére (Paris) XX, 6 (1967): 695-708.

   ■. Portugal e a Internacionalização dos Problemas Africanos. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■ Castro, Armando. A dominação inglesa em Portugal. Estudo seguido de Antologia Textos dos Sécs. XVIII e XIX. Oporto: Afrontamento, 1972.

   ■ Crollen, Luc. Portugal, the U.S. and NATO. Leuven, Belgium: Leuven University Press, 1973.

   ■. "Portugal." In O. De Raeymaeker et al. Small Powers in Alignment, 27-96. Leuven, Belgium: Leuven University Press, 1974.

   ■ Cunha Leal, Francisco. Portugal e Inglaterra. Corunna, 1932.

   ■ Davidson, Basil. "The Oldest Alliance Faces a Crisis." In Philip Masonm, ed., Angola: A Symposium. Views of a Revolt, 138-60. London: Oxford University Press, 1962.

   ■ Duff, Katherine. "The War and the Neutrals." In Arnold and Veronica Toyn-bee, eds., Survey of International Affairs. London: Chatham House, 1956.

   ■ Duffy, James. A Question of Slavery. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1967.

   ■ Epstein, John. "The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 1373-1973." World Survey (London) 54 (June 1973): p. 18.

   ■ Ferreira, José Medeiros. Estudos de Estratégia e Relações Internacionais. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Ferreira Martins, General L. O Poder Militar Da Gran-Bretanha E A Aliança Anglo-Lusa. Coimbra, 1939.

   ■. A Cooperaçio Anglo-Portuguesa na Grande Guerra de 1914-18. Lisbon, 1942.

   ■ Francis, A. D. The Methuens and Portugal 1691-1700. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1966.

   ■. Portugal 1715-1808. London: Tamesis, 1985.

   ■ Freitas, A. Barjona de. A Questão Ingleza. Lisbon, 1891.

   ■ Gonçalves, Caetano. A Aliança Luso-Britânica e o Domínio Colonial Português. Lisbon, 1917.

   ■ Guedes, Armando Marques. A Aliança Inglesa: Notas de História diplomática, 1383-1943. Lisbon, 1943. Halpern Pereira, Miriam. Revoluçio, finanças, dependência externa. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Howorth, A. H. D'Araujo Scott. A Aliança Luso-Britânica E A Segunda Guerra Mundial. Lisbon, 1956.

   ■ Kay, Hugh. Salazar and Modern Portugal. New York: Hawthorne, 1970.

   ■ Lawrence, L. Nehru Seizes Goa. New York: Pageant, 1963.

   ■ Livermore, H. V. "The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance: Historical Perspective." 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 7-15. Lisbon: BBC, 1973.

   ■ Macedo, Jorge Borges de. História Diplomática Portuguesa-Constantes e Linhas de Força. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Manoel, J. de Câmara. Portugal e Inglatterra. Lisbon, 1909.

   ■ Martinez, Pedro S. História Diplomática de Portugal. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Medlicott, W. N. The Economic Blockade, Vol. II. London: His Majesty's Stationery Office, 1952.

   ■ Oliveira, Pedro Aires. Os Despojos Da Alianca. A Gra-Bretanha e a questao colonial portuguesa 1945-1975. Lisbon: Tinta-da-China, 2007. Ortigão, Ramalho. John Bull. Lisbon, 1887.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. Diplomatic Relations of Portugal with France, England and Holland from 1646 to 1668. Watford, U.K.: Voss & Michael, 1925.

   ■. Chapters in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. London: Voss & Michael, 1935.

   ■ Russell, Peter E. The English Intervention in Spain and Portugal in the Time of Edward III and Richard II. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1955. Sarmento, J. E. Morães. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance and Coast Defense. London, 1908.

   ■ Serrão, Joel. "O Ultimatum (January 1890)." Dicionário de História de Portugal. Vol. IV (1971): 219-24.

   ■ Shafaat, Ahmed Khan, ed. Anglo-Portuguese Negotiations Relating to Bombay, 1660-1667. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1922.

   ■ Sideri, Sandro. Trade and Power: Informal Colonialism in Anglo-Portuguese Relations. Rotterdam: Rotterdam University Press, 1970.

   ■ Sousa, Carlos Hermenegildo de. A Aliança Anglo-Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1943.

   ■ Stone, Glyn A. "The Official British Attitude to the Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 1910-45." Journal of Contemporary History (London) 10, 4 (Oct. 1975): 729-46.

   ■. The Oldest Ally: Britain and the Portuguese Connection, 1936-1941. Woodbridge, U.K.: Royal Historical Society and Boydell Press, 1994. Teixeira, Nuno Severiano. O Ultimatum Inglês: Política Externa no Portugal do 1890. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Teles, Basilio. Do Ultimatum ao 30 de Janeiro. Oporto, 1905.

   ■ Vicente, António Pedro. "Um testemunho de 1796 sobre a Situação de Portugal face ao domínio inglês." In Arquivos do Centro Cultural Portugües, IV. Paris, 1972.

   ■ Vieira de Castro, Luís. D. Carlos I. ( Elementos de História Diplomática), 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1941.

   ■ Vincent-Smith, John. "Britain, Portugal and the First World War." European Studies Review 4, 3 (1974).

   ■. "The Portuguese Economy and the Anglo-Portuguese Commercial Treaty of 1916." Iberian Studies (Keele, U.K.) III, 2 (Autumn 1974): 49-54.

   ■. As Relações Políticas Luso-Britânicas 1910-1916. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■. "The Portuguese Republic and Britain, 1910-14." Journal of Contemporary History 10, 4 (Oct. 1975): 707-27.

   ■ Vintras, R. E. The Portuguese Connection: A Secret History of the Azores Base. London: Bachman & Turner, 1974. Viriato [Pseud]. A Aliança lnglesa. Lisbon, 1914.

   ■ Walford, A. R. The British Factory in Lisbon and Its Closing Stages Ensuring upon the Treaty of 1810. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Wheeler, Douglas L. "The Portuguese in Angola, 1836-1891: A Study in Expansion and Administration." Ph.D. dissertation, History Department, Boston University, 1963.

   ■. "19th Century: Anglo-Portuguese Alliance and the Scramble for Africa." In BBC, 600 Years of Anglo-Portuguese Alliance, 40-43. London: BBC, 1973.

   ■. "The Price of Neutrality: Portugal, the Wolfram Question and World War II." Luso-Brazilian Review (Madison, Wisc.) 34, 1, 2 (Summer 1986; Winter 1986): 107-27; 97-111.

   ■ Wordsworth, William. William Wordsworth's Convention of Cintra: A Facsimile of the 1809 Tract [Introduction by Gordon Kent Thomas]. Provo, Utah: Brigham Young University Press, 1983.

   ■ Young, George. Portugal Old and Young. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1917.

   ■ ANTHROPOLOGY, SOCIOLOGY, RURAL AND URBAN SOCIETY

   ■ Almeida, Miguel Vale de. The Hegemonic Male: Masculinity in a Portuguese Town. Oxford: Berghan, 1996.

   ■ Black, Richard. Crisis and Change in Rural Europe: Agricultural Development in the Portuguese Mountains. Aldershot, U.K.: Avebury and Ashgate, 1992.

   ■ Brettell, Caroline B. Men Who Migrate, Women Who Wait: Population and History in a Portuguese Parish. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1986.

   ■. "The Absence of Men." Natural History 96, 2 (Feb. 1987): 52-61.

   ■. "The Portuguese." In Encyclopedia of World Cultures. New Haven, Conn.: Human Relations Area Files, 1990.

   ■. "The Priest and His People: The Contractual Basis for Religious Practice in Rural Portugal." In Ellen Badone, ed., Religious Orthodoxy and Popular Faith in European Society, 55-75. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1990.

   ■ Brogger, Jan. Pre-bureaucratic Europeans: A Study of a Portuguese Fishing Community. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989. Cabral, Manuel Villaverde. "Portuguese Perspectives." Sociologia Ruralis [Journal of European Rural Sociology] XXIV, 1 (1986); number devoted to rural Portugal today. Chaney, Rick. Regional Emigration and Remittances in Developing Countries: The Portuguese Experience. New York: Praeger, 1986. Cole, Sally. Women of the Praia: Work and Lives in a Portuguese Colonial Community. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1991. Cutileiro, José. A Portuguese Rural Society. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1971.

   ■ Deschamps, Paul. Portugal: La Vie Sociale Actuelle. Paris, 1935.

   ■. Histoire Sociale du Portugal. Paris, 1959.

   ■ Dias, Jorge. Rio do Onor-comunitarismo agropastoral. Oporto, 1953.

   ■. Ensaios Etnológicos. Lisbon, 1961.

   ■. The Portuguese Contribution to Cultural Anthropology. Johannesburg: Witwaterstrand University Press, 1964.

   ■. Vilarinho Da Furna: Uma Aldeia Comunitária. Rev. ed. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Downs, Charles. Os Moradores à Conquista da Cidade. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■. "Community Organization, Political Change and Urban Policy: Portugal. 1974-1976." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Sociology. University of California, 1980.

   ■. "Residents' Commissions and Urban Struggles in Revolutionary Portugal." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal: The Revolution and Its Consequences. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Dracklé, Dorlé. Macht und Ohnmacht: Der Kampf num die Agarreform im Alentejo ( Portugal). Gottingen, Germany: Edit. Re, 1991.

   ■ Espírito Santo, Moise. Communidade Rural ao Norte do Tejo. Lisbon, 1980.

   ■ Feijó, Rui, H. Martins, and João de Pina Cabral, eds. Death in Portugal. Oxford: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford, 1983.

   ■ Feijó, Rui Graça. "State, Nation and Regional Diversity in Portugal: An Overview." In Richard Herr and John H. Polt, eds., Iberian Identity: Essays on the Nature of Identity in Portugal and Spain, 37-47. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, University of California, 1989.

   ■ Feio, Mariano. Les Bas Alentejo et l'Algarve. Lisbon, 1949.

   ■ Ferreira de Almeida, João. Classes sociais nos campos. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Fonseca, Ramiro da. O Livro da Saúde e da Doença. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Gallop, Rodney. Portugal: A Book of Folk-Ways. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1936. Reprinted, 1961.

   ■ Hoefgen, Lynn. "The Integration of Returnees from the Colonies into Portugal's Social and Economic Life." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, University of Florida, 1985.

   ■ Ingerson, Alice Elizabeth. "Corporatism and Class Consciousness in Northwestern Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology. Johns Hopkins University, 1984.

   ■ Jenkins, Robin. The Road to Alto. London: Pluto Press, 1979.

   ■ Lawrence, Denise. "Menstrual Politics: Women and Pigs in Rural Portugal." In T. Buckley and A. Gottlieb, eds., Blood Magic: The Anthropology of Menstruation, 117-36. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988.

   ■. "Suburbanization of House Form and Gender Relations in a Rural Portuguese Agro-Town." Architecture and Behavior 4, 3 (1988): 197-212.

   ■ Martins, Hermínio. "Portugal." In Margaret S. Archer and Salvador Giner, eds., Contemporary Europe: Class, Status and Power. New York: St. Martins, 1971.

   ■ Mattoso, José. Identificação de um país. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Merten, Peter. Anarchismüs und Arbeiterkãmpf in Portugal. Hamburg: Libera-tare Association, 1981.

   ■ Monteiro, Paulo. Terra que ja foi terra: Análise Sociológica de nove lugares agro-pastorais da Serra da Lousã. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Nataf, Daniel. "Social Cleavages and Regime Formation in Contemporary Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Political Science, UCLA, 1987.

   ■ Nazareth, J. Manuel. "Familia e Emigração em Portugal: Ensaio Exploratório." Economia e Socialismo 23 (1977): 31-50.

   ■ O'Neill, Brian Juan. "Dying and Inheriting in Rural Tras-os-Montes." Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxford 14 (1983): 44-74.

   ■. Social Inequality in a Portuguese Hamlet: Land, Late Marriage, and Inheritance, 1870-1978. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1987.

   ■ Pacheco, Helder. Tradições Populares de Portugal. Lisbon, 1985.

   ■ Pardoe, Julia. Traits and Traditions of Portugal, 2 vols. London, 1832.

   ■ Pereira Neto, João Baptista. "Social Evolution in Portugal since 1945." In Raymond S. Sayers, ed., Portugal and Brazil in Transition, 212-27. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1968.

   ■ Pina-Cabral, João de. Sons of Adam, Daughters of Eve: The Peasant World-View of the Alto Minho. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.

   ■. "Sociocultural Differentiation and Regional Identity in Portugal." In

   ■ R. Herr and J. H. Polt, eds., Iberian Identity, 3-18. Berkeley: Institute of International Studies, 1989.

   ■ Poinard, Michel. La Retour des Traveilleurs Portugais. Paris: La Documentation Francaise, 1979.

   ■ Reed, Robert Roy. "Managing the Revolution: Revolutionary Promise and Political Reality in Rural Portugal." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, Indiana University, 1988.

   ■ Riegelhaupt, Joyce F. "In the Shadow of the City: Integration of a Portuguese Village" [São João das Lampas, nr, Cascais]. Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Anthropology, Columbia University, 1964.

   ■. "Saloio Women: An Analysis of Informal and Formal Political and Economic Roles of Portuguese Peasant Women." Anthropological Quarterly 40, 3 (July 1967): 109-26.

   ■. "Festas and Padres: The Organization of Religious Action in a Portuguese Parish." American Anthropologist 75 (1973): 835-52.

   ■. "Peasants and Politics in Salazar's Portugal: The Corporate State and Village 'Nonpolitics'" In L. S. Graham and H. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal: The Revolution and Its Antecedents, 167-90. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ Rodrigues, Julieta E. S. de Almeida. "Continuity and Change in Urban Portuguese Women's Roles: Emerging New Household Structures." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of Sociology, Columbia University, 1979.

   ■ Rowland, Robert. "Demographic Patterns and Rural Society in Portugal." So-ciologica Ruralis 26, 1 (1986): 36-47.

   ■ Sanchis, Pierre. Arraial. La Fête d'un Peuple: Les Pélerinages Populaires au Portugal. Paris, 1976.

   ■ Siegel, Bernard J. "Social Structure and Medical Practitioners in Rural Brazil and Portugal." Sociologia (São Paulo) 20, 4 (Oct. 1958): 463-76.

   ■. "Conflict, Parochialism and Social Differentiation in Portuguese Society." Journal of Conflict Resolution V, 1 (March 1961): 35-12.

   ■ Smith, T. Lynn. "The Social Relationships of Man to the Land in Portugal." Sociologia 25, 1 (Dec. 1963): 319-43.

   ■ Sousa Santos, Boaventura. "Estado e sociedade na semiperíferia do sistema mundiale: O caso português." Análise Social 87-89 (1985): 869-902.

   ■. "Social Crisis and the State." In Kenneth Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s: Dilemmas of Democratic Consolidation, 167-95. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Vasconcellos, Joaquim Leite de. Ethnograia Portuguesa, 8 vols. Lisbon, 1941-82.

   ■. Tradições Populares Portugueses. New ed. Lisbon, 1986.

   ■ Willems, Emilio. "On Portuguese Family Structure." International Journal of Comparative Society (Dharwar, India) 3, 1 (Sept. 1962): 65-79.

   ■ ARTS, ARCHITECTURE, URBAN PLANNING, MUSIC

   ■ Almeida, Rodrigo Vicente de. História da Arte em Portugal: ( Segundo Estudo) Documentos lnéditos. Oporto, 1883. Almeida D'Eca, Admiral Vicente M. Castles of Portugal. Lisbon, 1925. Amaral, Francisco K. Lisboa: Uma Cidade em Transformação. Lisbon, 1969. Azevedo, Carlos de, and Chester Brummel. Churches of Portugal. New York: Scala Books, 1985.

   ■ Barreira, João, ed. Arte Portuguesa: As Decorativas, 2 vols. Lisbon, n.d.

   ■ Barretto, Mascarenhas, and George Dykes. Fado: Lyrical Origins and Poetical Motivation. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■ Binney, Marcus. Country Manors of Portugal. London: Scala, 1987.

   ■ Branco, Luís de Freitas. A Música em Portugal. Lisbon, 1930.

   ■ Brito, Manuel Carlos de. Opera in Portugal in the Eighteenth Century. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989.

   ■ Carvalho, Pinto de. História de Fado. Lisbon, 1903 and 1982 eds.

   ■ Castro d'Aire, Teresa. O Fado. Lisbon: Temas da Actualidade, 1996.

   ■ Chicó, Mário Tavares. A Architectura Gótica em Portugal. Lisbon, 1968.

   ■ França, José-Augusto. A Arte em Portugal No Século XIX. Lisbon, 1966.

   ■. Lisboa Pombalina e o Illuminismo, 2nd ed. Lisbon, 1977.

   ■. A Reconstrucão e a Arquitectura Pombalina. Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Gallop, Rodney. "The Fado (The Portuguese Song of Fate)." Musical Quarterly XIX (1933): 199-213.

   ■. Eight Portuguese Folksongs. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1936.

   ■ Gil, Júlio. The Finest Churches in Portugal. Lisbon, 1988.

   ■. The Finest Castles in Portugal, 3rd ed. George F. W. Dykes, trans. Lisbon, 1996.

   ■ Gonçalves, Rui Mário. Pintura e escultura em Portugal. Lisbon: Instituto de Cultura, 1984.

   ■. 100 Pintores Portugueses do século XX. Lisbon: Alfa, 1986.

   ■ Kubler, George. Portuguese Plain Architecture: Between Spices and Diamonds, 1521-1706. Middletown, Conn.: Wesleyan University Press, 1972.

   ■. Studies in Ancient American and European Art: The Collected Essays of George Kubler. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1985.

   ■, and Martin Soria. Art and Architecture in Spain and Portugal. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1959.

   ■ Lacerda, Aarão de. História da Arte em Portugal, 2 vols. Oporto, 1942-48.

   ■ Leão, Joaquim de Sousa. "Decorative Art: The Azulejo." In H. V. Livermore, ed. Portugal and Brazil: An Introduction. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1953.

   ■ Lopes Graça, Fernando. A canção popular portuguesa. Lisbon, 1953.

   ■. A música portuguesa e os sus problemas: Ensaios. Lisbon, 1959.

   ■ Moita, Luís. O fado: canção de vencidos. Lisbon, 1936.

   ■ Neves, José Cassiano. The Palace and Gardens of Fronteira: Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century Portuguese Style. Lisbon: Quetzal and Scala, 1995. North, C.T. Guia dos castelos antigos de Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon: Bertrand Ed., 2002.

   ■ Pacheco, Jose. Stuart Carvalhais. O desenho grafico e a imprensa. Lisbon: Biblioteca do Empresario, 2000. Pereira, Paulo, ed. Arte portuguesa. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1995. Picchio, Luciana Stegagno. Storia del Teatro Portoghese. Rome: Edizinio deli' Ateneo, 1964.

   ■ Queirós, José. Cerâmica Portuguesa, 2 vols. 2nd rev. ed. Lisbon, 1948.

   ■ Santos, Luís Reis. Monuments of Portugal. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■ Santos, Reinaldo dos. A Escultura em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1948-50.

   ■. História da Arte em Portugal. Oporto, 1953.

   ■ Sasportes, José. História da Dança em Portugal. Lisbon, 1970. Simões, J. M. dos Santos. "Azulejos in a Land of Many Colours." Connoisseur (London) CXXXVII, 551 (1956): 15-21.

   ■. Azulejaria em Portugal no Século X VIII. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Smith, Robert C. A Talha em Portugal. Lisbon, 1963.

   ■. The Art of Portugal, 1500-1800. London, Weidenfeld and Nicolson, 1968.

   ■. "The Building of Mafra." Apollo 97, 134 (April 1973): 360-67.

   ■ Stoop, Anne de. Demeures portugaises dans les environs de Lisbonne. Paris: Weber, 1986.

   ■. Palais et manoirs: Le Minho. Paris: Ed. du Seuil, 1995.

   ■ Tannock, Michael. Portuguese 20th Century Artists: A Biographical Dictionary. Chichester, U.K.: Phillimore, 1978.

   ■ Taylor, René. "The Architecture of Port Wine." The Architectural Review CXXIX, 772 (1961): 368-99.

   ■ Terol, Marylene. Azulejos a Lisbonne. Paris: Hervas, 1992.

   ■ Veiga de Oliveira, Ernesto. Instrumentos musicais populares portugueses. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Watson, Walter Crum. Portuguese Architecture. London: Constable, 1908. Wohl, Hellmut. "Carlos Mardel and His Lisbon Architecture." Apollo 97, 134 (April 1973): 350-59.

   ■ Sculpture and Ceramics

   ■ Andrade, Sergio de. "Presepios." In Dicionario de Arte Barroca em Portugal. Lisbon: Presenca, 1989. Barreira, Joao. Arte Portuguesa, Arquitectura e Escultura. Lisbon: Excelsior, n.d.

   ■ Cardoso, Arnaldo Pinto. O Presepio Barroco Portugues. Lisbon: Bertrand, 2003.

   ■ Chaves, Luis. Os Barristas Portugueses. Coimbra, 1925.

   ■. Natal Portugues. Oporto: Liv. Classica Editora, 1942.

   ■ Gargano, Pietro. Il Presepio. Otto Secoli di Storia, Arte, Tradizione. Milan: Fenice, 1995.

   ■ Lima, Henrique de Campos F. Joaquim Machado de Castro, Escultor Conimbricense. Coimbra: Instituto de Historia de Arte, 1989. Macedo, Diogo de. Presepios Portugueses. Lisbon: Artis, 1951.

   ■. Machado de Castro. Lisbon: Artis, 1958.

   ■ Morais, Heitor. Natal do Meu Coracao. Braga: Ed. A.O., 1991.

   ■ Pais, Alexandre Nobre. Presepios Portugueses Monumentos do Seculo XVIII em Terracotta, 2 vols. Master's thesis in history of art, Universidade Nova de Lisboa, 1998.

   ■ Queiros, Jose. Ceramica Portuguesa. Lisbon: Presenca, 1998. Santos, Reinaldo dos. A Escultura em Portugal. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1951. Serrao, Vitor. Historia da Arte em Portugal IV-O Barroco. Lisbon: Presenca, 2003.

   ■ Smith, Robert C. The Art Of Portugal 1500-1800. New York: Meredith Press, 1968.

   ■ Sousa, Ernesto de. Presepios. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1998.

   ■ Cinema

   ■ Antunes, Joao and Jose de Matos-Cruz, Cinema Portugues 1896-1998. Lisbon: Lusomundo, 1997.

   ■ Bandeira, Jose Gomes. Porto: 100 anos de cinema portugues. Oporto: Camara Municipal do Porto, 1996. Duarte, Fernando. Primitivos do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Cinecultura, 1960.

   ■ Faria de Almeida, M., Resumo da Historia do Cinema. Lisbon: RTP, 1982. Nobre, Roberto. Singularidades do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Portugalia, n.d.

   ■ Pina, Luis de. Aventura do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Vega, 1977.

   ■. Documentarismo Portugues. Lisbon: IPC, 1977.

   ■. Panorama do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: Terra Livre, 1978.

   ■. Historia do Cinema Portugues. Mem Martins: Europa-America, 1986.

   ■ Ribeiro, Felix. O Cinema Portugues antes do Sonoro. Esboco Historiconema Portugues. Lisbon: Terra Livre, 1978.

   ■. Panorama do Cinema Portugues. Lisbon: n.d.

   ■ Children's Literature

   ■ Andresen, Sofia de Melo Breyner. A Fada Oriana. 9th ed. Lisbon: Figueiri-nhas, 1985.

   ■ Araújo, Matilde Rosa. A estrada fascinante. Lisbon: Livros Horizonte, 1988. Barreto, Garcia. Literatura Para Crianças E Jovens Em Portugal. Oporto:

   ■ Campo Das Letras, 1998. Bastos, Glória. A escrita para crianças em Portugal no seculo XIX. Lisbon:

   ■ Caminho da Educaçao, 1997. Cadet, Maria Rita Chiappe. Os Contos da Mamã. Lisbon: Lallement Freres, 1883.

   ■ Castro, Fernanda. Mariazinha em Africa, 2nd ed. Lisbon: Portugália, 1947. Cross, Esther, and Wilbur Cross. Portugal. Chicago: Childrens Press, 1986. DeSkalon, Anna, and Christa Stadtler. We Live in Portugal. New York: Watts, 1987.

   ■ Gomes, Alice. A Nau Catrineta, 2nd ed. Lisbon: Portugália, 1973.

   ■. A literatura para a infância. Lisbon: Torres & Abreu, 1979.

   ■ Letria, José Jorge. Do sentimento mágico da vida. Lisbon: Escritor, 1994. Müller, Adolfo Simões. Historiazinha de Portugal, 6th ed. Oporto: Tavares Martins, 1983.

   ■ Osório, Ana de Castro. Para as crianças. Illustr. by Leal da Câmara. Setúbal: Liv. Crianças, 1908.

   ■ Pires, Maria Laura Bettencourt. História da literatura infantil portuguesa. Lisbon: Vega, 1981. Ribeiro, Aquilino. Arca de Noé-III Classe. Lisbon, 1989. Rocha, Natércia. Breve História da Literatura para Crianças em Portugal. Lisbon: Instituto de Cultura e Língua Portuguesa, 1984.

   ■. Bibliografia geral da literatura portuguesa para crianças. Lisbon: Edit. Comunicação, 1987.

   ■ Sá, Domingos Guimarães de. A literatura infantil em Portugal. Braga: Edit. Franciscana, 1981.

   ■ Selfridge. John. Portugal. New York: Chelsea House, 1990. Vaz de Carvalho, Maria Amália. Contos para os Nossos Filhos, 11th ed. Oporto: Barreira, 1947.

   ■ Viana, António Manuel Couto. Jõao de Deus e um século de literatura infantil em Portugal. Lisbon: Ed. do Templo, 1978.

   ■ Lisbon, Capital City, in History and Literature

   ■ Castelo-Branco, Fernando. Lisboa Seiscentista, 3rd ed. Lisbon: 1969.

   ■ Castilho, Júlio de. Lisboa Antiga, 7 vols. Lisbon, 1935-45.

   ■ Couto, Dejanirah. Histoire de Lisbonne. Paris: Fayard, 2000.

   ■ Crespo, Ángel. Lisboa Mítica e Literária. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1987.

   ■ Dias, Marina Tavares. Lisboa Desaparecida. Lisbon: Quimera, 1990.

   ■ Dionísio, Sant'anna, ed. Guia de Portugal. Vol. I: Lisboa e Arredores. Lisbon: Biblioteca Nacional de Lisboa, 1924, orig. ed; reprint, Gulbenkian Foundation, 1979.

   ■ França, José-Augusto. Lisboa Pombalina e o Iluminismo. Lisbon: Bertrand, 1977.

   ■ Moita, Irisalva, ed. O Livro de Lisboa. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1994.

   ■ Neves, Orlando. Lisboa em Crónica. Lisbon: Author's Ed., 1968.

   ■ Pavão, Luís, and Mário Pereira. Tabernas de Lisboa. Lisbon: Assírio & Alvim, 1981.

   ■ Pessoa, Fernando. Lisboa. O que o turista deve ver: What the Tourist Should See. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1997.

   ■ Queirós, José Maria Eça de. À Capital. Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1960.

   ■ Santos, Piedade Braga, et al. Lisboa Setecentista vista por Estrangeiros. Lisbon: Liv. Horizonte, 1996.

   ■ Vieira, Alice. Esta Lisboa. Lisbon: Caminho, 1993.

   ■ Wright, David, and Patrick Swift. Lisbon: A Portrait and Guide. New York: Scribners, 1971.

   ■ The Inquisition in History

   ■ Azevedo, João Lúcio. Historia das Cristãos-Novos. Lisbon: Liv. Clássica, 1975.

   ■ Baião, António. A Inquisição em Portugal e no Brasil: Subsídios para a sua história. Lisbon: Arquivo Histórico Portugues, 1906. Bethencourt, Francisco. "Portugal: A Scrupulous Inquisition," In Bengt Ankarloo and Gustav Henningsen, eds., Early Modern Witchcraft: Centres and Peripheries, 403-22. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1990.

   ■. "Os equilíbrios sociais do Poder." In José Mattoso, ed., Historia De Portugal, Vol. 3, No Alvorecer Da Modernidade ( 1480-1620). Lisbon: Estampa, 1993.

   ■. História das Inquisições: Portugal, Espanha e Itália. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1994.

   ■ Braga, Maria Luísa. A Inquisição em Portugal na primeira metade do Séc. XVIII. Lisbon: Inst. Nacional de Investigação Científica, 1992.

   ■ Haliczer, Stephen, ed. Inquisition and Society in Early Modern Europe. London: Croom Helm, 1987.

   ■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. Reprint. New York: AMS Press, 1968.

   ■ Magalhães, Joaquim Romero. "Em Busca dos Tempos da Inquisição (15731615)." Revista de História das Ideias 9 (1987): 191-228.

   ■ Mea, Elvira Cunha Azevedo. A Inquisição de Coimbra no Século XVI. Oporto, 1989.

   ■ Mendonça, José Lourenço D. de, and António Joaquim Moreira. História da Inquisição em Portugal. Lisbon: Círculo de Leitores, 1980.

   ■ Novinsky, Anita, and Luísa M. Carneiro, eds. Inquisição: Ensaios sobre Mentalidade, Heresias e Arte. Rio de Janeiro: Expressão e Cultura, 1992.

   ■ Pereira, Isais da Rosa. Documentos para a história da Inquisição em Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Rego, Yvonne Cunha, ed. Feiticeiros, Profetas e Visionários: Textos Antigos Portugueses. Lisbon: Imprensa Nacional e Casa da Moeda, 1981.

   ■ Saraiva, António José. Inquisição e cristãos-novos. Lisbon: Estampa, 1985.

   ■ Walker, Timothy Dale. "Doctors, Folk Medicine and the Inquisition: The Repression of Popular Healing in Portugal during the Enlightenment Era." Ph.D. dissertation, Department of History, Boston University, 2001.

   ■ Literature in English Translation: Selection

   ■ Alcaforado, Mariana. The Letters of a Portuguese Nun ( Mariana Alcaforado). Edgar Prestage, trans. London: D. Nutt, 1893.

   ■ Andrade, Eugénio de. "White on White." Alexis Levitin, trans. Quarterly Review of Literature. Poetry Series VIII. Vol. 27. Princeton, N.J., 1987.

   ■. Another Name for Earth; O outro nome da terra. Alexis Levitin, trans. Ft. Bragg, Calif.: QED Press, 1997.

   ■ Andresen, Sophia de Mello Breyner. Marine Rose: Selected Poems. Ruth Fain-light, trans. Redding Ridge, Conn.: Swan Books, 1989.

   ■ Antunes, António Lobo. South of Nowhere. Elizabeth Lowe, trans. New York: Random House, 1983.

   ■. Fado Alexandrino. Gregory Rabassa, trans. New York: Grove Weidenfeld, 1990.

   ■. An Explanation of the Birds. Richard Zenith, trans. New York: Grove Weidenfeld, 1991.

   ■. Act of the Damned. New York: Grove Press, 1995.

   ■. The Natural Order of Things. New York: Grove Press, 2000.

   ■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. The Three Marias: New Portuguese Letters. Helen R. Lane, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975.

   ■ Bell, Aubrey F. G. Poems from the Portuguese ( with the Portuguese text). A.

   ■ Bell, trans. Oxford: Blackwell, 1913.

   ■ Camões, Luís de. The Lusiads of Luís de Camões. Leonard Bacon, trans. New York: Hispanic Society of America, 1950.

   ■. The Lusiads. William C. Atkinson, trans. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1952.

   ■. The Lusiads. Landeg White, trans. New York: Oxford University Press, 1997.

   ■ Castelo Branco, Camilo. Doomed Love ( A Family Memoir). Alice R. Clemente, trans Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1995. Castro, José Maria Ferreira de. Emigrants. Dorothy Ball, trans. New York: Macmillan, 1962.

   ■. Jungle. Charles Duff, trans. New York: Viking, 1935.

   ■. The Mission. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Hamilton, 1963.

   ■ Dantas, Júlio. The Cardinals' Collation, 48th ed. A. Saintsbury, trans. London, 1962.

   ■ Dias de Melo. Dark Stones. Gregory McNab, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1996.

   ■ Dinis, Júlio. The Fidalgos of Casa Mourisca. Rosanna Dabney, trans. Boston: D. Lothrop, 1891.

   ■ Garrett, Almeida. Brother Luiz de Sousa [play]. Edgar Prestage, trans. London: Elkin Mathess, 1909.

   ■. Travels in My Homeland. John M. Parker, trans. London: Peter Owen and UNESCO, 1987. Griffin, Jonathan. Camões: Some Poems Translated from the Portuguese by Jonathan Griffin. London: Menard Press, 1976. Jorge, Lídia. The Murmuring Coast. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1995.

   ■ Lisboa, Eugénio, ed. Portuguese Short Fiction. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1997.

   ■ Lopes, Fernão. The English in Portugal 1367-87: Extracts from the Chronicles of Dom Fernando and Dom João. Derek W. Lomax and R. J. Oakley, eds. and trans. Warminster, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1988.

   ■ Macedo, Helder, ed. Contemporary Portuguese Poetry: An Anthology in English. Helder Macedo, et al., trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet New Press, 1978.

   ■ Martins, J. P. De Oliveira. A History of Iberian Civilization. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans.; preface by Salvador de Madariaga. New York: Cooper Square, 1969.

   ■ Mendes Pinto, Fernão. The Travels of Mendes Pinto [Orig. title: Peregrinação].

   ■ Rebecca D. Catz, trans., with introduction and notes. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1989. Miguéis, José Rodrigues. A Man Smiles at Death with Half a Face. George

   ■ Monteiro, trans. Hanover, N.H.: University Press of New England, 1991.

   ■. Happy Easter. John Byrne, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1995.

   ■. Steerage and Ten Other Stories. George Monteiro, ed. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1998. Monteiro, Luís De Sttau. The Rules of the Game. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Hamilton, 1965.

   ■ Mourão-Ferreira, David. Lucky in Love. Christine Robinson, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1999. Namora, Fernando. Field of Fate. Dorothy Ball, trans. London: Macmillan, 1970.

   ■. Mountain Doctor. Dorothy Ball, trans. London: Macmillan, 1956.

   ■ Nemésio, Vitorino. Inclement Weather over the Channel. Francisco Cota Fagundes, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1993.

   ■. Stormy Isles: An Azorean Tale. Francisco C. Fagundes, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 2000.

   ■ Paço D'Arcos, Joaquim. Memoirs of a Banknote. Robert Lyle, trans. London, 1968.

   ■ Pedroso, Consiglieri, comp. Portuguese Folk-Tales. Henriqueta Monteiro, trans. Reprint of orig. 1882 ed. New York: Benjamin Blom, 1969.

   ■ Pessoa, Fernando. Fernando Pessoa: Sixty Portuguese Poems. F. E. G. Quintanilha, ed. and trans. Cardiff: University of Wales Press, 1971.

   ■. Selected Poems: Fernando Pessoa. 2nd rev. ed. Jonathan Griffin, trans. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1982.

   ■. The Book of Disquiet. Alfred MacAdams, trans. New York: Pantheon, 1991.

   ■. Fernando Pessoa: Selected Poems. Peter Rickard, ed. and trans. Edinburgh, U.K.: Edinburgh University Press, 1991.

   ■. "The Mariner: A 'Static Drama' in One Act." In Translation: Portugal.

   ■ George Ritchie, et al., trans. The Journal of Literary Translation. Vol. XXV, 38-56. New York: Translation Center, Columbia University, 1991.

   ■. Message: Bilingual Edition. Jonathan Griffin, trans. London: Menard Press and King's College, 1992.

   ■ Pires, José Cardoso. Ballad of a Dog's Beach. Mary Fitton, trans. London: J. M. Dent, 1986.

   ■ Queirós, José Maria Eça de. Cousin Bazilio. Roy Campbell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1953.

   ■. The Relic. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1954.

   ■. The City and the Mountains. Roy Campbell, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1955.

   ■. The Sin of Father Amaro. Nan Flanagan, trans. London: Max Reinhardt, 1962.

   ■. The Maias. Patricia McGowan Pinheiro, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1965.

   ■. The Illustrious House of Ramires. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1968.

   ■. Letters from England. Ann Stevens, trans. London: Bodley Head, 1970.

   ■. To the Capital. John Vetch, trans. Manchester, U.K.: Carcanet, 1995.

   ■ Quental, Antero de. Sixty-four Sonnets. Edgar Prestage, trans. London: David Nutt, 1894.

   ■ Redol, Alves. The Man with Seven Names. L. L. Barrett, trans. New York: Knopf, 1964.

   ■ Resende, André de. André deResende's 'Poema Latina'/ 'Latinpoems.' J. C. R. Martyn, ed. and trans. Lewiston N.Y.: Lampeter and Edwin Mellen, 1998. Ribeiro, Aquilino. When the Wolves Howl. Patricia McGowan Pinheiro, trans. New York: Macmillan; London: Cape, 1963. Sá Carneiro, Mário de. The Great Shadow ( and Other Stories). Margaret Jull Costa, trans. Sawtry, U.K.: Dedalus, 1996. Santareno, Bernardo. The Promise. Nelson H. Vieira, trans. Providence, R.I.: Gávea-Brown, 1981.

   ■ Saramago, José. Baltasar and Blimunda. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1987.

   ■. The Stone Raft. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1991.

   ■. The Year of the Death of Ricardo Reis. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1991.

   ■. The History of the Siege of Lisbon. Giovanni Pontiero, trans. New York: Harcourt Brace, 1996.

   ■. Blindness. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1999.

   ■. Tale of the Unknown Island. New York: Harcourt Brace, 2000.

   ■. All the Names. Margaret Jull Costa, trans. New York: Harcourt, 2000.

   ■. Journey to Portugal. New York: Harcourt Brace, 2001.

   ■ Sena, Jorge de. The Poetry of Jorge de Sena: A Bilingual Selection. Frederick G. Williams et al., trans. Santa Barbara, Calif.: Mudborn Press, 1980.

   ■. By the Rivers of Babylon and Other Stories. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1989.

   ■ Vicente, Gil. Four Plays of Gil Vicente: Edited from the Editio Princeps ( 1562). Aubrey F. G. Bell, ed. and trans. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1920.

   ■. Lyrics of Gil Vicente. Aubrey F. G. Bell, trans. Oxford: Oxford University Press, Hispanic Notes and Monographs, Portuguese Series 1, 1921.

   ■. The Play of Rubena. Jack E. Tomlins, trans.; Rene P. Garay and José I. Suarez, eds. New York: National Hispanic Foundation for Humanities, 1993.

   ■. The Boat Plays. David Johnston, trans. and adaptation. London: Oberon, 1996.

   ■. Three Discovery Plays. Anthony Lappin, trans. Warminster, U.K.: Aris & Phillips, 1997.

   ■ Vieira, António. Dust Thou Art. Rev. W. Anderson, trans. London, 1882.

   ■ Portuguese and Portuguese-American Cooking: Cuisine

   ■ Anderson, Jean. Food of Portugal. New York: Hearst, 1994. Asselin, E. Donald. A Portuguese-American Cookbook. Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1966.

   ■ Bourne, Ursula. Portuguese Cookery. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin, 1973. Crato, Maria Helena Tavares. Cozinha Portuguesa I, II. Lisbon: Editorial Presença, 1978.

   ■ Dienhart, Miriam, and Anne Emerson, ed. Cooking in Portugal. Cascais: American Women of Lisbon, 1978.

   ■ Feibleman, Peter S. The Cooking of Spain and Portugal. New York: Time-Life Books; Foods of the World, 1969.

   ■ Koehler, Margaret H. Recipes from the Portuguese of Provincetown. Riverside, Conn.: Chatham Press, 1973. Manjny, Maite. The Home Book of Portuguese Cookery. London: Faber & Faber, 1974.

   ■ Marques, Susan Lowndes. Good Food from Spain and Portugal. London: Muller, 1956.

   ■ Modesto, Maria de Lourdes. Cozinha Tradicional Portuguesa. Lisbon: Verbo, 1982.

   ■ Ortiz, Elisabeth Lambert. The Food of Spain and Portugal. The Complete Iberian Cuisine. New York: Atheneum, 1989. Pinto, Elvira. La Bonne Cuisine Portugaise. Paris: Edicions Garanciere, 1985.

   ■ Robertson, Carol. Portuguese Cooking: The Authentic and Robust Cuisine of Portugal. Berkeley Calif.: North Atlantic, 1993. Schmaeling, Tony. The Cooking of Spain and Portugal. Ware, U.K.: Omega, 1983.

   ■ Vieira, Édite. The Taste of Portugal. London: Robinson, 1989.

   ■ Von Treskow, Maria. Zü Gast in Portugal: Eine Kulnarische Reise in Garten Europas. Weingarten: Kunstverlag, 1989. Wright, Carol. Portuguese Food. London: Dent, 1969.

   ■. Self-catering in Portugal: Making the Most of Local Food and Drink. London: Croom Helm, 1986.

   ■ Gardens and Gardening of Portugal and Madeira

   ■ Afonso, Simonetta Luz, and Angela Delaforce. Palace of Queluz— The Gardens. Lisbon, 1989.

   ■ Araújo, Iluídio Alves de. Arte Paisagista e Arte das Jardins em Portugal. Lisbon, 1962.

   ■ Azeredo, Francisco de. Casas Senhoriais Portuguesas. Barcelos, 1986.

   ■ Binney, Marcus. Country Manors of Portugal. New York: Scala Books, 1987.

   ■ Bowe, Patrick, and Nicolas Sapieha. Gardens of Portugal. New York: Scala Books and Harper and Row, 1989.

   ■ Cane, Florence du. The Flowers and Gardens of Madeira. London, 1924.

   ■ Cardoso, Pedro Homem, and Helder Carita. Da Grandeza das Jardins em Portugal. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Carita, Helder, and Homem Cardoso. Portuguese Gardens. London: Antique Collector's Club, 1987.

   ■ Costa, António da, and Luís de O. Franquinho. Madeira: Plantas e Floras. Funchal, 1986.

   ■ Nichols, Rose Standish. Spanish and Portuguese Gardens. Boston, 1926.

   ■ Pereira, Arthur D. Sintra and Its Farm Manors. Sintra, 1983.

   ■ Sampaio, Gonçalo. Flora Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1946.

   ■ Sitwell, Sacheverell. Portugal and Madeira. London: Batsford, 1945.

   ■ Underwood, John, and Pat Underwood. Landscapes of Madeira. London, 1980.

   ■ Vieira, Rui. Flowers of Madeira. Funchal, 1973.

   ■ Viterbo, Francisco Marques de Sousa. A Jardinagem em Portugal, 2 vols. Coimbra, 1906-9.

   ■ Education, Science, Health, and Medical History

   ■ Albuquerque, Luís de. Estudos de História, 3 vols. Coimbra, 1973-81.

   ■. Ciência e experiência nos Descobrimentos portugueses. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■. Para a História de Ciência em Portugal. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■. As Navegaçoes E A Sua Projecção Na Ciência E Na Cultura. Lisbon, 1987.

   ■ Baião, Antônio. Episódios Dramáticos da Inquisição Portuguesa, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1936-55.

   ■ Cabreira, Antônio. Portugal nos mares e nas ciências. Lisbon, 1929. Carvalho, Rômulo de. A Astronomia em Portugal (séc. xviii). Lisbon, 1985. Fernandes, Barahona. Egas Moniz: Pioneiro de descobrimentos médicos. Lisbon, 1983.

   ■ Gaitonde, P. D. Portuguese Pioneers in India: Spotlight on Medicine. London: Sangam Books, 1983.

   ■ Hanson, Carl A. "Portuguese Cosmology in the Late Seventeenth Century." In Benjamin F. Taggie and Richard W. Clement, eds., Iberia & the Mediterranean, 75-85. Warrensburg: Central Missouri State University, 1989.

   ■ Higgins, Michael H., and Charles F. S. de Winton. Survey of Education in Portugal. London, 1942.

   ■ Hirsch, Elizabeth Feist. Damião de Góis: The Life and Thought of a Portuguese Humanist. The Hague, 1967.

   ■ Lemos, Maximiano. Arquivos de História da Medicina Portuguesa. Several vols. Lisbon, 1886-1923. Vol. I. História da Medicina em Portugal. Doutrina e Instituições. Lisbon, 1899.

   ■ Mira, Matias Ferreira de. História da Medicina Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1948.

   ■ Orta, Garcia de. Colóquios dos Simples e Drogas e Cousas Medicinais da India. Conde de Ficalho, ed., 2 vols. Lisbon, 1891-95.

   ■ Osório, J. Pereira. História e Desenvolvimento da Ciência em Portugal, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1986-89.

   ■ Pina, Luís de. "Uma prioridade portuguesa do século XVI. João de Barros e a Dactiloscópia Oriental." Arquivo da Repartição de Antropologia Criminal IV (1936).

   ■. "As Ciências na História do Império Colonial Português — Séculos XV a XIX." Anais de Faculdade de Ciências do Porto ( 1939-10).

   ■. "Os Portugueses Mestres de Ciência e Metras no Estrangeiro." Actas do Congresso do Mundo Português. Lisbon, 1940.

   ■. "A Ciência em Portugal (bosquejo Histórico)." In Secretariado Nacional da Informação, ed., Portugal: Breviário Da Pátria Para Os Portugueses Ausentes, 277-301. Lisbon, 1946.

   ■ Richards, Robert A. C., ed. Guide to World Science: Vol. 9: Spain and Portugal, 2nd ed. Guernsey, U.K.: F. H. Books, 1974.

   ■ Saraiva, António José. História da Cultura em Portugal, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1950-62.

   ■ ———. "João de Barros." In Serrao, ed., Dicionário de História de Portugal 1 (1963): 307-8.

   ■ Silvestre Ribeiro, José. História dos Establecimentos Scientíficos, Literários e Artísticos de Portugal nos Successivos Reinados da Monarchia, 3 vols. Lisbon, 1871-83.

   ■ Veiga-Pires, J. A., and Ronald G. Grainger, eds. Pioneers in Angiography: The Portuguese School ofAngiography. Lancaster, U.K.: MTP Press, 1982.

   ■ Walker, Timothy. "Doctors, Folk Medicine and the Inquisition: The Repression of Popular Healing in Portugal during the Enlightenment Era." Ph.D. dissertation, History Department, Boston University, 2001.

   ■ Feminism and Women's Studies

   ■ Barbosa, Madelena. "Women in Portugal." Women's Studies International Quarterly 4 (1981): 477-80.

   ■ Barreno, Maria Isabel, Maria Teresa Horta, and Maria Velho da Costa. Novas Cartas Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1972.

   ■ ———. The Three Marias. New Portuguese Letters. Helen R. Lane, trans. New York: Doubleday, 1975.

   ■ Brettell, Caroline B. We Have Already Cried Many Tears: The Stories of Three Portuguese Migrant Women. Cambridge, Mass.: Schenkman, 1982.

   ■ Ferreira, Virginia. "Engendering Portugal: Social Change, State Politics, and Women's Social Mobilization." In António Costa Pinto, ed., Modern Portugal, 162-88. Palo Alto, Calif.: SPOSS, 1998.

   ■ Goodwin, Mary. "Portuguese Feminism." Portuguese Studies Newsletter 17 (Spring-Summer 1987): 12-13.

   ■ Lamas, Maria. As Mulheres do Meu País. Lisbon, 1948.

   ■ "Mulheres Portuguesas e Feminismo." Análise Social [special number on Portuguese Women and Feminism] 22 (1986): 92-93.

   ■ Osório, Ana de Castro. As Mulheres Portuguesas. Lisbon, 1905.

   ■ Sadlier, Darlene J. The Question of How: Women Writers and New Portuguese Literature. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood; Contributions in Women's Studies, no. 109, 1989.

   ■ Silva, Manuela. The Employment of Women in Portugal. Luxembourg: Office for Official Publications, European Communities, 1984. Velho da Costa, Maria. Maina Mendes. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■ Vicente, Ana, and Maria Reynolds de Souza. Family Planning in Portugal. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Religion and Catholic Church

   ■ Almeida, Fortunato de. História da Igreja em Portugal. 6 vols. Coimbra, 1910-24, and Oporto, 1967-72. Alonso, Joaquim Maria. The Secret of Fátima: Fact and Legend. Cambridge, Mass.: Ravengate Press, 1979. Alves, José da Felicidade, ed. Católicos e política de Humberto Delgado à Marcelo Caetano. Lisbon, 1969. Araújo, Miguel de, ed. Dicionario político; 1; Os Bispos e a revoluçao de Abril. Lisbon, 1976. Bishko, Charles Julian. Spanish and Portuguese Monastic History 600-1300. London, Variorum Reprints, 1984.

   ■ Blanshard, Paul. Freedom and Catholic Power in Spain and Portugal. Boston: Beacon Press, 1962.

   ■ Boxer, C. R. The Church Militant and Iberian Expansion 1440-1770. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1978. Bruneau, Thomas C. "Church and State in Portugal: Crises of Cross and Sword." Journal of Church and State XVIII (1976): 463-90. Freire, José Geraldes. Resistência Católico ao Salazarismo-Marcelismo. Oporto, 1976.

   ■ Herculano, Alexandre. History of the Origin and Establishment of the Inquisition in Portugal. John C. Banner, trans. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1962.

   ■ IPOPE. Estudo sobre liberdade e religião em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973. Johnston, Francis. Fátima: The Great Sign. Chulmleigh, U.K.: Augustine Publications, 1980.

   ■ Kondor, Fr. Louis. Fátima in Lucia's Own Words: Sister Lucia's Memoirs. Fatima: Postulation Center, 1976. Lourenço, Joaquim Maria. Situação jurídica da Igreja em Portugal. Coimbra, 1943.

   ■ Mattoso, José. Religião e Cultura na Idade Média Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1982. Miller, Samuel J. Portugal and Rome c. 1748-1830: An Aspect of Catholic Enlightenment. Rome: Universita Gregoriana Editrice, 1978. O'Malley, John W. The First Jesuits. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1993.

   ■ Pattee, Richard. Portugal and the Portuguese World. Milwaukee, Wisc.: Bruce, 1957.

   ■ Prestage, Edgar. Portugal: A Pioneer of Christianity. Lisbon, 1945.

   ■ Richard, Robert. Etudes sur l'histoire morale et religieuse de Portugal. Paris: Centro Cultural de Gulbenkian, 1970.

   ■ Robinson, Richard A. H. "The Religious Question and Catholic Revival in Portugal, 1900-1930." Journal of Contemporary History XII (1977): 345-62.

   ■. Contemporary Portugal: A History. London: Allen & Unwin, 1979.

   ■ Rodrigues, R. P. Francisco. História da Companhia de Jesus na Assistência de Portugal, 7 vols. Lisbon, 1931-50.

   ■ Roth, Cecil. A History of the Marranos. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society of America, 1932.

   ■ Agriculture, Viticulture, and Fishing

   ■ Abreu-Ferreira, Darlene. "The Portuguese in Newfoundland: Documentary Evidence Examined." Portuguese Studies Review 4, 1 (1995-96): 11-33.

   ■ Allen, H. Warner. The Wines of Portugal. London: Michael Joseph, 1963.

   ■ Barros, Afonso de. A reforma agrária em Portugal. Oeiras, 1979.

   ■ Beamish, Huldine V. The Hills of Alentejo. London: Geoffrey Bles, 1958.

   ■ Bennett, Norman R. "The Golden Age of the Port Wine System, 1781-1807." The International History Review XII (1990): 221-18.

   ■ Black, Richard. "The Myth of Subsistence: Market Production in the Small Farm Sector of Northern Portugal." Iberian Studies 1, 8 (1989): 25-41.

   ■ Bravo, Pedro, and Duarte de Oliveira. Viticulture Moderna. Lisbon, 1974.

   ■. Vinhas e Vinhos De Portugal. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Cabral, Manuel V. "Agrarian Structures and Recent Movements in Portugal." Journal of Peasant Studies 4, 5 (July 1978): 411-45.

   ■ Cardoso, José Carvalho. A Agricultura Portuguesa. Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Carvalho, Bento de. Guía Dos Vinhos Portugueses. Lisbon, 1982.

   ■ Clarke, Robert. Open Boat Whaling in the Azores: The History and Present Methods of a Relic Industry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1954.

   ■ Cockburn, Ernest. Port Wine and Oporto. London: Wine & Spirit, 1949. Cole, S. C. "Cod, Cod Country and Family: The Portuguese Newfoundland Fishery." Mast 3, 1 (1990): 1-29.

   ■ Coull, James. The Fisheries of Europe. London: G. Bell & Sons, 1972.

   ■ Croft-Cooke, Rupert. Port. London: Putnam, 1957.

   ■. Madeira. London: Putnam, 1961.

   ■ Delaforce, John. The Factory House at Oporto. London: Christie's Wine Publications, 1979 and later eds.

   ■ Doel, Patricia A. Port O'Call: Memories of the Portuguese White Fleet in St. John's Newfoundland. St. John's, Newfoundland: ISER, 1992.

   ■ Fletcher, Wyndham. Port: An Introduction to Its History and Delights. London: Bernet, 1978.

   ■ Francis, A. D. The Wine Trade. London: Adam and Charles Black, 1972.

   ■ Freitas, Eduardo, João Ferreira de Almeida, and Manuel Villaverde Cabral. Modalidades de penetração do capitalismo na agricultura: estruturas agrárias em Portugal Continental, 1950-1970. Lisbon, 1976.

   ■ Gonçalves, Francisco Esteves. Portugal: A Wine Country. Lisbon, 1984.

   ■ Gulbenkian Foundation. Agrarian Reform. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Kurlansky, Mark. Cod: A Biography of the Fish That Changed the World. New York: Walker, 1997.

   ■ Malefakis, Edward. "Two Iberian Land Reforms Compared: Spain, 1931-1936 and Portugal, 1974—1978." In Gulbenkian Foundation, Agrarian Reform. Lisbon, 1981.

   ■ Moreira da Fonseca, A. Port Wine: Notes on Its History, Production and Technology. Oporto, 1981.

   ■ Moutinho, M. História da pesca do bacalhau. Lisbon: Imprensa Universitária, 1985.

   ■ Oliveira Marques, A. H. de. lntrodução a história da agricultura em Portugal.

   ■ Lisbon, 1968. Pato, Octávio. O Vinho. Lisbon, 1971.

   ■ Pearson, Scott R. Portuguese Agriculture in Transition. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1987.

   ■ Postgate, Raymond. Portuguese Wine. London: Dent, 1969.

   ■ Read, Jan. The Wines of Portugal. London: Faber & Faber, 1982.

   ■ Robertson, George. Port. London: Faber & Faber, 1982 ed.

   ■ Rutledge, Ian. "Land Reform and the Portuguese Revolution." Journal of Peasant Studies 5, 1 (Oct. 1977): 79-97.

   ■ Sanceau, Elaine. The British Factory at Oporto. Oporto, 1970.

   ■ Simon, Andre L. Port. London: Constable, 1934.

   ■ Simões, J. Os grandes trabalhadores do Mar: Reportagens na Terra Nova e na Groenlândia. Lisbon: Gazeta dos Caminho de Ferro, 1942.

   ■ Smith, Diana. Portugal and the Challenge of 1992: Special Report. New York: Camões Center/RIIC, Columbia University, 1990.

   ■ Stanislawski, Dan. Landscapes of Bacchus: The Vine in Portugal. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1970.

   ■ Teixeira, Carlos, and Victor M. Pereira da Rosa, eds. The Portuguese in Canada: From the Seat to the City. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 2000.

   ■ Unwin, Tim. "Farmers' Perceptions of Agrarian Change in Northwest Portugal." Journal of Rural Studies 1, 4 (1985): 339-57.

   ■ Valadão do Valle, E. Bacalhau: tradições históricas e económicos. Lisbon, 1991.

   ■ Venables, Bernard. Baleia! The Whalers of Azores. London: Bodley Head, 1968.

   ■ Villiers, Alan. The Quest of the Schooner Argus: A Voyage to the Banks and Greenland. New York: Scribners, 1951. World Bank. Portugal: Agricultural Survey. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978.

   ■ ECONOMY, INDUSTRY, AND DEVELOPMENT

   ■ Aiyer, Srivain, and Shahid A. Chandry. Portugal and the E.E.C.: Employment and Implications. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Baklanoff, Eric N. The Economic Transformation of Spain and Portugal. New York: Praeger, 1978.

   ■. "Changing Systems: The Portuguese Revolution and the Public Enterprise Sector." ACES ( Association of Comparative Economic Studies) Bulletin 26 (Summer-Fall 1984): 63-76.

   ■. "Portugal's Political Economy: Old and New." In K. Maxwell and M. Haltzel, eds., Portugal: Ancient Country, Young Democracy, 37-59. Washington, D.C.: Wilson Center Press, 1990.

   ■ Barbosa, Manuel P. Growth, Migration and the Balance of Payments in a Small, Open Economy. New York: Garland, 1984.

   ■ Braga de Macedo, Jorge, and Simon Serfaty, eds. Portugal since the Revolution: Economic and Political Perspectives. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1981.

   ■ Carvalho, Camilo, et al. Sabotagem Econômica: " Dossier" Banco Espírito Santo e Comercial de Lisboa. Lisbon, 1975.

   ■ Corkill, David. The Development of the Portuguese Economy: A Case of Euro-peanization. London: Routledge, 1999.

   ■ Cravinho, João. "The Portuguese Economy: Constraints and Opportunities." In K. Maxwell, ed., Portugal in the 1980s, 111-65. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1986.

   ■ Dornsbusch, Rudiger, Richard S. Eckhaus, and Lane Taylor. "Analysis and Projection of Macroeconomic Conditions in Portugal." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 299-330. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979.

   ■ The Economist (London). "On the Edge of Europe: A Survey of Portugal." (June 30, 1981): 3-27.

   ■. "Coming Home: A Survey of Portugal." (May 28, 1988).

   ■. 'The New Iberia: Not Quite Kissing Cousins" [Spain and Portugal]. (May 5, 1990): 21-24.

   ■ Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian and German Marshall Fund of the U.S., eds. II Conferência Internacional sobre e Economia Portuguesa, 2 vols. Lisbon, 1979.

   ■ Hudson, Mark. Portugal to 1993: Investing in a European Future. London: The Economist Intelligence Unit/Special Report No. 11 57/EIU Economic Prospects Series, 1989.

   ■ International Labour Office (ILO). Employment and Basic Needs in Portugal. Geneva: ILO, 1979.

   ■ Kavalsky, Basil, and Surendra Agarwal. Portugal: Current and Prospective Economic Trends. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978.

   ■ Krugman, Paul, and Jorge Braga de Macedo. "The Economic Consequences of the April 25th Revolution." Economia III (1979): 455-83.

   ■ Lewis, John R., and Alan M. Williams. "The Sines Project: Portugal's Growth Centre or White Elephant?" Town Planning Review 56, 3 (1985): 339-66.

   ■ Makler, Harry M. "The Consequences of the Survival and Revival of the Industrial Bourgeoisie." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 251-83. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■ Marques, A. La Politique Economique Portugaise dans la Période de la Dictature ( 1926-1974). Doctoral thesis, 3rd cycle, University of Grenoble, France, 1980.

   ■ Martins, B. Sociedades e grupos em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Mata, Eugenia, and Nuno Valério. História Econômica De Portugal: Uma Perspectiva Global. Lisbon: Edit. Presença, 1994. Murteira, Mário. "The Present Economic Situation: Its Origins and Prospects." In L. S. Graham and H. M. Makler, eds., Contemporary Portugal, 331-42. Austin: University of Texas Press, 1979. OCED. Economic Survey: Portugal: 1988. Paris: OCED, 1988 [see also this series since 1978].

   ■ Pasquier, Albert. L'Economie du Portugal: Données et Problémes de Son Expansion. Paris: Librarie Generale de Droit, 1961. Pereira da Moura, Francisco. Para onde vai e economia portuguesa? Lisbon, 1973.

   ■ Pintado, V. Xavier. Structure and Growth of the Portuguese Economy. Geneva: EFTA, 1964.

   ■ Pitta e Cunha, Paulo. "Portugal and the European Economic Community." In L. S. Graham and D. L. Wheeler, eds., In Search of Modern Portugal, 321-38. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1983.

   ■. "The Portuguese Economic System and Accession to the European Community." In E. Sousa Ferreira and W. C. Opello, Jr., eds., Conflict and Change in Portugal, 1974-1984, 281-300. Lisbon, 1985. Porto, Manuel. "Portugal: Twenty Years of Change." In Alan Williams, ed., Southern Europe Transformed, 84-112. London: Harper & Row, 1984. Quarterly Economic Review. London: The Economist Intelligence Unit, 1974-present.

   ■ Salgado de Matos, Luís. Investimentos Estrangeiros em Portugal. Lisbon, 1973 and later eds.

   ■ Schmitt, Hans O. Economic Stabilisation and Growth in Portugal. Washington, D.C.: International Monetary Fund, 1981.

   ■ Smith, Diana. Portugal and the Challenge of 1992. New York: Camões Center, RIIC, Columbia University, 1989.

   ■ Tillotson, John. The Portuguese Bank Note Case [ 1920s]: Legal, Economic and Financial Approaches to the Measure of Damages in Contract. Manchester, U.K.: Faculty of Law, University of Manchester, 1992.

   ■ Tovias, Alfred. Foreign Economic Relations of the Economic Community: The Impact of Spain and Portugal. Boulder, Colo.: Rienner, 1990.

   ■ Valério, Nuno. A moeda em Portugal, 1913-1947. Lisbon: Sá da Costa, 1984.

   ■. As Finanças Públicas Portuguesas Entre As Duas Guerras Mundiais. Lisbon: Cosmos, 1994.

   ■ World Bank. Portugal: Current and Prospective Economic Trends. Washington, D.C.: World Bank, 1978 and to the present.

   ■ PHOTOGRAPHY ON PORTUGAL

   ■ Alves, Afonso Manuel, Antônio Sacchetti, and Moura Machado. Lisboa. Lisbon, 1991.

   ■ Antunes, José. Lisboa do nosso olhar; A look on Lisbon. Lisbon: Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, 1991. Beaton, Cecil. Near East. London: Batsford, 1943.

   ■. Lisboa 1942: Cecil Beaton, Lisbon 1942. Lisbon: British Historical Society of Portugal/Fundação Calouste Gulbenkian, 1995.

   ■ Bottineau, Yves. Portugal. London: Thames & Hudson, 1957.

   ■ Câmara Municipal de Lisboa. 7 Olhares ( Seven Viewpoints). Lisbon: Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, 1998.

   ■ Capital, A. Lisboa: Imagens d'A Capital. Lisbon: Edit. Notícias, 1984.

   ■ Dias, Marina Tavares. Photographias de Lisboa, 1900 ( Photographs of Lisbon, 1900). Lisbon: Quimera, 1991.

   ■. Os melhores postais antigos de Lisboa ( The best old postcards of Lisbon). Lisbon: Químera, 1995.

   ■ Finlayson, Graham, and Frank Tuohy. Portugal. London: Thames & Hudson, 1970.

   ■ Glassner, Helga. Portugal. Berlin-Zurich: Atlantis-Verlag, 1942. Hopkinson, Amanda, ed. Reflections by Ten Portuguese photographers. Bark-way, U.K.: Frontline/Portugal 600, 1996.

   ■ Lima, Luís Leiria, and Isabel Salema. Lisboa de Pedra e Bronze. Lisbon, 1990.

   ■ Martins, Miguel Gomes. Lisboa ribeirinha ( Riverside Lisbon). Lisbon: Arquivo Municipal, Câmara Municipal de Lisboa, Livros Horizonte, 1994. Vieira, Alice. Esta Lisboa ( This Lisbon). Lisbon: Caminho, 1994. Wohl, Hellmut, and Alice Wohl. Portugal. London: Frederick Muller, 1983.

   ■ EQUESTRIANISM

   ■ Andrade, Manoel Carlos de, Luz da Liberal e Nobre Arte da Cavallaria. Lisbon, 1790.

   ■ Graciosa, Filipe. Escola Portuguesa de Arte Equestre. Lisbon, 2004.

   ■ Horsetalk Magazine. Published in New Zealand.

   ■ Oliveira, Nuno. Reflections on the Equestrian Art. London, 2000.

   ■ Russell, Eleanor, ed. The Truth in the Teaching of Nuno Oliveira. Stanhope,

   ■ Queensland, Australia, 2003. Vilaca, Luis V., and Pedro Yglesias d'Oliveira, eds. LUSITANO. Coudelarias De Portugal. O Cavalo ancestral do Sudoeste da Europa. Lisbon: ICONOM, 2005.

   ■ Websites of interest: www.equestrian.pt portugalweb.com

Historical dictionary of Portugal > CULTURE, LITERATURE, AND LANGUAGE
29 ἕτερος

ἕτερος, α, ον, only [dialect] Att.-[dialect] Ion. with [pref] ἕ-, [dialect] Dor. [full] ἅτερος [pron. full] [ᾰ] IG4.914.9 (Epid.), etc. (and [dialect] Att.in crasis, v.infr.), [dialect] Aeol. [full] ἄτερος Alc.41.5, etc.:— but [full] ἅτερος [pron. full] [ᾱ], [dialect] Att. crasis for ὁ ἅτερος, Com.Adesp.14.23 D., al., [dialect] Ion. [full] οὕτερος (fr. ὁ ἕτ-) Hdt.1.34, etc., [dialect] Dor. [full] ὥτερος Theoc.7.36; neut.

A θάτερον A.Ag. 344
, And.2.7, etc., [dialect] Ion. τοὔτερον Hdt.1.32
: pl. ἅτεροι, for οἱ ἅτεροι, Arist.Pol. 1255a20; θάτερα S.El. 345
, Th.1.87, etc.; gen. θατέρου S.Ph. 597
, etc., [dialect] Ion. τοὐτέρου Semon.7.113
, [dialect] Dor. θατέρω Ti.Locr.94a
, θωτέρω Epich.71
(dub. l.); dat. θατέρῳ A.Pr. 778
; fem. nom. ἡτέρα IG22.1498.76
, 1615.14,87 (iv B.C.), S.OC 497, Ar.Lys.85, 90 codd., Paus.Gr.Fr.82; dat. θητέρᾳ S.OT 782
, Tr. 272, E.Hipp. 894, Ar.Av. 1365, etc., cf. Paus.Gr. l.c. (in Mss. sts. θατέρᾳ), [dialect] Ion. τἠτέρῃ Phoen.5.2
.—Later masc. and fem. θάτερος, θατέρα, even with the Art., Men.846, Chrysipp. ap. Paus.Gr.Fr.82, Lyc.590, Polem. Cyn.4, Luc.D Mort.26.1 (condemned in Pseudol.29), Gp.14.20.2, etc.; τῶν θατέρων Iamb. in Nic. p.83
P.; θάτερον acc. sg. masc., E. Ion [849].

I one or the other of two, usu. c. Art. exc. in Poets ; freq. of natural pairs, σκαιῇ (sc. χειρὶ) ἔγχος ἔχων, ἑτέρηφι δὲ λάζετο πέτρον Il.16.734
; τῇ ἑτέρῃ μὲν.. τῇ δ' ἑτέρῃ .. 14.272, cf. X.Cyn.10.11; χειρὶ ἑτέρῃ with one hand, Il.12.452, Od.10.171 (but χεὶρ ἑτέρη commonly of the left hand, v. infr. IV.I); ἑτέροιο διὰ κροτάφοιο Il.4.502
; χωλὸς δ' ἕτερον πόδα 2.217
, cf. Ar.Ec. 162, Din.1.82; ἀμφότεραι αἱ γνάθοι, ἢ ἡ ἑτέρα X.Eq.1.9
; ἐκκοπεὶς τὸν ἕ. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν D.H.5.23
; εἰς γόνυ θάτερον Philostr.Im.2.20
; of pairs in general, Il.5.258, etc.; τὴν ἑ. πύλην one of the two gates, Hdt.3.156; ὁ ἕ. τῶν στρατηγῶν Th.4.43
; τὸ ἕ. τοῖν δυοῖν τειχοῖν Id.7.24
: freq. of alternatives presented, τῶνδε τὰ ἕ. ποιέειν Hdt.4.126
; ἑλοῦ γε θάτερ', ἢ.. ἢ .. S.El. 345; τοῖνδ' ἑλοῦ δυοῖν πότμοιν τὸν ἕ. E.Ph. 952 ; δυοῖν ἀγαθοῖν τοῦ ἑτέρου τεύξεσθαι Th.4.28
; δυοῖν θάτερα, ἢ.. ἢ .. Pl. Tht. 187c; ὅταν δυοῖν καλοῖν θάτερον κάλλιον ᾖ, ἢ τῷ ἑτέρῳ τούτοιν ἢ ἀμφοτέροις ὑπερβάλλον κάλλιόν ἐστιν Id.Grg. 475a
: in pl., one of two parties or sets, Od.11.258; τῶν ἕτεροί γε παῖδα κλαύσονται one set of parents, either mine or thine, Il.20.210; δώῃ δ' ἑτέροισί γε νίκην 7.292
; ἑτέροισι δὲ κῦδος ἔδωκαν 13.303
: freq. with neg., οὐδ' ἕτεροι 11.71
.

2 in double clauses ἕτερος (in Prose always ὁ ἕτερος) is generally repeated; ἑ. μὲν δουρὶ.., τῷ δ' ἑ. 21.164; τὸν ἕ., ἕ. δὲ .. Od. 5.266; ἕ. λευκόν, ἑτέρην δὲ μέλαιναν Il.3.103
, etc.: but sts. omitted in one clause, [ἕτερος μὲν] κακῶν, ἕ. δὲ ἐάων 24.528
, cf. 7.420, IG22.1388.46 (prob.), etc.; ἡ μὲν.., ἡ δ' ἑτέρη Il.22.149
, IG12.76.50; ἕ..., ὁ δὲ .. Od.8.374; answered by ἄλλος, ἕτερον μὲν κεύθῃ ἐνὶ φρεσίν, ἄλλο δὲ εἴπῃ Il.9.313
, cf. Od.7.123; reversely ἄλλῳ ὀρχηστύν, ἑτέρῳ κίθαριν [ἔδωκε] Il.13.731, cf. Pl.R. 439b, Tht. 184e; τότε μὲν ἕτερα.., τότε δὲ ἄλλα .. Pl.Alc.1.116e; ὁ ἕτερος.., ὁ λοιπός .. X.An.4.1.23 ; ἕτερα.., τὰ δὲ .. S.OC 1454 (lyr.); later μίαν μὲν.. ἑτέραν δέ A.D. Synt.172.5
; τὴν μίαν.. τὴν δ' ἑτέρην AP9.680
.

3 repeated in the same clause, ἐξ ἑτέρων ἕτερ' ἐστίν one building follows on another, Od.17.266; <ἀ> δ' ἀτέρα τὰν ἀτέραν κύλιξ ὠθήτω let one cup push on the other, Alc.41.5; ἢ θάτερον δεῖ δυστυχεῖν ἢ θάτερον one party or the other, E. Ion [849]; ἕτεροι ἑτέρων ἠξίωσαν ἄρχειν Th.2.64
; ἕτερος ἀφ' ἑτέρου θεραπείας ἀναπιμπλάμενοι ἔθνῃσκον ib.51; εἴ τίς τι ἕτερος ἑτέρου προφέρει Id.7.64
; ξυμμειγνυμένων ἑτέρων ἑτέροις Ar.Av. 701
; συμφορὰ ἑτέρα ἑτέρους πιέζει one calamity oppresses one, another others, E.Alc. 893 (lyr.); ἑτέρᾳ δ' ἕτερος ἕτερον ὄλβῳ καὶ δυνάμει παρῆλθεν Id.Ba. 905
, cf.S.OC 231 (anap.); ἄλλη δ' εἰς ἑτέρην ὀλυφύρετο A.R.1.250
.

4 = δεύτερος, second, ἡ μὲν.., ἡ δ' ἑτέρη.., ἡ δὲ τρίτη .. Od.10.352 sq., cf. Il.16.179, al., X.Cyr.2.3.22; ἡ ἑ. πρότασις the minor premiss, Arist. EN 1143b3: without Art., ἕ. τέρας Hdt.7.57
; προσαγορεύεις αὐτὰ ἑτέρῳ ὀνόματι you call them further by a new name, Pl.Phlb. 13a; cf. IV. 1b.

b with Pronouns of quantity, ordinals, etc., τόσσοι δ' αὖθ' ἕτεροι ποταμοί as many more, Hes.Th. 367; ἕτερον τοσοῦτον as much again, Hdt.2.149; ἑτέρου τοσούτου χρόνου for as long again, Isoc. 4.153; ἕ. τοιαῦτα other things of like kind, Hdt.1.120, 191; ἑτέρων τοιῶνδε (sc. ἀνθρώπων) ἄρχεις ib. 207; τῷ αὐτῷ τρόπῳ.. τῷ ἑτέρῳ in the same way over again, Id.2.127; ἄλλα τε τοιαῦθ' ἕτερα μυρία Ar.Fr.333.4
; χιλίας ἑτέρας [δραχμάς] D.58.6; δεύτερον, τρίτον ἕ. δικαστήριον, Id.23.71,74; ἕ. ἐγώ, of a friend, Pythag. ap. Iamb.in Nic. p.35 P.; ἕτεροι αὐτοί second selves, Arist.EN 1161b28; εὕρηκε τὸν ἕ., τὸν σέ Men.474
.

II without Art., another, of many, with a sense of difference, Il.4.306, Od.7.123, Ar.Ach. 422, Lys.66, etc.; ἕ.αὖ τις Id.Eq. 949
; ἕ. αὖ Id. Pax 295
, etc.; ἕτερα ἄττα Pl.Tht. 188b
; repeated ἑτέραν χἀτέραν τρικυμίαν Men.536.8
: with neg., οἷα οὐχ ἕτερα [ἐγένετο] such as none like them had happened, Th.1.23; ναυμαχία.. οἵα οὐχ ἑτέρα τῶν προτέρων Id.7.70
; οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων μᾶλλον ἑτέρας ib. 29 (s.v.l.); οὐχ ἕτερον ἀλλά .. none other than, Plu.2.671b, cf. UPZ 71.9 (ii B.C.).

b οἱ ἕ. the rest, Hdt.4.169.

c ὁ ἑ. ' one's neighbour', ἀγαπᾶν τὸν ἕ. Ep.Rom.13.6, cf. Ep.Gal.6.4.

III of another kind, different, ἕ. δέ με θυμὸς ἔρυκεν Od.9.302
; τὸ μὲν ἕ., τὸ δὲ ἕ., i.e. they are different, Pl.Men. 97d, cf. R. 346a; ἕ. τε καὶ ἀνόμοιον Id.Smp. 186b
; τὸ δὲ ταὐτὸν ἕ. ἀποφαίνειν καὶ τὸ θάτερον ταὐτόν Id.Sph. 259d
; ἕ. ἤδη ἦν καὶ οὐχ ὁ αὐτός D.34.12
; ἑτέραν ἔδωκεν παντὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ὄψιν OGI458.7
(i B. C.); ἕ. εὐαγγέλιον Ep.Gal.1.6
: coupled with ἄλλος, χἀτέρους ἄλλους πόνους and other different toils, E.Supp. 573 (s.v.l.), cf. Or. 345 (dub.l.); Ῥόδον καὶ ἄλλας ἑτέρας πόλεις D.15.27
; ἕτερον τό τ' ἀλγεῖν καὶ θεωρεῖν ἐστ' ἴσως Philem.75.7
; ἕτερα φρονῶν καὶ δημηγορῶν Din.1.17
: c.gen., other than, different from, φίλους.. ἑτέρους τῶν νῦν ὄντων Th.1.28
, cf. Pl.Prt. 333a, D.10.44, etc.; ἕτερον, ἕτερα ἢ .., E.Or. 345, X.Cyr.1.6.2; παρὰ ταῦτα πάντα ἕτερόν τι Pl.Phd. 74a
; ἕτερα πολιτείας εἴδη παρὰ μοναρχίαν Arist.Pol. 1294a25
, cf. 1286b21.

2 other than should be, euphem. for κακός, παθεῖν μὲν εὖ, παθεῖν δὲ θάτερα S.Ph. 503
; ἀγάθ' ἢ θάτερα, ἵνα μηδὲν εἴπω φλαῦρον D. 22.12
: abs., δαίμων ἕ. Pi.P.3.34; λέκτρα, συμφοραί, E.Med. 639 (lyr.), HF 1238; ἐὰν τὰ ἕ. ψηφίσωνται οἱ δικασταί D.48.30
; πλέον θάτερον ἐποίησαν did more harm (than good), Isoc.19.25, cf. Pl.Phd. 114e, Euthd. 280e, Aristid.2.117 J.

IV Special Phrases:

1 elliptical, mostly in dat. fem.,

a τῇ ἑτέρᾳ (sc. χειρί), [dialect] Ep. ἑτέρῃ or ἑτέρηφι, with one hand (v. sub init.); with the left hand, Od.3.441, Il.22.80, Theoc.24.45: hence prov., οὐ τῇ ἑτέρᾳ ληπτός not to be caught with one hand, Pl.Sph. 226a; ἐκ δ' ἑτέρης A.R.1.1115
, AP 9.650 (Leont.).

b θατέρᾳ (sc. ἡμέρᾳ) on the morrow, S.OT 782, E.Rh. 449; τῆς ἑτέρας Pl.Cri. 44a
; but τῇ ἑτέρᾳ on the following (i.e. the third) day, X.Cyr.4.6.10.

c (sc. ὁδῷ) in another or a different way, καὶ τῇδε φῦναι χἀτέρᾳ S.OC 1444
; another way, τρέπεσθαι Ar.Nu. 812
; ἑτέρᾳ πῃ Id.Eq.35
; τότ' ἄλλοσ'.., θατέρᾳ δὲ .. S.Tr. 272; θατέρᾳ.., θατέρᾳ .. in one way.., in the other.., Henioch.5.16 ; ἑτέρηφι Hes.Op. 216
: acc. ἑτέραν ἐκτρέπεσθαι Luc.Tim.5
.

2 adverb. with Preps.:

a ἐπὶ θάτερα to the one or the other side, one or the other way, ἐπὶ μὲν θάτερα.., ἐπὶ θ. δὲ .. Hp.Art.7; τότε μὲν ἐπὶ θάτερα, τότε δ' ἐπὶ θ. Pl.Sph. 259c: also with another Prep., ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ θάτερα to or on the other side, Th.1.87; ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ θάτερα from the other side, Id.7.37; ἐκ μὲν τοῦ ἐπὶ θ., ἐκ δὲ τοῦ ἐπὶ θ. Pl.Prt. 314e: c. gen., ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ θ. τοῦ ποταμοῦ Th.7.84
; εἰς τἀπὶ θ. τῆς πόλεως X.HG6.2.7
; τὸ ἐπὶ θάτερον τῆς ῥινός Hp.Art.35
.

b κατὰ θάτερα on the one or other side, κατὰ θ. ἀστός D.57.30
; ψόφου κατὰ θ. προσπεσόντος Plu.Brut.51
, etc.; but καθ' ἕτερα at other points, Th.7.42.

V Adv. [full] ἑτέρως in one or the other way, opp. ἀμφοτέρως, Pl.Tht. 181e; ἑ. τε καὶ ἑ., = ἀμφοτέρως, Id.Phdr. 235a; τοῦ σκέλους ἑ. ἔχειν, = ἑτεροσκελὴς εἶναι, Philostr.VA3.39.

2 differently, rarely in Poetry, οὐχ ἑ. τις ἐρεῖ Theoc.Ep.10.3
; ἑ. ἔχειν to be different, Ar.Pl. 371: freq. in Prose, ὡς ἑ. in the other way (cf. ὡς) , ἢν ἡ ἑτέρη γνάθος ἐκστῇ ὡς ἑ. χρὴ τὴν ἐπίδεσιν ἄγειν Hp.Art.34
, cf. Pl.Sph. 266a, etc.; ἐάν τε καλῶς, ἐάν θ' ὡς ἑ. D.18.85, cf. 212: c. gen., differently from, ἑ. πως τῶν εἰωθότων Pl.Plt. 295d
; ἑ. ἤπερ .. Ael.NA12.28.

3 otherwise than should be, badly, wrongly, once in Hom., ἑ. ἐβόλοντο Od.1.234
; εἰ καὶ ἑ. τοῦτο ἀπέβη SIG851.10
(Marc.Aur.); εἴ τι ἑ. φρονεῖτε Ep.Phil. 3.15
.

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἕτερος
30 MÁL

purr

* * *

I)

n.

1) speech, faculty of speech (þrøngdi svá sóttarfari konungs, at hann misti málsins);

þau hafa ekki mál, they are dumb;

2) language, tongue;

norrønt mál, the Norse tongue;

3) speech, speaking (hvárt er Flosi svá nær, at hann megi heyra mál mitt);

4) colloquy, talk, speech;

koma á mál (or at máli) við e-n, to come to talk with, speak to;

finna (hitta) e-n at máli, to obtain speech with;

krefja e-n máls, to ask an interview with;

leita mills við e-n (spyrja e-n máls, mæla mál of e-m), to broach a subject to one;

bera mál á e-t, hafa e-t á (or at) máli, to speak (talk) of (allir menn höfðu á máli, hversu fríðr maðr hann var);

lúka sínu máli, to end one’s speech;

þat er mál manna, at, people say that;

5) tale, story;

nú er þar til máls at taka, now it must be told;

6) saw, saying;

fornt (fornkveðit) mál er, at, it is an old saw that;

7) diction, construction of sentences;

8) sentence;

tvau mál, two sentences;

fullt mál, a full period;

9) suit, action, cause;

hefja mál á hendr e-m, to bring an action against one;

búa mál, to prepare a suit;

sœkja mál, to prosecute;

10) stipulation, agreement (ek vil halda mil við hann þan, sem mælt vóru);

lauss allra mála, free of all stipulations;

11) case, matter, affair (þetta mál var við Jórunni rœtt);

svá er mál með vexti, the matter stands thus;

var þat annat mál, another matter;

miðla mál, to mediate;

tillagagóðr inna stœrri mála, a good counsellor in great matters;

hafa sitt mál, to have one’s own way, have one’s will (honum eirir illa, of hann hefir eigi sitt mál);

hafa mikit til síns máls, to have much in support of one’s case;

e-t skiptir miklu (litlu) máli, it is of great (small) importance;

12) three months (mál ok misseri).

II)

n.

1) measure (fimm álna er hátt mál hans);

leggja, bera mál við e-t, to measure (hann lagði mál við öll in stœrstu tré);

2) time, high time (mál er upp at standa);

sagði, at þá var mið nótt ók at enn væri mál at sofa, and still time to sleep;

3) meal;

í eitt mál, at einu máli, for one single meal;

deila mat at málum, to deal out food at each meal.

III)

n. inlaid ornaments (on the hilts and guards of swords).

* * *

1.

n., old pl. m́l, 673. 47, Greg.; [Ulf. maþl = ἀγορά; Hel. mahal = speech, meeting; Dan. maal; from the old Teut. maþl or mahal was formed the mid. Lat. mallum = parliament, public meeting (Du Cange), and mallum again was in Norman-French rendered by parliament.]

A. Speech, faculty of speech; mál heitir orð …, Edda 110; þau hafa ekki mál, they are dumb, Fms. i. 97, Fs. i. 250; þröngdi svá sóttar-fari konungs at hann misti málsins, x. 148; þeir hafa eigi manns rödd né mál, Rb. 348; þeir hafa gauð fyrir mál, 346; mál, heyrn, sjón, Edda 6.

II. speech as spoken, language, tongue; Norrænt mál, the Norse tongue, Fms. vii. 165; Gírskt mál, Greg. 75; í máli þeirra, til várs máls, in our tongue; í hverju máli, Skálda 161, 168; í vóru máli, 163, 166, 167, 169; í málinu, 165; kynnask várt mál at ráða þat er á Norrænu er ritað, Bs. i. 59; nema mál á Danska tungu, Grág.; rita at Norrænu máli, Hkr. (pref.); þeir skildu eigi hans mál, þá mælti kvinnan á Norrænu, Fs. 136.

2. speech, speaking; hvárt er Flosi svá nær at hann megi heyra mál mitt, Nj. 36, 200; ver eigi nær honum en mál nemi, Fms. iv. 28; en skáldskapr var honum svá tiltækr, at hann mælti af tungu fram sem annat mál, 374; engi var svá vitr at snjallara mál mundi fram bera, vii. 158; snjallr í máli ok talaðr vel. ix. 535; skilr þú nokkut hérmanna mál, Fas. ii. 512; en er hann lauk sínu máli, Ld. 106, 130, Íb. 12; ok fara svá öllu máli um sem hann hafi áðr ekki um mælt, Grág. i. 40; ef hann kveðr svá at ok hafði í máli sínu, ‘heilt ráð ok heimolt,’ en eigi ella, 317; kveðr jarl þings ok mælti þeim málum á þinginu at Hákon jarl skyldi heita vargr í véum, Fms. xi. 40; tína fyrir mér öll þau mál ok athæfi er hafa þarf fyrir konungi, Sks. 301.

3. speaking one to another, colloquy; vera á máli, to deliberate, converse, Vtkv., 1; hann kom opt á mál við konung, Eg. 106; engi þorði at krefja hann máls, 601; Þórdís gékk til máls við Egil frænda sinn, 765; þegar er þeir fundu menn at máli, Fms. i. 204; ef þeir vildu hafa hans mál, 241; síðan hættu þau málinu, Nj. 10; hann leitaði þá máls um við Ásgerði hverju þat gegndi, Eg. 703; ok spyrja hana máls hvar til þessi svör skulu koma, Hkr. i. 77; þat var karl ok kerling, mælti hann mál af þeim ok spurði, Fas. iii. 525; höfðu menn at máli (people noticed, of something extraordinary), at…, Fms. vii. 301; allir menn höfðu á máli, er Ólaf sá, hversu fríðr maðr hann var, Ld. 88; bera mikit mál á, Fms. x. 93; þat var mál manna, people said that; or, þat er mál manna, people say, Nj. 268, Eg. 29, Fms. vii. 150.

4. a tale, narrative; nú er þat til máls at taka (of resuming the narrative after an episode), to take up the story again, Ld. 314, Nj. 16, 29, 135, 148, 196; er fyrr var getið í þessu máli, Fms. xi. 41; þar hef ek upp þat mál, Eg. 735.

5. a saw; þat er fornt mál (‘tis an old saw), at bísna skal at betr verði, Fms. x. 261, Glúm. 344; á líti þeir mál in fornu, look to the old wise sayings, Sighvat (forn-mæli, q. v.)

6. gramm. diction, construction of sentences; mál ok hættir, Edda 49; ef þat mál ( figure of speech) er upp er tekit haldi of alla vísu-lengd, 123; breyta háttum með máli einu, to vary the verses with the sentences, Edda 124 (for specimens see lit. 9–23); tvau mál, two sentences; fullt mál, a full period; hér lýkr máli, lúka heilu máli, a sentence closes; annat ok þriðja vísu-orð er sér um mál, ok er þat stál kallat, of the intercalary sentences in poetry, Edda 125; þeir kölluðu at hann hafði eigi rétt ort at máli, Fms. v. 209; samhljóðendr megu ekki mál eðr atkvæði göra einir við sik, Skálda; hér er mál fullt í hverju vísu-orði, Edda; Skáldskapar-mál, poetical diction, id.; bragar-mál, id., 124.

7. mál is the name of old songs containing old saws or sentences, such as the Háva-mál; as also of poems in a dialogue (mál); all such poems were in a peculiar metre called mála-háttr, which is opposed to the epic kviðu-háttr, thus, Grímnis-mál, Vafþrúðnis-mál, Alvís-mál, Hamðis-mál, Hákonar-mál, Eiríks-mál; in some instances the name has been applied erroneously, e. g. Atla-mál; the Rígs-mál is a name given in modern times, the old name was Rígs-þula.

B. As a law phrase, with the notion of public speaking, action, or the like:

1. a suit, action, cause; hefja mál á hendr e-m, Fms. vii. 130; hafa mál á höndum, Grág. i. 38; sókn skal fyrr fara fram hvers máls en vörn, nema þat sé allt eitt, ok sé þat annars máls sókn er annars er vörn, 59; Njáll nefndi vátta ok sagði únýtt málit, Nj. 36; ekki á Bjarkeyjar-réttr á því máli at standa, Fms. vii. 130; þeir veittu Gizuri hvíta at hverju máli, Nj. 86; báru þeir kvið um mál Otkels, 87; færa mál fram at dómi, Grág, i. 135; sækja mál, to prosecute, Nj. 86, 99; sækja mál lögliga ok réttliga, Fms. vii. 133; Gunnarr sótti málit þar til er hann bauð til varna, Nj. 36; en um tólf mánuðr stendr þeirra mál, the case stands over for twelve months, Grág. i. 143; sækja mál á þingi, Nj. 36; færa vörn fyrir mál, 87; mál kemr í dóm, Glúm. 365; höfða mál, to institute a suit, Grág. i. 142; búa mál, to prepare a suit, of the preliminaries, Glúm. 365, passim; leggja mál undir e-n (as umpire), Nj. 105; hafa sitt mál, to get one’s verdict, win the suit, passim; vera borinn máli, to be cast, convicted, N. G. L. i. 122: to be beaten, get the worst, passim: vígs-mál, legorðs-mál, fé-mál, etc.

2. an indictment, charge;þá eru þeir varðir máli ef þeir fá þann bjargkvið, Grág. i. 54; ok versk hann þá málinu, 317; at upp skyldi vera rannsókn en þau ór málinu ef hann hittisk eigi þar, Ld. 44; ek vil svara því máli, I will answer that charge, Nj. 99; ok bað Sigurð Hranason svara þar málum fyrir sik, Fms. vii. 130; á hann kost at láta varða skóggang eða görtæki, ef hann vill til hins meira máls færa ok skal hann stefna ok láta varða skóggang, Grág. i. 430; hann spurði alla ena beztu menn, hvert mál þeim þætti Gunnarr eiga á þeim nöfnum fyrir fjörráðin, Nj. 105; leynd mál, hidden charges, Grág. i. 362.

3. procedure, order; at alþingis-máli réttu ok allsherjar-lögum, Nj. 87: pleading, enda er svá sem þeir mæli eigi þeim m́lum nema þeir vinni eiða at, Grág. ii. 342.

4. stipulation, agreement; mál meginlig, Vsp.; bregða máli, Grág. i. 148; ok skilja þeir eigi þat mál görr, en svá, 136; nema þau vili annat mál á göra, 336; en ek skal lauss allra mála ef hann kemr eigi svá út, Ísl. ii. 217; skulu þeirra manna mál standask, Grág. i. 296: engagement, ok vitja málanna fyrir hönd okkra beggja, Fms. xi. 104.

5. transactions; en hvert sem at þessum málum var setið lengr eða skemr, Ld. 22.

6. a case; lá ek þá í vöggu er þær skyldu tala um mitt mál, Fas. i. 340; mál hans stendr í miklum háska, Mar.; en þó skaltu svá um þitt mál hugsa, … at þá munt þú skamt eiga úlifat, Nj. 85; at hvárir-tveggju hafi nakkvat síns máls, Jb. 12; þat er mál Sigurðar konungs at mæla til Inga konungs, Fms. vii. 221; festi járnburð, at svá skyldi sanna mál hans, 230; honum eirir ílla ef hann hefir eigi sitt mál, Ísl. ii. 237; þá skal sá þeirra hafa sitt mál er eið vill at vinna, Grág. i. 393; Þórólfr bað Ölvi byrja mál sitt við konung, Eg. 62; at vit fáim rétt af þessu máli, 40; flytja mál sitt, Ld. 180; muntú mér verða at trúa til málanna þinna allra, Fms. xi. 104; allir er eiðsvarar erut við þetta mál, Nj. 192; eiga síðan allt mitt mál undir yðr fóstbræðrum, Fas. ii. 532; þetta mál var við Jórunni rætt, Ld. 22; þykki mér nú vandast málit, Nj. 4; svá er mál með vexti, the case is this, Lv. 43, Fas. iii. 59; var þat annat m., another affair, Nj. 256; ekki eru þau efni í um várt mál, Ld. 76; konungr átti dóm á þeirra máli, id.; ber hann upp fyrir bróður sinn málit, hann berr upp málit ok biðr Unnar, ok undra ek er þú ferr með því máli, Fas. i. 364; Austmaðrinn heldr nú á málinu við bónda Nj. 259; ef þér vilit göra málit at álitum, 3; svara þessu máli, Fms. vii. 124; miðla mál, to mediate, Íb. 12; inna stærri mála, in important cases, Nj. 2.

7. special phrases, e-t skiptir miklu, litlu … máli, to bear much or little upon a case, to be of great (small …) importance, Eg. 742, Ó. H. 31, passim: skiptir þá eigi máli, Grág. i. 43; varða máli, id.; ef honum þætti máli varða at hann næði því, Rd. 260: þú kvaddir þess kviðar er eigi átti máli at skipta um víg Auðúlfs, who had no concern with the slaying of A., Nj. 87.

C. COMPDS, máls- and mála-: máls-afglöpun, f. a false or collusive action, whereby the suit is lost, Grág. i. 494. máls-bót, f. an excuse, exculpation, Fms. vii. 207; esp. in plur., hafa sér e-ð til málsbóta, to use as an excuse. mála-efni, n. pl. a cause, its circumstances and nature, Nj. 47, Háv. 51; íll málaefni, a bad case, Fs. 41. 138, Ó. H. 150, Band. 12. máls-endi, a, m., see málsemd. máls-eyrendi, n. a discourse, Sturl. i. 140. mála-ferli, n. pl. lawsuits, litigation, Fs. 47, Eg. 644, Nj. 78, Sturl. i. 105, Fær. 109. mála-flutningr, m. the conduct of a suit, Hrafn. 17. mála-fylgjumaðr ( mála-fylgismaðr), m. a lawyer; mikill m., a great taker up of suits, Nj. 1, Bs. i. 82. máls-fylling, f. the conclusion of a case, Fb. iii. 451. máls-grein, f. a sentence, Skálda 174, 181, Bs. i. 753 ( a passage in a letter): a phrase, Stj. 79, Edda 49; partr málsgreinar = pars orationis, Skálda 180: diction, style, Edda 120. mála-háttr, m. [mál, háttr], a kind of metre, Edda 142, where a specimen is given. máls-hattr, m. a phrase, Stj. 67, 126: = málsgrein, Skálda 170: a proverb, saying, Fms. ii. 33, Fas. iii. 104, Stj. 133, passim. málshátta-safn, n. a collection of proverbs. mála-hlutr or máls-hlutr or -hluti, a, m. one side of a case or suit eiga enn þyngra málahlut, Ísl. ii. 172; þá ferr ílla m. várr ( our case), Lv. 95: a share, mun sá verða m. várr beztr, Nj. 88; nú kann vera, at ek kunna ekki at sjá málahlut til handa mér, en vilja munda ek halda sæmd minni, Sturl. i. 105. mála-kosta, u, f. a complaint, pleading in a case, Sturl. i. 613, H. E. i. 457. mála-leitan, f. a negotiation, the mooting a question, Eg. 521, Eb. 130, Fms. vii. 299, Orkn. 56. mála-lenging, f. useless prolongation. mála-lok, n. pl. the end of a case, conclusion, Eb. 106, Nj. 102, Bs. i. 68. mála-lyktir, f. pl. = málalok, Eb. 24, 36, Nj. 88, Fms. vii. 14. máls-löstr, m. bad grammar, Skálda 181. mála-maðr, m. = málafylgju-maðr, Dropl. 6, Ld. 298, Boll. 354. mála-mannligt, n. adj. like, worthy of a málamaðr, Bs. i. 751. máls-metandi, part., m. maðr, a person of mark. mála-mynd, f.; til málamyndar, only for appearance, not seriously. máls-orð, n. a word in a sentence, Edda 124, 126, 128. máls-partr, m. a part of speech, Skálda 185: a part in a suit, mod. máls-rödd, f. = málrómr, Stj. 81. mála-skil, n. pl. knowledge of proceeding. Sturl. iii. 10. mála-skot, n. an appeal in a case, K. Á. 218. mála-sóku, f. a lawsuit, prosecution, Nj. 248. máls-spell, n. a flaw in a suit, Nj. 170, Fms. x. 12. mála-sönnun, f. evidence, Mar. mála-tilbúningr or mála-tilbúnaðr, m. the preparation of a suit, Grág. i. 490, Eb. 282, Nj. 36, 100. mála-tilleitan, f. = málaleitan, Þórð. 67. mála-vöxtr, m. the state of a case, Fms. vi. 11, Al. 113, Bs. i. 67, Nj. 79. máls-þörf, f. a wish to speak, Fms. vi. 374.

2.

n. [Ulf. mêl = χρόνος, καιρός; A. S. mâl; Engl. meal; Germ. mahl; Dan. and Swed. maal, mâl = a mark]:—a measure: hann mælti grundvöll undir húss, þat var þeirra átrúnaðr ef málit gengi saman, þá er optarr væri reynt, at þess manns ráð mundi saman ganga, ef mál-vöndrinn þyrri, en þróask ef hann vissi til mikilleiks, gékk nú málit saman ok var þrem sinnum reynt, Korm. 8; fimm álna er hátt mál hans, Fms. vi. 929; ganga undir mál, to undergo a mál (for measuring one’s height); þat sögðu menn at þeir hefði jafnmiklir menn verit, þá er þeir gengu undir mál, Ld. 178; leggja, bera mál við, to measure; hann lagði mál við öll in stærstu tré, 216; með því sama máli sem þér mælit út mun yðr verða aptr mælt, Mar.; bar hón mál á, ok þurfti þá þrjár álnar ok þver hönd, Bs. ii. 168; kunna maga mál, to know the measure of one’s stomach, Hm. 20.

2. a length of sixteen fathoms, D. N. (Fr.)

B. Temp. [Ulf. mêl = χρόνος, καιρός], a ‘meal,’ of time, i. e. a certain portion of time:

I. time, high time; skipverjum þótti mál ór hafi, Landn. 206: with infin., Vsp. 14, Hm. 111, Skm. 10, Bm. 1; mönnum væri mál at lýsa sökum sínum, Nj. 149; at mál væri at ganga at sofa, Fms. ii. 138; mælti biskup at mál væri at sofa, 139; sagði mál at ríða, Orkn. 48: adding a dat., mál er mér at ríða, Hkv. 2. 47: ok er mál at vit farim, Fær. 255; mál er at leita at hestum várum, Korm. 182; ok er allt mál at ættvíg þessi takisk af, Ld. 258; ok er nú mál at hætta, Fms. vi. 212: e-m er mál (of stools):—í mál, in due time; þóat í mál yrði borinn kviðrinn, Grág. i. 54.

2. the moment, nick of time (mál, q. v.); at hann var þar þá nótt, ok á því máli …, of an alibi, N. G. L. i. 309.

II. the meal-time, morning and evening, Edda 103; hence of cattle, missa máls, to miss the time, sheep lost or astray for a day so that they cannot be milked, Grág. ii. 230, 231; kvikfénaðr missir máls, Snót; hence málnyta. q. v.; deila mat at málum, to deal out meat at each meal, Grág. i. 149; í hvert mál, Hm. 36; í eitt mál, for one single ‘meal,’ Karl. 347, Grág. i. 293; fæða þá í tvau mál, ii. 400; í bæði mál (see i B, p. 317): at því máli = Germ. diesmahl, Korm. (in a verse); þat er ok mitt ráð þó þat sé at fyrra máli at menn snæði nokkut, Fb. ii. 676; þat vilda ek at þær æti at einu máli kýr Hálfdanar bróður míns, Ó. H. 64; ef ættak at málungi mat, if I had meat from meal to meal, Hm.

2. of the day marks; dag-mál = day-meal = 9 o’clock A. M.; and nátt-mál, night-time = 9 o’clock P. M.; í fyrra málið, to-morrow morning; eg skal koma í fyrra málið.

III. of the seasons of the year; í misseri eru mál tvau, í máli eru mánuðr þrír, Rb. 6; mál ok misseri, Hm.; sumar-mál, the time when summer sets in (middle of April), opp. to vetr-nætr, when winter sets in; hríð-mál. q. v.

COMPDS: málamatr, málamjólk, málsverðr.

3.

n. [Ulf. mêl = γραφή and γράμμα; Hel. mâl = imago, effigies; cp. also Goth. maljan = γράφειν, whence mod. Germ. mahlerei, mahlen, = pingere]:—prop. ‘a drawing,’ but it is used in old writers only of inlaid ornaments on spear’s heads or on the hilts and guards of swords; görir Þorgrímr þar af spjót, mál vóru í, Gísl. 18; hann hafði króka-spjót í hendi haugtekit ok allgóð mál í, Ld. 78; spjót, þá fann hann blóð í málunum, Glúm. 344; stál bjartra mála, Korm. 1; gull-mál (q. v.), Þiðr. 110; stála-mál, inlaid work of steel, Ht. R. 33. For specimens of ‘mál’ see Worsaae, Nos. 325, 331; a plate with inlaid work on the outside and a Runic inscription on the inside was found in Oct. 1870 in the cairn Greenmount in Ireland, and is described by Major-General Lefroy.

COMPDS: málajárn, málasax, málaspjót, málasteinn.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > MÁL
31 NEMA

except

* * *

I)

conj.

1) except, save, but;

þoriga ek segja nema þér einum, I dare not tell any one save thee alone;

engi … nema, no … but, no (not any) other than (Grani vildi undir øngum manni ganga nema Sigurði);

2) with subj. unless;

engir þóttu lögligir dómar dœmdir, nema hann væri við, unless he had a hand in them;

3) save that;

nema ek hálsaða herjans stilli einu sinni, save that I once fell on the king’s neck;

4) veit ek eigi nema, hverr veit nema, I don’t know, (who knows) but that;

may be, perhaps (hverr veit nema ek verða víða frægr um síðir);

5) því at eins, nema, only in the case, if;

ráðit þér því at eins á þá nema þér séð allir sem øruggastir, do not attack them unless you are all most steadfast and dauntless;

6) nema heldr, but rather (eigi má þat menn kalla, nema heldr hunda);

7) nor, = né, hvárki sverð nema øxi, neither sword nor axe.

II)

(nem; nam, námum; numinn), v.

1) to take, take in use, take possession of (ef þú nemr þér jörð á Íslandi);

nema land, to take possession of land, as a settler (hann nam Eyjafjörð allan);

nema konu, to carry off, abduct a woman;

nema stað or staðar, stop, halt (hér munum vér stað or staðar nema);

nema yndi, to find rest in a place (hvárki nam hann yndi á Íslandi né í Noregi);

2) nema e-n e-u, to bereave one of a thing (nema e-n höfði, aldri, fjörvi);

3) to reach, touch (pilzit var svá sítt, at nam hæl);

hvárt nam þik eða eigi, did it touch thee or not? þótt þik nótt um nemi, though the night overtake thee;

4) to amount to, be equivalent to (honum þótti landauðn nema);

5) as an auxiliary verb, with infin.;

hann nam at vaxa ok vel dafna, he grew apace and throve well;

inn nam at ganga, he stepped in;

6) to percieve, catch, hear, of sound;

varð þá svá mikit úhljóð, at engi nam annars mál, that no one could hear the other’s voice;

eigi skulu vér þat mál svá nema, we shall not understand it so;

7) to learn (nema lög, fjölkyngi);

to learn by heart (vísur þessar námu margir);

nema e-t at (or af) e-m, to learn, get information, about a thing from one (Glúmr hafði numit þenna atburð at þeim manni, er hét Arnór);

8) with preps. and advs.:

nema e-t af, to abolish (var sú heiðni af numin sem önnur);

nema brott konu, to carry off a woman;

nema eptir e-u, to imitate;

nema e-t frá, to except (nema konur eða þeir menn, er hann næmi frá);

nema e-t upp, to pick up (nam ek upp rúnar);

nema við, to resist, make a stand (hann vill enn við nema, þótt liðsmunr væri mikill);

to stop, halt (þar námu þeir Hrafn við í nesinu);

nema við e-u, to touch (gaddhjaltit nam við borðinu);

to be a hindrance to (ef þat nemr við förinni, at þú þykkist hafa fé of lítit);

impers., nemr við e-u, there is an obstacle, or stop (en er þeir kómu at kirkjudurum, þá nam þar við);

9) refl., nemast e-t, to refuse, withhold from doing;

nemast förina, to refuse to go;

nemast orðsendingar hans, to disregard his messages;

also with infin. (hann bað hann eigi nemast með öllu at gøra sem bœndr vildu).

* * *

1.

conj. [compounded of the negative particle ne, and the adverb if or ef (q. v.) in an older dissyllabic form ifa; for the change of f into m see the introduction; cp. Ulf. nibai; A. S. nemne, nimne; O. H. G. nibu, nibi, nubi; Hel. nebu; early Swed. num; cp. Lat. ni-si, see Grimm’s Gramm. iii. 724.]

B. Except, save, but; manngi, nema einn Agnarr, Gm. 2; nema þér einum, Vkv. 24; allra nema einna, 26, Ls. 11; nema við þat lík at lifa, Hm. 96; nema sá einn Áss, Ls. 11; hvar kómu feðr várir þess, … hvar nema alls hvergi? Ísl. ii. 236; öngu nema lífinu, Nj. 7; öllu gózi nema búinu, Fms. ix. 470; engi nema þú einn, Barl. 207; engi nema Bergþórr, Fms. vii. 141; kom viðrinn á kirkju-sand, nema tvau tré kómu á Raufarnes, save that two trees came to R., Landn. 51, v. l.; Ólafr hafði mörg sár ok flest smá, nema tvau vóru nökkvi mest, Fb. i. 501; nema ek hélt, Óg. 23; þeir blandask eyvitar við aðra ísa nema sér einum heldr hann, Sks. 176 B; vætki of sýti’k nema hræðumk helvíti, Hallfred; lét Koðran skíra sik ok hjú hans öll, nema Ormr vildi eigi við trú taka, Bs. i. 5.

II. with subj. unless; aldrei, nema okkr væri báðum borit, Ls 9; nema þú hánum vísir … eða mey nemir, Hkv. 1. 19; nema ek dauðr sjá’k, 20; nema geðs viti, Hm. 19; nema hann mæli til mart, 26; nema haldendr eigi, 28; nema til kynnis komi, 32; nema reisi niðr at nið, 71; nema einir viti, 97; nema ek þik hafa, Hkv. Hjörv. 7; nema sjálfr ali, Stor. 16; nema þeir felldi hann, Edda 36; öngir þóttu lögligir dómar nema hann væri í, Nj. 1; nema maðr verði sjúkr eða sárr, Grág. i. 141; nema lands-fólkit kristnaðisk, Hkr. i. 248; nema mér banni hel, Fb. ii. 59; hann heyrði eigi nema æpt væri at honum, Fms. iv. 204, and in countless instances in old and mod. usage.

2. in phrases such as ‘veit ek eigi nema …,’ like Lat. nescio an, implying an affirmation; þú veizt eigi nema sá verði fégjarn, Sks. 28; nú veit ek eigi nema nökkurr verði virðing af at hafa þessu máli, Band. 34 new Ed.; hverr veit nema ek verða víða frægr um síðir, who can tell but that I shall be a widely known man some day? Fms. vi. (in a verse); nú veit ek eigi nema yðr þykki minna vega mín reiði en Sigurðar konungs, now know I not if, vii. 141; eigi veit ek nema þetta væri ráðligt, en eigi má ek þat vita …, viii. 95:—with indic., kveðkat ek dul nema hún hefir, there is no doubt but that she has, Ýt. 7; hver sé if nema rögn stýra, who can doubt that? Vellekla.

III. irreg. usages; ef nokkurr maðr ferr á jörðu, nema (in the case that, supposing that) sá vili á búa, sem fé á í jörðu, þá rænir sá hann, Gþl. 357: því at eins, nema, only in that case, if ( but not else); ráðit þér því at eins á þá nema pér sét allir sem öruggastir, only in the case if, i. e. do not attack them unless, Nj. 228; því at eins mun hann sættask vilja, nema hann gjaldi ekki, 254; skal hann því at eins í braut hafa þann hval, nema hann láti bera vitni, Jb. 326: þat man því at eins, nema ek nái ráða-hag við Melkorku, Ld. 70; því at eins ferjanda, nema fjörbaugr komi fram, Nj. 240; oss þykkir þú því at eins veita skylda þjónustu konungi, nema þú leggir af tignar-klæðin, Fms. ix. 432.

2. nema heldr, but rather; eigi má þat menn kalla, nema heldr hunda, not men, but rather dogs, Bær. 9; sver ek eigi at eins fyrir mik, nema heldr fyrir allra þeirra sálir, Gþl. 69; hón hafði eigi hreinlífi at eins, nema heldr ok alla gæzku, Hom. 128; nema enn, but on the contrary; at glæpask eigi lengr í félags-skap við Philistim, nema enn skulu þér …, Stj. 412, 428, 442: eigi at eins óttaðisk hann um sjálfs síns líf, nema jamvel um alla aðra sína frændr, but also, Barl. 73: fyrr nema = fyrr enn, fyrr skal dólga dynr, nema ek dauðr sják (= fyrr en ek sé dauðr), Hkv. 1. 20:—hefi ek vist sét þat gull, at öngum mun er verra, nema betra sé, which is not worse, if it is not even better, Fb. i. 348.

2.

pres. nem; pret. nam, namt, nam, pl. námu; subj. næmi; part. numinn, older nominn, N. G. L. i. 200, Hom. 100; with neg., suff. nam-a, Hkv. 2. 15; a pret. numdi in mod. usage, formed from the part. numinn, as if from a verb nymja; örvaðist geð á allan hátt er eg numdi sjónum föður-landið heldr hátt hafít upp úr sjónum, Eggert: [Ulf. niman = λαμβάνειν; A. S. neman; Germ. nehmen; freq. in Early Engl.; in mod. Engl., where it is superseded by the Scandin. taka, it survives in nimble and numb = A. S. be-numen = lcel. numinn.]

A. To take; the use of the word in this, its proper sense, is limited, for taka (q. v.) is the general word, whereas nema remains in special usages; nema upp, to pick up, Hm. 140; nema e-n ór nauðum, Fsm.; þar er gull numit upp í söndum, Rb. 350; at hann nemr hann ór kviðnum, ok kveða á hvert hann nemr hann ór sínu órnámi, eða annars manns, Grág. i. 51; reifa mál þeirra er ór dóminum eru numnir, 79; hann á kost at nema þá upp alla senn, 51:—nema af, to abolish; þessi heiðni var af numin á fára vetra fresti, Nj. 165, Íb. 4:—nema frá, to except; nema konur eða þeir menn er hann næmi frá, 5; á þeim tíðum er uú eru frá numnar, Grág. i. 325:—upp numinn, taken up into heaven; Enoch var upp numinn, Stj. 41.

2. to take by force, seize upon; þá menn er konu hafa numit ( carried off), Grág. i. 354; hann nam sér konu af Grikklandi, Rb. 404; Jupiter þá er hann nam Europam, 732. 17; Björn nam Þóru á brott, Eg. 155; ek nam konu þessa er hér er hjá mér, Nj. 131; hann segir hann hafa numit sik í burt af Grænlandi undan Sólar-fjöllum, Bárð. 32 new Ed.: nema nes-nám, Danir ok Svíar herjuðu mjök í Vestr-víking ok kómu þá opt í Eyjarnar er þeir fóru vestr eða vestan, ok námu þar nesnám, Fms. iv. 229, (see nesnám, landnám):—in a lawful sense, nema land, to take possession of a land, as a settler (landnám II); hann nam Eyjafjörð allan.

3. nema e-n e-u, to bereave one of a thing; nema e-n höfði, aldri, fjörvi, Gkv. 2. 31, 42; verða ek á fitjum þeim er mik Niðaðar námu rekkar, Vkv.; hví namtú hann sigri þá? Em. 6; sigri numnir, Fms. xi. 306 (in a verse); numinn máli, bereft of speech, Geisli 34; fjörvi numna, life-bereft, Eb. (in a verse); hann lá þar lami ok öllu megni numinn, Hom. 116; þar til er lands-menn námu þá ráðum, used force, coerced them, Bs. i. 24; ríkir menn verða þá ráðum nomnir, Hom. 100; ef hann vill eigi nema trúa því, if he will not believe it, N. G. L. i. 88.

4. to reach, touch, hit; í hvítu pilzi, þat var svá sítt at þat nam hæl, Fas. ii. 343; nema hjöltin við neðra gómi, Edda 20; allir þeir sem oddrinn nam, Skíða R. 183; hvárt nam þik eðr eigi! Nj. 97; ok nema hann þar nauðsynjar, at hann má eigi lík færa, and if he is held back by necessity, N. G. L. i. 14, K. Á. 70; þótt þik nótt um nemi, if the night overtake thee, Sdm. 26: hence the saying, láta þar nótt sem nemr, to leave it to the night as it takes one = to take no care of the morrow:—nema stað, to take up one’s position, halt, Nj. 133, 197, Fms. i. 167, vii. 68, Eg. 237.

5. spec. phrases; Kolskeggr nam þar eigi yndi, Nj. 121; ef hann vildi þar staðfestask ok nema yndi, Fms. i. 103:—nema staðar = nema stað, Nj. 54, 205, 265, Ld. 104, Stj. 486, Fms. i. 206: of a weapon, hefi ek þat sverð er hvergi nemr í höggi stað, I have so keen a sword that it never stops in its stroke, i. e. it cuts clean through anything, Fas. ii. 535; oddrinn nam í brynjunni staðar, Al. 76; svá at staðar nam (naf Cod. Reg.) höndin við sporðinn, Edda 40; nema hvíld, to take rest, Alm. 1; nema veiðar, to take the prey, to hunt, Hým. 1.

6. to amount to, be equivalent to; ef eigi nemr kúgildi, Grág. ii. 233; honum þótti landauðn nema, Íb. 4; það nemr öngu, litlu, miklu, it is of no, of small, of great importance; bríkr þær er greyping hefir numit, Gþl. 345.

7. nema við, to strike against so as to stop, come no further; nam þar við ok gékk eigi lengra, Fms. xi. 278; en gadd-hjaltið nam við borðinu, Eb. 36.

8. metaph. to stop, halt; hér munu vér við nema, Finnb. 236; þar námu þeir Hrafn við í nesinu, Ísl. ii. 266; hann býsk við, ok vill enn við nema, þótt liðs-munr væri mikill, Bjarn. 54; konungr verðr glaðr við er hann skal fyrir hafa funnit þá menn er eigi spara viðr at nema, Al. 46; en ef þat nemr við förinni, at þú þykisk hafa fé oflítið, þá …, Ld. 70; er þat úvizka at bera eigi slíkt, ok mun þat eigi við nema, Glúm. 327; at konungr mundi fátt láta við nema, at sættir tækisk, i. e. that he would do anything for the sake of peace, Eg. 210.

II. as an auxiliary verb, emphatic, like Engl. do, did, with infin.; Höðr nam skjóta (H. did shoot) … sá nam einnættr vega, Vsp. 37; þá nam at vaxa, Hkv. 1. 9; hann nam at vaxa (he ‘took to growing’) ok vel dafna, Rm. 19; inn nam at ganga, 2; lind nam at skelfa, 9, 35; nam hón sér Högna heita at rúnum, Skv. 3. 14; róa námu ríki, they did row mightily, Am. 35; nam hann vittugri valgaldr kveða, Vtkv. 4; nama Högna mær of hug mæla, Hkv. 2. 15; þat nam at mæla, Og. 9: seldom in prose, ek nam eigi trúa á þat er hann sagði, Post.; Falka hestr Þiðreks nemr þetta at sjá, Þiðr. 117.

B. Metaph. to take in a mental sense or by the senses, to perceive, like Lat. apprehendere, comprehendere, freq. in old and mod. usage:

I. to perceive, catch, hear, of sound; en svá mikill ákafi var at hvassleik veðrsins þá er konungr tók at mæla, at varla námu þeir er næstir vóru, Fms. viii. 55; sem þeir vóru langt brottu komnir, svá at þó mátti nema kail milli þeirra ok manna Saul, Stj. 486; þeir skulu svá nær sitjask, at hvárirtveggju nemi orð annarra, Grág. i. 69; engi nam mál annars, Nj. 164; mál nam í milli þeirra, Fms. v. 31; eigi skulu vér þat mál svá nema, we shall not understand it so, Hom. 156.

II. to learn; klök nam fugla, Rm.; hann hafði numit svá lög, at hann var enn þriðr mestr laga-maðr á Íslandi, Nj. 164; inir hæstu turnar hafa numit honum at hníga, Al. 90; nú var Þórir þar ok nam þar fjölkyngi, Fb. iii. 245; Óðinn var göfgastr, ok at honum námu þeir allir íþróttirnar, Hkr. i; nema nám, to take in, acquire learning, Bs. i. 92, 127; see nám:—to ‘catch,’ learn by heart, þær kváðu vísur þessar en hann nam, Nj. 275; vísur þessar námu menn þegar, Ó. H. 207; en hinn nemi, er heyrir á, Darrl.; Þórdís nam þegar vísuna, Gísl. 33:—to learn from, þvar namtu þessi hnæfilegu orð? nam ek at mönnum …, Hbl.; nema ráð, Hm.; menn nemi mál mín ! Ó. H. (in a verse):—nema e-t at e-m, to learn something, derive information from one, ek hefi hér verit at nema kunnustu at Finnum, Fms. i. 8; hann nam lögspeki at Þorsteini, Ísl. ii. 205; hann nam kunnáttu at Geirríði, Eb. 44; Glúmr hafði numit þenna atburð at þeim manni er hét Arnórr, Fms. i. 266; en Oddr nam at Þorgeiri afráðs-koll …, Ari nam ok marga fræði at Þuríði Snorra dóttur Goða … hann hafði numit af gömlum mönnum ok vitrum, … eptir því sem vér höfum numit af fróðum mönnum, … þótt hverr maðr hafi síðan numit at öðrum, … ok hafa menn síðan at þeim numit, Ó. H. (pref.); nemi þér af mér, Fms. viii. 55.

C. Reflex., prop. to take, seize for oneself:

1. to take by force; ef maðr nemsk konu, ok samþykkjask þau síðan, þá …, H. E. i. 247.

β. to stop; ok hafða ek þat sverð, sem aldri hefir í höggi stað numisk (= numit), Fas. ii. 208; friðr namsk, ceased.

γ. to refuse, withhold from doing; hann bað hann eigi nemask með öllu at göra sem bændr vildu, Hkr. i. 142; hverr bóndi er þat nemsk ( who makes default), gjaldi …, K. Á. 40; þar var kominn fjöldi liðs ór Austr-löndum til móts við hann, ok námusk förina ( refused to go) ef hann kæmi eigi, Fb. ii. 71; en ef maðr nemsk leiðangrs-görð, eðr leiðangrs-ferð, þá hafi ármaðr sótt þat fyrr en skip komi á hlunn, … at hann hafi leiðangr görvan ok eigi fyrir nomisk, N. G. L. i. 200; en þó vil ek eigi fyrir minn dauða at nemask ( disregard) hans orðsendingar, O. H. L. 29.

2. to learn; láttú nemask þat, learn, take heed that, Skv. 1, passim; eptir þetta nemask af aptrgöngur hans, Ld. 54.

II. part. numinn, as adj. numb, seized, palsied; hann var allr numinn öðrum megin, ok mátti eigi mæla hálfum munni, Ann.; þá varð ek sem ek væra numinn, Mar.; vera frá sér numinn, to be beside oneself, from joy, astonishment, or the like, cp. the references above (A. 3).

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > NEMA
32 Bibliography

■ Aitchison, J. (1987). Noam Chomsky: Consensus and controversy. New York: Falmer Press.

■ Anderson, J. R. (1980). Cognitive psychology and its implications. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

■ Anderson, J. R. (1983). The architecture of cognition. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Anderson, J. R. (1995). Cognitive psychology and its implications (4th ed.). New York: W. H. Freeman.

■ Archilochus (1971). In M. L. West (Ed.), Iambi et elegi graeci (Vol. 1). Oxford: Oxford University Press.

■ Armstrong, D. M. (1990). The causal theory of the mind. In W. G. Lycan (Ed.), Mind and cognition: A reader (pp. 37-47). Cambridge, MA: Basil Blackwell. (Originally published in 1981 in The nature of mind and other essays, Ithaca, NY: University Press).

■ Atkins, P. W. (1992). Creation revisited. Oxford: W. H. Freeman & Company.

■ Austin, J. L. (1962). How to do things with words. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Bacon, F. (1878). Of the proficience and advancement of learning divine and human. In The works of Francis Bacon (Vol. 1). Cambridge, MA: Hurd & Houghton.

■ Bacon, R. (1928). Opus majus (Vol. 2). R. B. Burke (Trans.). Philadelphia, PA: University of Pennsylvania Press.

■ Bar-Hillel, Y. (1960). The present status of automatic translation of languages. In F. L. Alt (Ed.), Advances in computers (Vol. 1). New York: Academic Press.

■ Barr, A., & E. A. Feigenbaum (Eds.) (1981). The handbook of artificial intelligence (Vol. 1). Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

■ Barr, A., & E. A. Feigenbaum (Eds.) (1982). The handbook of artificial intelligence (Vol. 2). Los Altos, CA: William Kaufman.

■ Barron, F. X. (1963). The needs for order and for disorder as motives in creative activity. In C. W. Taylor & F. X. Barron (Eds.), Scientific creativity: Its rec ognition and development (pp. 153-160). New York: Wiley.

■ Bartlett, F. C. (1932). Remembering: A study in experimental and social psychology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Bartley, S. H. (1969). Principles of perception. London: Harper & Row.

■ Barzun, J. (1959). The house of intellect. New York: Harper & Row.

■ Beach, F. A., D. O. Hebb, C. T. Morgan & H. W. Nissen (Eds.) (1960). The neu ropsychology of Lashley. New York: McGraw-Hill.

■ Berkeley, G. (1996). Principles of human knowledge: Three Dialogues. Oxford: Oxford University Press. (Originally published in 1710.)

■ Berlin, I. (1953). The hedgehog and the fox: An essay on Tolstoy's view of history. NY: Simon & Schuster.

■ Bierwisch, J. (1970). Semantics. In J. Lyons (Ed.), New horizons in linguistics. Baltimore: Penguin Books.

■ Black, H. C. (1951). Black's law dictionary. St. Paul, MN: West Publishing.

■ Bloom, A. (1981). The linguistic shaping of thought: A study in the impact of language on thinking in China and the West. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

■ Bobrow, D. G., & D. A. Norman (1975). Some principles of memory schemata. In D. G. Bobrow & A. Collins (Eds.), Representation and understanding: Stud ies in Cognitive Science (pp. 131-149). New York: Academic Press.

■ Boden, M. A. (1977). Artificial intelligence and natural man. New York: Basic Books.

■ Boden, M. A. (1981). Minds and mechanisms. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.

■ Boden, M. A. (1990a). The creative mind: Myths and mechanisms. London: Cardinal.

■ Boden, M. A. (1990b). The philosophy of artificial intelligence. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

■ Boden, M. A. (1994). Precis of The creative mind: Myths and mechanisms. Behavioral and brain sciences 17, 519-570.

■ Boden, M. (1996). Creativity. In M. Boden (Ed.), Artificial Intelligence (2nd ed.). San Diego: Academic Press.

■ Bolter, J. D. (1984). Turing's man: Western culture in the computer age. Chapel Hill, NC: University of North Carolina Press.

■ Bolton, N. (1972). The psychology of thinking. London: Methuen.

■ Bourne, L. E. (1973). Some forms of cognition: A critical analysis of several papers. In R. Solso (Ed.), Contemporary issues in cognitive psychology (pp. 313324). Loyola Symposium on Cognitive Psychology (Chicago 1972). Washington, DC: Winston.

■ Bransford, J. D., N. S. McCarrell, J. J. Franks & K. E. Nitsch (1977). Toward unexplaining memory. In R. Shaw & J. D. Bransford (Eds.), Perceiving, acting, and knowing (pp. 431-466). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Breger, L. (1981). Freud's unfinished journey. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.

■ Brehmer, B. (1986). In one word: Not from experience. In H. R. Arkes & K. Hammond (Eds.), Judgment and decision making: An interdisciplinary reader (pp. 705-719). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Bresnan, J. (1978). A realistic transformational grammar. In M. Halle, J. Bresnan & G. A. Miller (Eds.), Linguistic theory and psychological reality (pp. 1-59). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Brislin, R. W., W. J. Lonner & R. M. Thorndike (Eds.) (1973). Cross- cultural research methods. New York: Wiley.

■ Bronowski, J. (1977). A sense of the future: Essays in natural philosophy. P. E. Ariotti with R. Bronowski (Eds.). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Bronowski, J. (1978). The origins of knowledge and imagination. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.

■ Brown, R. O. (1973). A first language: The early stages. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Brown, T. (1970). Lectures on the philosophy of the human mind. In R. Brown (Ed.), Between Hume and Mill: An anthology of British philosophy- 1749- 1843 (pp. 330-387). New York: Random House/Modern Library.

■ Bruner, J. S., J. Goodnow & G. Austin (1956). A study of thinking. New York: Wiley.

■ Calvin, W. H. (1990). The cerebral symphony: Seashore reﬂections on the structure of consciousness. New York: Bantam.

■ Campbell, J. (1982). Grammatical man: Information, entropy, language, and life. New York: Simon & Schuster.

■ Campbell, J. (1989). The improbable machine. New York: Simon & Schuster.

■ Carlyle, T. (1966). On heroes, hero- worship and the heroic in history. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press. (Originally published in 1841.)

■ Carnap, R. (1959). The elimination of metaphysics through logical analysis of language [Ueberwindung der Metaphysik durch logische Analyse der Sprache]. In A. J. Ayer (Ed.), Logical positivism (pp. 60-81) A. Pap (Trans). New York: Free Press. (Originally published in 1932.)

■ Cassirer, E. (1946). Language and myth. New York: Harper and Brothers. Reprinted. New York: Dover Publications, 1953.

■ Cattell, R. B., & H. J. Butcher (1970). Creativity and personality. In P. E. Vernon (Ed.), Creativity. Harmondsworth, England: Penguin Books.

■ Caudill, M., & C. Butler (1990). Naturally intelligent systems. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.

■ Chandrasekaran, B. (1990). What kind of information processing is intelligence? A perspective on AI paradigms and a proposal. In D. Partridge & R. Wilks (Eds.), The foundations of artificial intelligence: A sourcebook (pp. 14-46). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Charniak, E., & McDermott, D. (1985). Introduction to artificial intelligence. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

■ Chase, W. G., & H. A. Simon (1988). The mind's eye in chess. In A. Collins & E. E. Smith (Eds.), Readings in cognitive science: A perspective from psychology and artificial intelligence (pp. 461-493). San Mateo, CA: Kaufmann.

■ Cheney, D. L., & R. M. Seyfarth (1990). How monkeys see the world: Inside the mind of another species. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

■ Chi, M.T.H., R. Glaser & E. Rees (1982). Expertise in problem solving. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), Advances in the psychology of human intelligence (pp. 7-73). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Chomsky, N. (1957). Syntactic structures. The Hague: Mouton. Janua Linguarum.

■ Chomsky, N. (1964). A transformational approach to syntax. In J. A. Fodor & J. J. Katz (Eds.), The structure of language: Readings in the philosophy of lan guage (pp. 211-245). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.

■ Chomsky, N. (1965). Aspects of the theory of syntax. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Chomsky, N. (1972). Language and mind (enlarged ed.). New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

■ Chomsky, N. (1979). Language and responsibility. New York: Pantheon.

■ Chomsky, N. (1986). Knowledge of language: Its nature, origin and use. New York: Praeger Special Studies.

■ Churchland, P. (1979). Scientific realism and the plasticity of mind. New York: Cambridge University Press.

■ Churchland, P. M. (1989). A neurocomputational perspective: The nature of mind and the structure of science. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Churchland, P. S. (1986). Neurophilosophy. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.

■ Clark, A. (1996). Philosophical Foundations. In M. A. Boden (Ed.), Artificial in telligence (2nd ed.). San Diego: Academic Press.

■ Clark, H. H., & T. B. Carlson (1981). Context for comprehension. In J. Long & A. Baddeley (Eds.), Attention and performance (Vol. 9, pp. 313-330). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Clarke, A. C. (1984). Profiles of the future: An inquiry into the limits of the possible. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.

■ Claxton, G. (1980). Cognitive psychology: A suitable case for what sort of treatment? In G. Claxton (Ed.), Cognitive psychology: New directions (pp. 1-25). London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.

■ Code, M. (1985). Order and organism. Albany, NY: State University of New York Press.

■ Collingwood, R. G. (1972). The idea of history. New York: Oxford University Press.

■ Coopersmith, S. (1967). The antecedents of self- esteem. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

■ Copland, A. (1952). Music and imagination. London: Oxford University Press.

■ Coren, S. (1994). The intelligence of dogs. New York: Bantam Books.

■ Cottingham, J. (Ed.) (1996). Western philosophy: An anthology. Oxford: Blackwell Publishers.

■ Cox, C. (1926). The early mental traits of three hundred geniuses. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.

■ Craik, K.J.W. (1943). The nature of explanation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Cronbach, L. J. (1990). Essentials of psychological testing (5th ed.). New York: HarperCollins.

■ Cronbach, L. J., & R. E. Snow (1977). Aptitudes and instructional methods. New York: Irvington. Paperback edition, 1981.

■ Csikszentmihalyi, M. (1993). The evolving self. New York: Harper Perennial.

■ Culler, J. (1976). Ferdinand de Saussure. New York: Penguin Books.

■ Curtius, E. R. (1973). European literature and the Latin Middle Ages. W. R. Trask (Trans.). Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

■ D'Alembert, J.L.R. (1963). Preliminary discourse to the encyclopedia of Diderot. R. N. Schwab (Trans.). Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill.

■ Damasio, A. (1994). Descartes' error: Emotion, reason, and the human brain. New York: Avon.

■ Dampier, W. C. (1966). A history of modern science. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Darwin, C. (1911). The life and letters of Charles Darwin (Vol. 1). Francis Darwin (Ed.). New York: Appleton.

■ Davidson, D. (1970) Mental events. In L. Foster & J. W. Swanson (Eds.), Experience and theory (pp. 79-101). Amherst: University of Massachussetts Press.

■ Davies, P. (1995). About time: Einstein's unfinished revolution. New York: Simon & Schuster/Touchstone.

■ Davis, R., & J. J. King (1977). An overview of production systems. In E. Elcock & D. Michie (Eds.), Machine intelligence 8. Chichester, England: Ellis Horwood.

■ Davis, R., & D. B. Lenat (1982). Knowledge- based systems in artificial intelligence. New York: McGraw-Hill.

■ Dawkins, R. (1982). The extended phenotype: The gene as the unit of selection. Oxford: W. H. Freeman.

■ deKleer, J., & J. S. Brown (1983). Assumptions and ambiguities in mechanistic mental models (1983). In D. Gentner & A. L. Stevens (Eds.), Mental modes (pp. 155-190). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Dennett, D. C. (1978a). Brainstorms: Philosophical essays on mind and psychology. Montgomery, VT: Bradford Books.

■ Dennett, D. C. (1978b). Toward a cognitive theory of consciousness. In D. C. Dennett, Brainstorms: Philosophical Essays on Mind and Psychology. Montgomery, VT: Bradford Books.

■ Dennett, D. C. (1995). Darwin's dangerous idea: Evolution and the meanings of life. New York: Simon & Schuster/Touchstone.

■ Descartes, R. (1897-1910). Traite de l'homme. In Oeuvres de Descartes (Vol. 11, pp. 119-215). Paris: Charles Adam & Paul Tannery. (Originally published in 1634.)

■ Descartes, R. (1950). Discourse on method. L. J. Laﬂeur (Trans.). New York: Liberal Arts Press. (Originally published in 1637.)

■ Descartes, R. (1951). Meditation on first philosophy. L. J. Laﬂeur (Trans.). New York: Liberal Arts Press. (Originally published in 1641.)

■ Descartes, R. (1955). The philosophical works of Descartes. E. S. Haldane and G.R.T. Ross (Trans.). New York: Dover. (Originally published in 1911 by Cambridge University Press.)

■ Descartes, R. (1967). Discourse on method (Pt. V). In E. S. Haldane and G.R.T. Ross (Eds.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 1, pp. 106-118). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1637.)

■ Descartes, R. (1970a). Discourse on method. In E. S. Haldane & G.R.T. Ross (Eds.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 1, pp. 181-200). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1637.)

■ Descartes, R. (1970b). Principles of philosophy. In E. S. Haldane & G.R.T. Ross (Eds.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 1, pp. 178-291). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1644.)

■ Descartes, R. (1984). Meditations on first philosophy. In J. Cottingham, R. Stoothoff & D. Murduch (Trans.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 2). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1641.)

■ Descartes, R. (1986). Meditations on first philosophy. J. Cottingham (Trans.). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1641 as Med itationes de prima philosophia.)

■ deWulf, M. (1956). An introduction to scholastic philosophy. Mineola, NY: Dover Books.

■ Dixon, N. F. (1981). Preconscious processing. London: Wiley.

■ Doyle, A. C. (1986). The Boscombe Valley mystery. In Sherlock Holmes: The com plete novels and stories (Vol. 1). New York: Bantam.

■ Dreyfus, H., & S. Dreyfus (1986). Mind over machine. New York: Free Press.

■ Dreyfus, H. L. (1972). What computers can't do: The limits of artificial intelligence (revised ed.). New York: Harper & Row.

■ Dreyfus, H. L., & S. E. Dreyfus (1986). Mind over machine: The power of human intuition and expertise in the era of the computer. New York: Free Press.

■ Edelman, G. M. (1992). Bright air, brilliant fire: On the matter of the mind. New York: Basic Books.

■ Ehrenzweig, A. (1967). The hidden order of art. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson.

■ Einstein, A., & L. Infeld (1938). The evolution of physics. New York: Simon & Schuster.

■ Eisenstein, S. (1947). Film sense. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World.

■ Everdell, W. R. (1997). The first moderns. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

■ Eysenck, M. W. (1977). Human memory: Theory, research and individual difference. Oxford: Pergamon.

■ Eysenck, M. W. (1982). Attention and arousal: Cognition and performance. Berlin: Springer.

■ Eysenck, M. W. (1984). A handbook of cognitive psychology. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Fancher, R. E. (1979). Pioneers of psychology. New York: W. W. Norton.

■ Farrell, B. A. (1981). The standing of psychoanalysis. New York: Oxford University Press.

■ Feldman, D. H. (1980). Beyond universals in cognitive development. Norwood, NJ: Ablex.

■ Fetzer, J. H. (1996). Philosophy and cognitive science (2nd ed.). New York: Paragon House.

■ Finke, R. A. (1990). Creative imagery: Discoveries and inventions in visualization. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Flanagan, O. (1991). The science of the mind. Cambridge MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.

■ Fodor, J. (1983). The modularity of mind. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.

■ Frege, G. (1972). Conceptual notation. T. W. Bynum (Trans.). Oxford: Clarendon Press. (Originally published in 1879.)

■ Frege, G. (1979). Logic. In H. Hermes, F. Kambartel & F. Kaulbach (Eds.), Gottlob Frege: Posthumous writings. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. (Originally published in 1879-1891.)

■ Freud, S. (1959). Creative writers and day-dreaming. In J. Strachey (Ed.), The standard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 9, pp. 143-153). London: Hogarth Press.

■ Freud, S. (1966). Project for a scientific psychology. In J. Strachey (Ed.), The stan dard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 1, pp. 295-398). London: Hogarth Press. (Originally published in 1950 as Aus den AnfaЁngen der Psychoanalyse, in London by Imago Publishing.)

■ Freud, S. (1976). Lecture 18-Fixation to traumas-the unconscious. In J. Strachey (Ed.), The standard edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 16, p. 285). London: Hogarth Press.

■ Galileo, G. (1990). Il saggiatore [The assayer]. In S. Drake (Ed.), Discoveries and opinions of Galileo. New York: Anchor Books. (Originally published in 1623.)

■ Gassendi, P. (1970). Letter to Descartes. In "Objections and replies." In E. S. Haldane & G.R.T. Ross (Eds.), The philosophical works of Descartes (Vol. 2, pp. 179-240). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. (Originally published in 1641.)

■ Gazzaniga, M. S. (1988). Mind matters: How mind and brain interact to create our conscious lives. Boston: Houghton Mifﬂin in association with MIT Press/Bradford Books.

■ Genesereth, M. R., & N. J. Nilsson (1987). Logical foundations of artificial intelligence. Palo Alto, CA: Morgan Kaufmann.

■ Ghiselin, B. (1952). The creative process. New York: Mentor.

■ Ghiselin, B. (1985). The creative process. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press. (Originally published in 1952.)

■ Gilhooly, K. J. (1996). Thinking: Directed, undirected and creative (3rd ed.). London: Academic Press.

■ Glass, A. L., K. J. Holyoak & J. L. Santa (1979). Cognition. Reading, MA: AddisonWesley.

■ Goody, J. (1977). The domestication of the savage mind. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Gruber, H. E. (1980). Darwin on man: A psychological study of scientific creativity (2nd ed.). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

■ Gruber, H. E., & S. Davis (1988). Inching our way up Mount Olympus: The evolving systems approach to creative thinking. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), The nature of creativity: Contemporary psychological perspectives. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Guthrie, E. R. (1972). The psychology of learning. New York: Harper. (Originally published in 1935.)

■ Habermas, J. (1972). Knowledge and human interests. Boston: Beacon Press.

■ Hadamard, J. (1945). The psychology of invention in the mathematical field. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

■ Hand, D. J. (1985). Artificial intelligence and psychiatry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Harris, M. (1981). The language myth. London: Duckworth.

■ Haugeland, J. (Ed.) (1981). Mind design: Philosophy, psychology, artificial intelligence. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.

■ Haugeland, J. (1981a). The nature and plausibility of cognitivism. In J. Haugeland (Ed.), Mind design: Philosophy, psychology, artificial intelligence (pp. 243-281). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Haugeland, J. (1981b). Semantic engines: An introduction to mind design. In J. Haugeland (Ed.), Mind design: Philosophy, psychology, artificial intelligence (pp. 1-34). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.

■ Haugeland, J. (1985). Artificial intelligence: The very idea. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Hawkes, T. (1977). Structuralism and semiotics. Berkeley: University of California Press.

■ Hebb, D. O. (1949). The organisation of behaviour. New York: Wiley.

■ Hebb, D. O. (1958). A textbook of psychology. Philadelphia: Saunders.

■ Hegel, G.W.F. (1910). The phenomenology of mind. J. B. Baille (Trans.). London: Sonnenschein. (Originally published as Phaenomenologie des Geistes, 1807.)

■ Heisenberg, W. (1958). Physics and philosophy. New York: Harper & Row.

■ Hempel, C. G. (1966). Philosophy of natural science. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall.

■ Herman, A. (1997). The idea of decline in Western history. New York: Free Press.

■ Herrnstein, R. J., & E. G. Boring (Eds.) (1965). A source book in the history of psy chology. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Herzmann, E. (1964). Mozart's creative process. In P. H. Lang (Ed.), The creative world of Mozart (pp. 17-30). London: Oldbourne Press.

■ Hilgard, E. R. (1957). Introduction to psychology. London: Methuen.

■ Hobbes, T. (1651). Leviathan. London: Crooke.

■ Hofstadter, D. R. (1979). Goedel, Escher, Bach: An eternal golden braid. New York: Basic Books.

■ Holliday, S. G., & M. J. Chandler (1986). Wisdom: Explorations in adult competence. Basel, Switzerland: Karger.

■ Horn, J. L. (1986). In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), Advances in the psychology of human intelligence (Vol. 3). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.

■ Hull, C. (1943). Principles of behavior. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.

■ Hume, D. (1955). An inquiry concerning human understanding. New York: Liberal Arts Press. (Originally published in 1748.)

■ Hume, D. (1975). An enquiry concerning human understanding. In L. A. SelbyBigge (Ed.), Hume's enquiries (3rd. ed., revised P. H. Nidditch). Oxford: Clarendon. (Spelling and punctuation revised.) (Originally published in 1748.)

■ Hume, D. (1978). A treatise of human nature. L. A. Selby-Bigge (Ed.), Hume's enquiries (3rd. ed., revised P. H. Nidditch). Oxford: Clarendon. (With some modifications of spelling and punctuation.) (Originally published in 1690.)

■ Hunt, E. (1973). The memory we must have. In R. C. Schank & K. M. Colby (Eds.), Computer models of thought and language. (pp. 343-371) San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

■ Husserl, E. (1960). Cartesian meditations. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff.

■ Inhelder, B., & J. Piaget (1958). The growth of logical thinking from childhood to adolescence. New York: Basic Books. (Originally published in 1955 as De la logique de l'enfant a` la logique de l'adolescent. [Paris: Presses Universitaire de France])

■ James, W. (1890a). The principles of psychology (Vol. 1). New York: Dover Books.

■ James, W. (1890b). The principles of psychology. New York: Henry Holt.

■ Jevons, W. S. (1900). The principles of science (2nd ed.). London: Macmillan.

■ Johnson, G. (1986). Machinery of the mind: Inside the new science of artificial intelli gence. New York: Random House.

■ Johnson, M. L. (1988). Mind, language, machine. New York: St. Martin's Press.

■ Johnson-Laird, P. N. (1983). Mental models: Toward a cognitive science of language, inference, and consciousness. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Johnson-Laird, P. N. (1988). The computer and the mind: An introduction to cognitive science. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Jones, E. (1961). The life and work of Sigmund Freud. L. Trilling & S. Marcus (Eds.). London: Hogarth.

■ Jones, R. V. (1985). Complementarity as a way of life. In A. P. French & P. J. Kennedy (Eds.), Niels Bohr: A centenary volume. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Kant, I. (1933). Critique of Pure Reason (2nd ed.). N. K. Smith (Trans.). London: Macmillan. (Originally published in 1781 as Kritik der reinen Vernunft.)

■ Kant, I. (1891). Solution of the general problems of the Prolegomena. In E. Belfort (Trans.), Kant's Prolegomena. London: Bell. (With minor modifications.) (Originally published in 1783.)

■ Katona, G. (1940). Organizing and memorizing: Studies in the psychology of learning and teaching. New York: Columbia University Press.

■ Kaufman, A. S. (1979). Intelligent testing with the WISC-R. New York: Wiley.

■ Koestler, A. (1964). The act of creation. New York: Arkana (Penguin).

■ Kohlberg, L. (1971). From is to ought. In T. Mischel (Ed.), Cognitive development and epistemology. (pp. 151-235) New York: Academic Press.

■ KoЁhler, W. (1925). The mentality of apes. New York: Liveright.

■ KoЁhler, W. (1927). The mentality of apes (2nd ed.). Ella Winter (Trans.). London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.

■ KoЁhler, W. (1930). Gestalt psychology. London: G. Bell.

■ KoЁhler, W. (1947). Gestalt psychology. New York: Liveright.

■ KoЁhler, W. (1969). The task of Gestalt psychology. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

■ Kuhn, T. (1970). The structure of scientific revolutions (2nd ed.). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

■ Langer, E. J. (1989). Mindfulness. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

■ Langer, S. (1962). Philosophical sketches. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.

■ Langley, P., H. A. Simon, G. L. Bradshaw & J. M. Zytkow (1987). Scientific dis covery: Computational explorations of the creative process. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Lashley, K. S. (1951). The problem of serial order in behavior. In L. A. Jeffress (Ed.), Cerebral mechanisms in behavior, the Hixon Symposium (pp. 112-146) New York: Wiley.

■ LeDoux, J. E., & W. Hirst (1986). Mind and brain: Dialogues in cognitive neuroscience. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Lehnert, W. (1978). The process of question answering. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Leiber, J. (1991). Invitation to cognitive science. Oxford: Blackwell.

■ Lenat, D. B., & G. Harris (1978). Designing a rule system that searches for scientific discoveries. In D. A. Waterman & F. Hayes-Roth (Eds.), Pattern directed inference systems (pp. 25-52) New York: Academic Press.

■ Levenson, T. (1995). Measure for measure: A musical history of science. New York: Touchstone. (Originally published in 1994.)

■ Leґvi-Strauss, C. (1963). Structural anthropology. C. Jacobson & B. Grundfest Schoepf (Trans.). New York: Basic Books. (Originally published in 1958.)

■ Levine, M. W., & J. M. Schefner (1981). Fundamentals of sensation and perception. London: Addison-Wesley.

■ Lewis, C. I. (1946). An analysis of knowledge and valuation. LaSalle, IL: Open Court.

■ Lighthill, J. (1972). A report on artificial intelligence. Unpublished manuscript, Science Research Council.

■ Lipman, M., A. M. Sharp & F. S. Oscanyan (1980). Philosophy in the classroom. Philadelphia: Temple University Press.

■ Lippmann, W. (1965). Public opinion. New York: Free Press. (Originally published in 1922.)

■ Locke, J. (1956). An essay concerning human understanding. Chicago: Henry Regnery Co. (Originally published in 1690.)

■ Locke, J. (1975). An essay concerning human understanding. P. H. Nidditch (Ed.). Oxford: Clarendon. (Originally published in 1690.) (With spelling and punctuation modernized and some minor modifications of phrasing.)

■ Lopate, P. (1994). The art of the personal essay. New York: Doubleday/Anchor Books.

■ Lorimer, F. (1929). The growth of reason. London: Kegan Paul. Machlup, F., & U. Mansfield (Eds.) (1983). The study of information. New York: Wiley.

■ Manguel, A. (1996). A history of reading. New York: Viking.

■ Margolis, H. (1987). Patterns, thinking, and cognition. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.

■ Markey, J. F. (1928). The symbolic process. London: Kegan Paul.

■ Martin, R. M. (1969). On Ziff's "Natural and formal languages." In S. Hook (Ed.), Language and philosophy: A symposium (pp. 249-263). New York: New York University Press.

■ Mazlish, B. (1993). The fourth discontinuity: the co- evolution of humans and machines. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.

■ McCarthy, J., & P. J. Hayes (1969). Some philosophical problems from the standpoint of artificial intelligence. In B. Meltzer & D. Michie (Eds.), Machine intelligence 4. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.

■ McClelland, J. L., D. E. Rumelhart & G. E. Hinton (1986). The appeal of parallel distributed processing. In D. E. Rumelhart, J. L. McClelland & the PDP Research Group (Eds.), Parallel distributed processing: Explorations in the mi crostructure of cognition (Vol. 1, pp. 3-40). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/ Bradford Books.

■ McCorduck, P. (1979). Machines who think. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

■ McLaughlin, T. (1970). Music and communication. London: Faber & Faber.

■ Mednick, S. A. (1962). The associative basis of the creative process. Psychological Review 69, 431-436.

■ Meehl, P. E., & C. J. Golden (1982). Taxometric methods. In Kendall, P. C., & Butcher, J. N. (Eds.), Handbook of research methods in clinical psychology (pp. 127-182). New York: Wiley.

■ Mehler, J., E.C.T. Walker & M. Garrett (Eds.) (1982). Perspectives on mental rep resentation: Experimental and theoretical studies of cognitive processes and ca pacities. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Mill, J. S. (1900). A system of logic, ratiocinative and inductive: Being a connected view of the principles of evidence and the methods of scientific investigation. London: Longmans, Green.

■ Miller, G. A. (1979, June). A very personal history. Talk to the Cognitive Science Workshop, Cambridge, MA.

■ Miller, J. (1983). States of mind. New York: Pantheon Books.

■ Minsky, M. (1975). A framework for representing knowledge. In P. H. Winston (Ed.), The psychology of computer vision (pp. 211-277). New York: McGrawHill.

■ Minsky, M., & S. Papert (1973). Artificial intelligence. Condon Lectures, Oregon State System of Higher Education, Eugene, Oregon.

■ Minsky, M. L. (1986). The society of mind. New York: Simon & Schuster.

■ Mischel, T. (1976). Psychological explanations and their vicissitudes. In J. K. Cole & W. J. Arnold (Eds.), Nebraska Symposium on motivation (Vol. 23). Lincoln, NB: University of Nebraska Press.

■ Morford, M.P.O., & R. J. Lenardon (1995). Classical mythology (5th ed.). New York: Longman.

■ Murdoch, I. (1954). Under the net. New York: Penguin.

■ Nagel, E. (1959). Methodological issues in psychoanalytic theory. In S. Hook (Ed.), Psychoanalysis, scientific method, and philosophy: A symposium. New York: New York University Press.

■ Nagel, T. (1979). Mortal questions. London: Cambridge University Press.

■ Nagel, T. (1986). The view from nowhere. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

■ Neisser, U. (1967). Cognitive psychology. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.

■ Neisser, U. (1972). Changing conceptions of imagery. In P. W. Sheehan (Ed.), The function and nature of imagery (pp. 233-251). London: Academic Press.

■ Neisser, U. (1976). Cognition and reality. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

■ Neisser, U. (1978). Memory: What are the important questions? In M. M. Gruneberg, P. E. Morris & R. N. Sykes (Eds.), Practical aspects of memory (pp. 3-24). London: Academic Press.

■ Neisser, U. (1979). The concept of intelligence. In R. J. Sternberg & D. K. Detterman (Eds.), Human intelligence: Perspectives on its theory and measurement (pp. 179-190). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.

■ Nersessian, N. (1992). How do scientists think? Capturing the dynamics of conceptual change in science. In R. N. Giere (Ed.), Cognitive models of science (pp. 3-44). Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.

■ Newell, A. (1973a). Artificial intelligence and the concept of mind. In R. C. Schank & K. M. Colby (Eds.), Computer models of thought and language (pp. 1-60). San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

■ Newell, A. (1973b). You can't play 20 questions with nature and win. In W. G. Chase (Ed.), Visual information processing (pp. 283-310). New York: Academic Press.

■ Newell, A., & H. A. Simon (1963). GPS: A program that simulates human thought. In E. A. Feigenbaum & J. Feldman (Eds.), Computers and thought (pp. 279-293). New York & McGraw-Hill.

■ Newell, A., & H. A. Simon (1972). Human problem solving. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.

■ Nietzsche, F. (1966). Beyond good and evil. W. Kaufmann (Trans.). New York: Vintage. (Originally published in 1885.)

■ Nilsson, N. J. (1971). Problem- solving methods in artificial intelligence. New York: McGraw-Hill.

■ Nussbaum, M. C. (1978). Aristotle's Princeton University Press. De Motu Anamalium. Princeton, NJ:

■ Oersted, H. C. (1920). Thermo-electricity. In Kirstine Meyer (Ed.), H. C. Oersted, Natuurvidenskabelige Skrifter (Vol. 2). Copenhagen: n.p. (Originally published in 1830 in The Edinburgh encyclopaedia.)

■ Ong, W. J. (1982). Orality and literacy: The technologizing of the word. London: Methuen.

■ Onians, R. B. (1954). The origins of European thought. Cambridge, MA: Cambridge University Press.

■ Osgood, C. E. (1960). Method and theory in experimental psychology. New York: Oxford University Press. (Originally published in 1953.)

■ Osgood, C. E. (1966). Language universals and psycholinguistics. In J. H. Greenberg (Ed.), Universals of language (2nd ed., pp. 299-322). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Palmer, R. E. (1969). Hermeneutics. Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press.

■ Peirce, C. S. (1934). Some consequences of four incapacities-Man, a sign. In C. Hartsborne & P. Weiss (Eds.), Collected papers of Charles Saunders Peirce (Vol. 5, pp. 185-189). Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Penfield, W. (1959). In W. Penfield & L. Roberts, Speech and brain mechanisms. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

■ Penrose, R. (1994). Shadows of the mind: A search for the missing science of conscious ness. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

■ Perkins, D. N. (1981). The mind's best work. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Peterfreund, E. (1986). The heuristic approach to psychoanalytic therapy. In

■ J. Reppen (Ed.), Analysts at work, (pp. 127-144). Hillsdale, NJ: Analytic Press.

■ Piaget, J. (1952). The origin of intelligence in children. New York: International Universities Press. (Originally published in 1936.)

■ Piaget, J. (1954). Le langage et les opeґrations intellectuelles. Proble` mes de psycho linguistique. Symposium de l'Association de Psychologie Scientifique de Langue Francёaise. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.

■ Piaget, J. (1977). Problems of equilibration. In H. E. Gruber & J. J. Voneche (Eds.), The essential Piaget (pp. 838-841). London: Routlege & Kegan Paul. (Originally published in 1975 as L'eґquilibration des structures cognitives [Paris: Presses Universitaires de France].)

■ Piaget, J., & B. Inhelder. (1973). Memory and intelligence. New York: Basic Books.

■ Pinker, S. (1994). The language instinct. New York: Morrow.

■ Pinker, S. (1996). Facts about human language relevant to its evolution. In J.-P. Changeux & J. Chavaillon (Eds.), Origins of the human brain. A symposium of the Fyssen foundation (pp. 262-283). Oxford: Clarendon Press. Planck, M. (1949). Scientific autobiography and other papers. F. Gaynor (Trans.). New York: Philosophical Library.

■ Planck, M. (1990). Wissenschaftliche Selbstbiographie. W. Berg (Ed.). Halle, Germany: Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher Leopoldina.

■ Plato (1892). Meno. In The Dialogues of Plato (B. Jowett, Trans.; Vol. 2). New York: Clarendon. (Originally published circa 380 B.C.)

■ Poincareґ, H. (1913). Mathematical creation. In The foundations of science. G. B. Halsted (Trans.). New York: Science Press.

■ Poincareґ, H. (1921). The foundations of science: Science and hypothesis, the value of science, science and method. G. B. Halstead (Trans.). New York: Science Press.

■ Poincareґ, H. (1929). The foundations of science: Science and hypothesis, the value of science, science and method. New York: Science Press.

■ Poincareґ, H. (1952). Science and method. F. Maitland (Trans.) New York: Dover.

■ Polya, G. (1945). How to solve it. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

■ Polanyi, M. (1958). Personal knowledge. London: Routledge & Kegan Paul.

■ Popper, K. (1968). Conjectures and refutations: The growth of scientific knowledge. New York: Harper & Row/Basic Books.

■ Popper, K., & J. Eccles (1977). The self and its brain. New York: Springer-Verlag.

■ Popper, K. R. (1959). The logic of scientific discovery. London: Hutchinson.

■ Putnam, H. (1975). Mind, language and reality: Philosophical papers (Vol. 2). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Putnam, H. (1987). The faces of realism. LaSalle, IL: Open Court.

■ Pylyshyn, Z. W. (1981). The imagery debate: Analog media versus tacit knowledge. In N. Block (Ed.), Imagery (pp. 151-206). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Pylyshyn, Z. W. (1984). Computation and cognition: Towards a foundation for cog nitive science. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.

■ Quillian, M. R. (1968). Semantic memory. In M. Minsky (Ed.), Semantic information processing (pp. 216-260). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Quine, W.V.O. (1960). Word and object. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Rabbitt, P.M.A., & S. Dornic (Eds.). Attention and performance (Vol. 5). London: Academic Press.

■ Rawlins, G.J.E. (1997). Slaves of the Machine: The quickening of computer technology. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press/Bradford Books.

■ Reid, T. (1970). An inquiry into the human mind on the principles of common sense. In R. Brown (Ed.), Between Hume and Mill: An anthology of British philosophy- 1749- 1843 (pp. 151-178). New York: Random House/Modern Library.

■ Reitman, W. (1970). What does it take to remember? In D. A. Norman (Ed.), Models of human memory (pp. 470-510). London: Academic Press.

■ Ricoeur, P. (1974). Structure and hermeneutics. In D. I. Ihde (Ed.), The conﬂict of interpretations: Essays in hermeneutics (pp. 27-61). Evanston, IL: Northwestern University Press.

■ Robinson, D. N. (1986). An intellectual history of psychology. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press.

■ Rorty, R. (1979). Philosophy and the mirror of nature. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.

■ Rosch, E. (1977). Human categorization. In N. Warren (Ed.), Studies in cross cultural psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 1-49) London: Academic Press.

■ Rosch, E. (1978). Principles of categorization. In E. Rosch & B. B. Lloyd (Eds.), Cognition and categorization (pp. 27-48). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Rosch, E., & B. B. Lloyd (1978). Principles of categorization. In E. Rosch & B. B. Lloyd (Eds.), Cognition and categorization. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Rose, S. (1970). The chemistry of life. Baltimore: Penguin Books.

■ Rose, S. (1976). The conscious brain (updated ed.). New York: Random House.

■ Rose, S. (1993). The making of memory: From molecules to mind. New York: Anchor Books. (Originally published in 1992)

■ Roszak, T. (1994). The cult of information: A neo- Luddite treatise on high- tech, artificial intelligence, and the true art of thinking (2nd ed.). Berkeley: University of California Press.

■ Royce, J. R., & W. W. Rozeboom (Eds.) (1972). The psychology of knowing. New York: Gordon & Breach.

■ Rumelhart, D. E. (1977). Introduction to human information processing. New York: Wiley.

■ Rumelhart, D. E. (1980). Schemata: The building blocks of cognition. In R. J. Spiro, B. Bruce & W. F. Brewer (Eds.), Theoretical issues in reading comprehension. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Rumelhart, D. E., & J. L. McClelland (1986). On learning the past tenses of English verbs. In J. L. McClelland & D. E. Rumelhart (Eds.), Parallel distributed processing: Explorations in the microstructure of cognition (Vol. 2). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Rumelhart, D. E., P. Smolensky, J. L. McClelland & G. E. Hinton (1986). Schemata and sequential thought processes in PDP models. In J. L. McClelland, D. E. Rumelhart & the PDP Research Group (Eds.), Parallel Distributed Processing (Vol. 2, pp. 7-57). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Russell, B. (1927). An outline of philosophy. London: G. Allen & Unwin.

■ Russell, B. (1961). History of Western philosophy. London: George Allen & Unwin.

■ Russell, B. (1965). How I write. In Portraits from memory and other essays. London: Allen & Unwin.

■ Russell, B. (1992). In N. Griffin (Ed.), The selected letters of Bertrand Russell (Vol. 1), The private years, 1884- 1914. Boston: Houghton Mifﬂin. Ryecroft, C. (1966). Psychoanalysis observed. London: Constable.

■ Sagan, C. (1978). The dragons of Eden: Speculations on the evolution of human intel ligence. New York: Ballantine Books.

■ Salthouse, T. A. (1992). Expertise as the circumvention of human processing limitations. In K. A. Ericsson & J. Smith (Eds.), Toward a general theory of expertise: Prospects and limits (pp. 172-194). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Sanford, A. J. (1987). The mind of man: Models of human understanding. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.

■ Sapir, E. (1921). Language. New York: Harcourt, Brace, and World.

■ Sapir, E. (1964). Culture, language, and personality. Berkeley: University of California Press. (Originally published in 1941.)

■ Sapir, E. (1985). The status of linguistics as a science. In D. G. Mandelbaum (Ed.), Selected writings of Edward Sapir in language, culture and personality (pp. 160166). Berkeley: University of California Press. (Originally published in 1929).

■ Scardmalia, M., & C. Bereiter (1992). Literate expertise. In K. A. Ericsson & J. Smith (Eds.), Toward a general theory of expertise: Prospects and limits (pp. 172-194). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Schafer, R. (1954). Psychoanalytic interpretation in Rorschach testing. New York: Grune & Stratten.

■ Schank, R. C. (1973). Identification of conceptualizations underlying natural language. In R. C. Schank & K. M. Colby (Eds.), Computer models of thought and language (pp. 187-248). San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

■ Schank, R. C. (1976). The role of memory in language processing. In C. N. Cofer (Ed.), The structure of human memory. (pp. 162-189) San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

■ Schank, R. C. (1986). Explanation patterns: Understanding mechanically and creatively. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Schank, R. C., & R. P. Abelson (1977). Scripts, plans, goals, and understanding. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ SchroЁdinger, E. (1951). Science and humanism. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Searle, J. R. (1981a). Minds, brains, and programs. In J. Haugeland (Ed.), Mind design: Philosophy, psychology, artificial intelligence (pp. 282-306). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Searle, J. R. (1981b). Minds, brains and programs. In D. Hofstadter & D. Dennett (Eds.), The mind's I (pp. 353-373). New York: Basic Books.

■ Searle, J. R. (1983). Intentionality. New York: Cambridge University Press.

■ Serres, M. (1982). The origin of language: Biology, information theory, and thermodynamics. M. Anderson (Trans.). In J. V. Harari & D. F. Bell (Eds.), Hermes: Literature, science, philosophy (pp. 71-83). Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.

■ Simon, H. A. (1966). Scientific discovery and the psychology of problem solving. In R. G. Colodny (Ed.), Mind and cosmos: Essays in contemporary science and philosophy (pp. 22-40). Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press.

■ Simon, H. A. (1979). Models of thought. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.

■ Simon, H. A. (1989). The scientist as a problem solver. In D. Klahr & K. Kotovsky (Eds.), Complex information processing: The impact of Herbert Simon. Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Simon, H. A., & C. Kaplan (1989). Foundations of cognitive science. In M. Posner (Ed.), Foundations of cognitive science (pp. 1-47). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Simonton, D. K. (1988). Creativity, leadership and chance. In R. J. Sternberg (Ed.), The nature of creativity. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Skinner, B. F. (1974). About behaviorism. New York: Knopf.

■ Smith, E. E. (1988). Concepts and thought. In J. Sternberg & E. E. Smith (Eds.), The psychology of human thought (pp. 19-49). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Smith, E. E. (1990). Thinking: Introduction. In D. N. Osherson & E. E. Smith (Eds.), Thinking. An invitation to cognitive science. (Vol. 3, pp. 1-2). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Socrates. (1958). Meno. In E. H. Warmington & P. O. Rouse (Eds.), Great dialogues of Plato W.H.D. Rouse (Trans.). New York: New American Library. (Original publication date unknown.)

■ Solso, R. L. (1974). Theories of retrieval. In R. L. Solso (Ed.), Theories in cognitive psychology. Potomac, MD: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Spencer, H. (1896). The principles of psychology. New York: Appleton-CenturyCrofts.

■ Steiner, G. (1975). After Babel: Aspects of language and translation. New York: Oxford University Press.

■ Sternberg, R. J. (1977). Intelligence, information processing, and analogical reasoning. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.

■ Sternberg, R. J. (1994). Intelligence. In R. J. Sternberg, Thinking and problem solving. San Diego: Academic Press.

■ Sternberg, R. J., & J. E. Davidson (1985). Cognitive development in gifted and talented. In F. D. Horowitz & M. O'Brien (Eds.), The gifted and talented (pp. 103-135). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.

■ Storr, A. (1993). The dynamics of creation. New York: Ballantine Books. (Originally published in 1972.)

■ Stumpf, S. E. (1994). Philosophy: History and problems (5th ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.

■ Sulloway, F. J. (1996). Born to rebel: Birth order, family dynamics, and creative lives. New York: Random House/Vintage Books.

■ Thorndike, E. L. (1906). Principles of teaching. New York: A. G. Seiler.

■ Thorndike, E. L. (1970). Animal intelligence: Experimental studies. Darien, CT: Hafner Publishing Co. (Originally published in 1911.)

■ Titchener, E. B. (1910). A textbook of psychology. New York: Macmillan.

■ Titchener, E. B. (1914). A primer of psychology. New York: Macmillan.

■ Toulmin, S. (1957). The philosophy of science. London: Hutchinson.

■ Tulving, E. (1972). Episodic and semantic memory. In E. Tulving & W. Donaldson (Eds.), Organisation of memory. London: Academic Press.

■ Turing, A. (1946). In B. E. Carpenter & R. W. Doran (Eds.), ACE reports of 1946 and other papers. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Turkle, S. (1984). Computers and the second self: Computers and the human spirit. New York: Simon & Schuster.

■ Tyler, S. A. (1978). The said and the unsaid: Mind, meaning, and culture. New York: Academic Press.

■ van Heijenoort (Ed.) (1967). From Frege to Goedel. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.

■ Varela, F. J. (1984). The creative circle: Sketches on the natural history of circularity. In P. Watzlawick (Ed.), The invented reality (pp. 309-324). New York: W. W. Norton.

■ Voltaire (1961). On the Penseґs of M. Pascal. In Philosophical letters (pp. 119-146). E. Dilworth (Trans.). Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill.

■ Wagman, M. (1991a). Artificial intelligence and human cognition: A theoretical inter comparison of two realms of intellect. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1991b). Cognitive science and concepts of mind: Toward a general theory of human and artificial intelligence. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1993). Cognitive psychology and artificial intelligence: Theory and re search in cognitive science. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1995). The sciences of cognition: Theory and research in psychology and artificial intelligence. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1996). Human intellect and cognitive science: Toward a general unified theory of intelligence. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1997a). Cognitive science and the symbolic operations of human and artificial intelligence: Theory and research into the intellective processes. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1997b). The general unified theory of intelligence: Central conceptions and specific application to domains of cognitive science. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1998a). Cognitive science and the mind- body problem: From philosophy to psychology to artificial intelligence to imaging of the brain. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1998b). Language and thought in humans and computers: Theory and research in psychology, artificial intelligence, and neural science. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1998c). The ultimate objectives of artificial intelligence: Theoretical and research foundations, philosophical and psychological implications. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (1999). The human mind according to artificial intelligence: Theory, re search, and implications. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wagman, M. (2000). Scientific discovery processes in humans and computers: Theory and research in psychology and artificial intelligence. Westport, CT: Praeger.

■ Wall, R. (1972). Introduction to mathematical linguistics. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.

■ Wallas, G. (1926). The Art of Thought. New York: Harcourt, Brace & Co.

■ Wason, P. (1977). Self contradictions. In P. Johnson-Laird & P. Wason (Eds.), Thinking: Readings in cognitive science. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

■ Wason, P. C., & P. N. Johnson-Laird. (1972). Psychology of reasoning: Structure and content. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

■ Watson, J. (1930). Behaviorism. New York: W. W. Norton.

■ Watzlawick, P. (1984). Epilogue. In P. Watzlawick (Ed.), The invented reality. New York: W. W. Norton, 1984.

■ Weinberg, S. (1977). The first three minutes: A modern view of the origin of the uni verse. New York: Basic Books.

■ Weisberg, R. W. (1986). Creativity: Genius and other myths. New York: W. H. Freeman.

■ Weizenbaum, J. (1976). Computer power and human reason: From judgment to cal culation. San Francisco: W. H. Freeman.

■ Wertheimer, M. (1945). Productive thinking. New York: Harper & Bros.

■ Whitehead, A. N. (1925). Science and the modern world. New York: Macmillan.

■ Whorf, B. L. (1956). In J. B. Carroll (Ed.), Language, thought and reality: Selected writings of Benjamin Lee Whorf. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Whyte, L. L. (1962). The unconscious before Freud. New York: Anchor Books.

■ Wiener, N. (1954). The human use of human beings. Boston: Houghton Mifﬂin.

■ Wiener, N. (1964). God & Golem, Inc.: A comment on certain points where cybernetics impinges on religion. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Winograd, T. (1972). Understanding natural language. New York: Academic Press.

■ Winston, P. H. (1987). Artificial intelligence: A perspective. In E. L. Grimson & R. S. Patil (Eds.), AI in the 1980s and beyond (pp. 1-12). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

■ Winston, P. H. (Ed.) (1975). The psychology of computer vision. New York: McGrawHill.

■ Wittgenstein, L. (1953). Philosophical investigations. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.

■ Wittgenstein, L. (1958). The blue and brown books. New York: Harper Colophon.

■ Woods, W. A. (1975). What's in a link: Foundations for semantic networks. In D. G. Bobrow & A. Collins (Eds.), Representations and understanding: Studies in cognitive science (pp. 35-84). New York: Academic Press.

■ Woodworth, R. S. (1938). Experimental psychology. New York: Holt; London: Methuen (1939).

■ Wundt, W. (1904). Principles of physiological psychology (Vol. 1). E. B. Titchener (Trans.). New York: Macmillan.

■ Wundt, W. (1907). Lectures on human and animal psychology. J. E. Creighton & E. B. Titchener (Trans.). New York: Macmillan.

■ Young, J. Z. (1978). Programs of the brain. New York: Oxford University Press.

■ Ziman, J. (1978). Reliable knowledge: An exploration of the grounds for belief in science. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Historical dictionary of quotations in cognitive science > Bibliography
33 GUÐ

m. (and n.), God.

* * *

m.; the plur. used to render the Lat. dii is guðir; [for etymology and changes of this word see p. 207]:—God.

A. Though the primitive form Goð rhymes with boð ( bidding), stoð ( help), and many other words, the second form Guð rhymes with no single word, so that in hymns the poets are wont to use incomplete rhymes, as brauð ( bread), nauð ( need); and exact rhymes can only be obtained by the last syllables of derivatives, e. g. Iðranin blíðkar aptur Guð | ei verður syndin tilreiknuð, Pass. 40. 4; or Upphaf alls mesta ófögn uðs | áklögun ströng og reiði Guðs, 3. 14; Svo er nú syndin innsigluð | iðrandi sála kvitt við Guð, 50. 14; but these rhyme-syllables can only occur in trisyllabic words (Gramm. p. xv):—the following are examples of incomplete rhymes, Vinir þér enga veittu stoð | svo vinskap fengi eg við sannan Guð, Pass. 3. 7; Föðurlegt hjarta hefir Guð | við hvern sem líðr kross og nauð, 3. 16; Herra minn þú varst hulinn Guð | þá hæðni leiðst og krossins nauð, 40. 16; as also in the hymn, Til þín Heilagi Herra Guð | hef eg lypt sálu minni | af hug og hjarta í hverri neyð | hjástoð treystandi þinni, Hólabók 108, rendering of Ps. xxv; Luther’s hymn, Ein feste burg ist unser Gott, is in the Icel. rendering, Óvinnanlig borg er vor Guð | ágæta skjöldr og verja | hann frelsar oss af allri nauð, Hólabók 182; Fyrir valtan veraldar auð | set þína trú á sannan Guð | sem allt skapaði fyrir sitt boð, 208 (in Hans Sachs’ hymn); hugsjúkir eta harma brauð | hollari fæðu gefr Guð | sér ljúfum þá þeir sofa, 124, Ps. cxxvii. 2.

B. PHRASES:—Guðs ást, Guðs elska, the love of God; Guðs gata, the way of God, 625. 87; Guðs gæðska, Guðs náð, the grace, goodness of God; Guðs miskunn, Guðs mildi, the mercy of God; Guðs ótti, the fear of God; Guðs gjöf, God’s gift; Guði friðr, the peace of God; Guðs hús, the house of God; Guðs musteri, the temple of God; Guðs orð, the word of God; and in popular usage, Guðsorða-bók, ‘God’s word-book,’ i. e. a religious book, not only of the Bible, but generally of hymns, sermons, etc., opp. to historical or secular books, sögu-bækr; Guðs maðr, a man of God, Stj. passim; Guðs ríki, the kingdom of God; Guðs Kristni, the Church of God, 625. 82; Guðs vin, God’s friend, Fms. i. 139; Guðs þjónn, God’s servant; Guðs þræll, the thrall of God, Greg. 54, Bs. i. 638; Guðs Sonr, the Son of God; Guðs trú, faith in God; Guðs þjónusta, Divine service (in Papal times the mass), K. Á. 36; of the sacrament, Bs. i. 638; Guðs akr, Germ. Gottes acker, ‘God’s acre,’ a churchyard; Guðs kista, God’s chest, the temple-treasury, Mark xii. 41; Guðs líkami = Corpus Domini, K. Á. 38; Guðs móðir, God’s mother (the Virgin Mary):—in Papal times, Guðs eign, God’s property = church glebes; Guðs lög, God’s law, i. e. the ecclesiastical law, as opp. to lands lög, the law of the land, i. e. the secular or civil law, K. Á. ch. 9, (for an interesting note upon this subject vide H. E. i. 133, note b); Guðs réttr, God’s right, i. e. ecclesiastical right, Fms. vii. 305; Guðs þakkir, ‘God’s thanks,’ charity, Grág. i. 222, K. Þ. K. 142, Hom. 34; whence the popular contracted form gustuk, a charity, pittance, in such phrases as, það er ekki gustuk, ‘tis no charity, ‘tis a pity, e. g. of dealing harshly with the poor; gustuka-verk, a work of charity; göra e-t í gustuka skyni, to do a thing as a charity: in former times the phrases Guðs þakkir and sálu-gjafir (soul’s gifts) were synonymous, including not only gifts to churches, clergy, and the poor, but also the building of bridges, erecting hostelries, especially in desert places, and the like, whence the words, sælu-brú, soul’s bridge; sælu-hús, soul’s house.

2. in Icel. many sayings referring to the name of God are still household words, e. g. in entering a house, as a greeting, hér sé Guð, God be here! (from Luke x. 5): in returning thanks, Guðs ást, God’s love! Guð laun or Guð laun’ fyrir mig, God’s reward! Germ. vergelt’s Gott! or gefið þið í Guðs friði! to which the reply is, Guð blessi þig, God bless thee ! (which is also the answer to a greeting or to thanks); Guðs friði! or vertu í Guðs friði, be in God’s peace! is the usual farewell; and the answer is, Guð veri með þér, God be with thee! Guð hjálpi þér, God help thee! Germ. helf Gott! Engl. God bless you! (to one sneezing); Guð varðveiti þig, God ward thee! (to one playing with dangerous things); biddu Guð fyrir þér! (denoting wonder), pray God! gáðu að Guði, heed God! take heed! fyrir Guðs skuld, for God’s sake! ef Guð lofar, proncd. as one word (ef-guðlogar, changing f into g), God willing, a common phrase when speaking of plans for the future, eg skal koma á morgun, ef-guðlogar, I will come to-morrow, God willing (from James iv. 13–15), occurs in Skálda (Thorodd) 165, as also, ef Guð vill, if God will (less freq.); Guði sé lof, God be praised! Guð gæfi, God grant! Guðs mildi, by God’s grace; það var mesta Guðs mildi hann slasaði sig ekki; Guð gefi þér góðan dag, Guð gefi þér góðar nætr, whence abbreviated góðan dag, good day; góðar nætr, good night: the sayings, sá er ekki einn sem Guð er með; and þann má ekki kefja sem Guð vill hefja, Fb. iii. 408; eitthvað þeim til líknar legst, sem ljúfr Guð vill bjarga.

Íslensk-ensk orðabók > GUÐ
34 ὥρα

ὥρα or [full] ὤρα (B), only in [dialect] Ion. form [full] ὥρη, or [full] ὤρη, some part of a sacrificial victim,

A λάψεται γλῶσσαν, ὀσφῦν δασέαν, ὤρην SIG1037.2
(Milet., iv/iii B.C.); τοὺς Ἴωνας λέγειν φασὶ τὴν κωλῆν ὥρην καὶ ὡραίαν Sch.HQ Od.12.89: but distd. fr. κωλῆ, λάψεται.. κωλῆν ἀντὶ τῆς ὤρης SIGl.c.5; cf. ἄωρος(B). (Perh. cogn. with Lat. sūra.)

------------------------------------

ὥρα (C), [dialect] Ion. [full] ὥρη, ἡ: [dialect] Ep. gen. pl. ὡράων, [dialect] Ion. ὡρέων: loc. pl. ὥρασι, q. v.

A any period, fixed by natural laws and revolutions, whether of the year, month, or day (the sense 'day' is implied in the compd. ἑπτάωρος, q. v.), νυκτός τε ὥραν καὶ μηνὸς καὶ ἐνιαυτοῦ X.Mem. 4.7.4
, cf. E.Alc. 449(lyr.), Pl.R. 527d; τοῦ γνώμονος ἡ σκιὰ ἐπιοῦσα ἐπὶ τὰς γραμμὰς σημαίνει τὰς ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ καὶ τῆς ἡμέρας IG12(8).240
([place name] Samothrace): but specially,

I in Hom., part of the year, season; mostly in pl., the seasons, ὅτε τέτρατον ἦλθεν ἔτος καὶ ἐπήλυθον ὧραι Od.2.107
, 19.152; ἀλλ' ὅτε δὴ μῆνές τε καὶ ἡμέραι ἐξετελεῦντο, ἂψ περιτελλομένου ἔτεος, καὶ ἐπήλυθον ὧραι 11.295
, 14.294; ἀλλ' ὅτε δή ῥ' ἐνιαυτὸς ἔην, περὶ δ' ἔτραπον ὧραι 10.469
, cf. Hes. Th. 58; Διὸς ὧραι Od.24.344
, cf. Pi.O.4.2; ὁ κύκλος τῶν ὡρέων ἐς τὠυτὸ περιιών Hdt.2.4
, cf. 1.32; δυώδεκα μέρεα δασαμένους τῶν ὡρέων ἐς [τὸν ἐνιαυτόν] Id.2.4
; οὐ μεταλλάσσουσι αἱ ὧραι ib.77; περιτελλομέναις ὥραις S.OT 156
(lyr.); πάσαις ὥραις at all seasons, Id.Fr.592.6 (lyr.), Ar.Av. 696 (anap.); ὧραι ἐτῶν καὶ ἐνιαυτῶν Pl.Lg. 906c
, cf. Smp. 188a, etc.; τῆς.. ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ταύτης οὔσης, ἐν ᾗ ἀσθενοῦσιν ἄνθρωποι μάλιστα Th.7.47
; χαλεπὴ ὥ. a bad season, Pl.Prt. 344d; ἀ δ' ὤρα χαλέπα Alc.39
; ἡ ὥ. αὕτη this season, X.Cyn.7.1, cf. 5.6; κατὰ τὰς ὥρας according to the seasons, Arist.GA 786a31; οἱ περὶ τὴν ὥραν χρόνοι Id.Pol. 1335a37
.—Hom. and Hes. distinguish three seasons, and express each by the sg. ὥρη, with a word added to specify each:

a spring, ἔαρος.. ὥρη Il.6.148
; ὥρη εἰαρινή 2.471
, 16.643, Od.18.367, etc.; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., ἦρος ὥρα or ὧραι, Ar.Nu. 1008 (anap.), E.Cyc. 508 (lyr.); ὥρα νέα Ar.Eq. 419
; νεᾶνις E.Ph. 786
(lyr.); v. infr. 2.

b summer, θέρεος ὥρη Hes.Op. 584
, 664; ὥρα θερινή X.Cyn.9.20
, Pl.Epin. 987a, etc.

c winter, χείματος ὥρη Hes.Op. 450
; ὥρῃ χειμερίῃ Od.5.485
, Hes.Op. 494; χειμῶνος ὥρᾳ in winter, And.1.137; χιονοβόλος Plu.2.182e
.—A. also names three seasons, Pr. 454sq.; an Egyptian division of the year, acc. to D.S.1.26.—A fourth first appears in Alcm.76, θέρος καὶ χεῖμα κὠπώραν τρίταν καὶ τέτρατον τὸ ϝῆρ; and in Hp.Vict.3.68, χειμών, ἦρ, θέρος, φθινόπωρον; ὥρας φαίνομεν ἡμεῖς ἦρος χειμῶνος ὀπώρας Ar.Av. 709
(anap.); τετράμορφοι ὧραι E(?).Fr. 943 (hex.): later, seven seasons are named, ἔαρ, θέρος, ὀπώρα, φθινόπωρον, σπορητός, χειμών, φυταλιά Gal.17(1).17
.

2 esp. prime of the year, springtime, ὅσα φύλλα καὶ ἄνθεα γίγνεται ὥρῃ Od.9.51
, cf. Il.2.468; παρὰ τὴν καθεστηκυῖαν ὥραν Th.4.6
.

b in historians, the campaigning season, τὸν τῆς ὥρας εἰς τὸν περίπλουν χρόνον X.HG6.2.13
; esp. in the phrase ὥρα ἔτους, Th.2.52, 6.70, Pl.Phdr. 229a, Lg. 952e, D.50.23, Thphr.CP3.23.2; εἰς ἔτους ὥραν next season, Plu.Per.10.

3 the year generally, τῆς ὥρης μέσον θέρος Hdt.8.12
; ἐν τῇ πέρυσιν ὥρᾳ last year, D.56.3; εἰς ὥρας next year, Philem.116, Pl.Ep. 346c, LXX Ge.18.10, AP11.17 (Nicarch.), cf. Plu.Ages.22; also
εἰς ἄλλας ὥρας
hereafter, E.IA 122
(lyr.); ἐς τὰς ὥρας τὰς ἑτέρας Ar.Nu. 562
(lyr.); ἐκ τῶν ὡρῶν εἰς τὰς ὥρας Id.Th. 950
(anap.); κἠς ὥρας κἤπειτα next year and for ever, Theoc.15.74; also ὥραις ἐξ ὡρᾶν Isyll.25
; cf. ὥρασιν.

4 in pl., of the climate of a country, as determined by its seasons, Hdt.1.142, cf. 149, 4.199 (here perh. three harvest seasons); τὰς ὥ. κάλλιστα κεκρημένας Id.3.106
; cf. Pl.Criti. 111e, Phd. 111b; climatic conditions, Hdt.2.26.

II time of day, νυκτὸς ἐν ὥρῃ h.Merc.67
, 155, 400; αἱ ὧ. τῆς ἡμέρας the times of day, i.e. morning, noon, evening, and night, X.Mem.4.3.4; δι' ὥραν ἡμέρας by the time of day (fixed for meetings), D.Prooem.49, etc.; πᾶσαν ὥ. τῆς ἡμέρας Arist.Mete. 371b31
; μεσονυκτίοις ποθ' ὥραις Anacreont.31.1
: without ἡμέρας or νυκτός, ἑκάστης ἡμέρας μέχρι τρίτου μέρους ὥρας Pl. Lg. 784a
; τῆς ὥρας μικρὸν πρὸ δύντος ἡλίου X.HG7.2.22
; ψευσθεὶς τῆς ὥ. having mistaken the hour, And.1.38; ἐποίησαν ἔξω μέσων νυκτῶν τὴν ὥραν, i.e. they prolonged the day beyond midnight, D.54.26; τῆς ὥρας ἐγίγνετ' ὀψέ Id.21.84
; ὀψίτερον τῆς ὥ. PTeb. 793 xi 12
(ii B. C.);
πολλῆς ὥρας
it being late, Plb.5.8.3
; ἤδη ὥρα πολλή Ev.Marc.6.35
; ἄχρι πολλῆς ὥρας till late in the day, D.H.2.54.

b duration, interval or lapse of time, μετὰ ἱκανὴν ὥραν τοῦ κατενεχθῆναι τὸν πέλεκυν ἐξακούεται ἡ τῆς πληγῆς φωνή S.E.M.5.69
; length of time, term, Ἄρτεμις ἐννέ' ἐτῶν δεκάδας βίον Ἀρτεμιδώρῳ ἔκχρησεν, τρεῖς δ' ὥραι(date.) ἔτι προσέθηκε Προνοίη IG12(3).1350.3
(Thera, ii B. C.); ἐπὶ πολλὴν ὥ. for a long time, J.AJ8.4.4.

2 the νυχθήμερον was prob. first divided into twenty-four hours by Hipparch., ἐν πόσαις ὥραις ἰσημεριναῖς (equinoctial hours) ἕκαστον τῶν ἄστρων ἢ δύνει ἢ ἀνατέλλει 2.4.5
, cf. Ptol.Alm.3.9, 4.9, al.

b in ordinary life the day from sunrise to sunset was divided into twelve equal parts called ὧραι ( ὧραι καιρικαί when it was necessary to distinguish them from the ὧραι ἰσημεριναί, v. καιρικός 2 c), ἡμέρα ἡ.. δωδεκάωρος, τουτέστιν ἡ ἀπὸ ἀνατολῆς μέχρι δύσεως S.E.M.10.182
; οὐχὶ δώδεκά εἰσιν ὧραι τῆς ἡμέρας; Ev.Jo.11.9
; ὡράων ἀμφὶ δυωδεκάδι AP9.782
(Paul.Sil.); the time of day was commonly given without the Art., ὥρᾳ ᾱ PHamb.1.96.3
(ii A. D.), τρίτης ὥρας Plu.Rom.12
; ὀγδόης, ἐνάτης, δεκάτης ὥ., Id.Alex.60, Aem.22, Ant.68, etc.; but we have περὶ τὴν τρίτην ὥραν, περὶ τὴν ἑνδεκάτην, Ev.Matt.20.3,6, beside περὶ ἕκτην καὶ ἐννάτην ὥ. ib.5; χθὲς ὥραν ἑβδόμην Ev.Jo.4.52
, cf. IG5(1).1390.109 (Andania, i B. C.), etc.; ἐρωτᾷ σε Χαιρήμων δειπνῆσαι.. αὔριον, ἥτις ἐστὶν ιε, ἀπὸ ὥρας θ ¯ - to-morrow the 15th at 9 o'clock, POxy.110 (ii A. D.): prov., δωδεκάτης ὥ., as we say 'at the eleventh hour', Plu.Crass.17.

c τὰ δυώδεκα μέρεα τῆς ἡμέρης παρὰ Βαβυλωνίων ἔμαθον οἱ Ἕλληνες Hdt. 2.109
; here ἡμέρη means the νυχθήμερον, and the μέρεα were each = 2 ὧραι ἰσημεριναί; these double hours (Assyr. kaš-bu) are called ὧραι by Eudox., ἥμισυ ζῳδίου.., ὅ ἐστιν ὥρας ἥμισυ Ars14.11
, cf. 16.2; cf. δωδεκάωρος 11
.

III Astrol., degree of the zodiac rising at the nativity (cf. ὡρονόμος 11
, ὡροσκόπος 11
), ὥ. μεροποσπόρος, τεκνοσπόρος, Man.4.577, 597; ἐξ ὥρης ἐσορῶν Ζεὺς Ἑρμείην Jupiter in the ascendant in aspect with Mercury, Id.3.186, cf. 32, al.

B the fitting time or season for a thing (mostly without Art., even in [dialect] Att.), freq. in Hom. (v. infr.); ὥρα συνάπτει Pi.P.4.247
; ὧραι ἐπειγόμεναι Id.N.4.34
; ὅταν ὥ. ἥκῃ X.Mem.2.1.2
; but with Art., τῆς ὥ. ἐνθυμεῖσθαι Id.Cyn.8.6
: freq. in later writers, τῆς ὥρας ἐπιγενομένης Plb.2.34.3
, etc.

2 c. gen. rei, ὥρη κοίτοιο, μύθων, ὕπνου, the time for bed, tale-telling, or sleep, Od.3.334, 11.379, cf. Hdt.1.10; ὥρη δόρποιο Od.14.407
; περὶ ἀρίστου ὥραν Th.7.81
, X.HG1.1.13; πολυηράτου ἐς γάμου ὥρην Od.15.126
; ἐς γάμου ὥρην ἀπικέσθαι Hdt. 6.61
; γάμων ἔχειν ὥραν D.H.5.32
; so εἰς ἀνδρὸς ὥραν ἥκουσα time for a husband, Pl.Criti. 113d; ὥρη ἀρότου, ἀμήτου, Hes.Op. 460, 575; μέχρι ἀρότου ὥρης IG7.235.3
(Oropus, iv B. C.); καρπῶν ὧραι Ar.Ra. 1034
(anap.); ἡ ὥρα τῆς ὀχείας Arist.HA 509b20
; τοῦ φωλεύειν ib. 579a26, etc.; also ὥραν εἶχον παιδεύεσθαι I was of age to.. Is.9.28.

3 ὥρα [ἐστίν] c. inf., it is time to do a thing, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὥρη εὕδειν Od.11.330
, cf. 373; so also in Trag. and [dialect] Att., E.Ph. 1584, Heracl. 288 (anap.), Ar.Ec.30, Pl.Prt. 361e, 362a; so δοκεῖ οὐχ ὥρα εἶναι καθεύδειν X.An.1.3.11
, cf. HG7.2.13 (dub. l.): c. acc. et inf., ὥρα δ' ἐμπόρους καθιέναι ἄγκυραν A.Ch. 661
, cf. S.OT 466 (lyr.): c. dat. et inf., X.Cyr.4.5.1, Pl.Tht. 145b: in these phrases the inf. [tense] pres. is almost universal; the [tense] aor., however, occurs in Od.21.428, S.Aj. 245 (lyr.), Ar.Ach. 393 (where also ἐστί is added to ὥρα, as in Philyll.3, ἀφαιρεῖν ὥρα 'στὶν ἤδη τὰς τραπέζας); and the [tense] pf. in ὥρα πεπαῦσθαι Plu.2.728d
: sts. the inf. must be supplied, οὐδέ τί σε χρή, πρὶν ὥρη, καταλέχθαι Od.15.394
, cf. E.El. 112 (lyr.), Ar.Ec. 877; ὥρα κἠς οἶκον (i. e. ἰέναι εἰς οἶκον) Theoc.15.147.

4 in various adverb. usages,
τὴν ὥρην
at the right time, Hdt.2.2
, 8.19, X.Oec.20.16: but τὴν ὥ. at that hour, Hes.Sc. 401; ταύτην τὴν ὥραν at this season, X.Cyn.9.1; [ἡ ἶρις] πᾶσαν ὥραν γίγνεται τῆς ἡμέρας Arist.Mete. 371b31
; δείελον ὥρην παύομαι ἀμήτοιο A.R. 3.417
; ὥραν οὐδενὸς κοινὴν θεῶν at an hour.., A.Eu. 109, cf. E.Ba. 724, Aeschin.1.9; αὐτῆς ὥρας immediately, PMich. in Class.Phil.22.255(iii A. D.); ἐν ὥρῃ in due season, in good time, Od.17.176, Hdt. 1.31, cf. Pi.O.6.28, Ar.V. 242, etc.; also αἰεὶ εἰς ὥρας in successive seasons, Od.9.135; ἐς τὰς ὥρας for all time, Ar.Ra. 382 (lyr. cf. supr. A. 1.3) (hence in an acclamation [ε] ἰς ὥρας πᾶσι τοῖς τὴν πόλιν φιλοῦσιν hurrah for.., POxy.41.29 (iii/iv A. D.)); οἱ ὧδε χέζοντες εἰς ὥ. μὴ ἔλθοιεν Milet.2(3)
No.406, cf. ὥρασι; καθ' ὥραν Theoc.18.12
, Plb.1.45.4, cf. 3.93.6, etc.; opp. παρ' ὥρην AP7.534
(Alex.Aet. or Autom.), cf. Plu.2.784b, etc.:— πρὸ τῆς ὥρας X.Oec.20.16
; πρὸ ὥρας Luc.Luct.13
; πρὸ ὥρας τελευτῆσαι IG42(1).84.26
(Epid., i A. D.); πρὶν ὥρας Pi.P.4.43
(cf. πρίν A. 11.4
).

II metaph., the spring-time of life, the bloom of youth, Mimn.3.1; ὥραν ἐχούσας A.Supp. 997
, cf. Th.13, 535; παῖδας πρὸς τέρμασιν ὥρας Ar.Av. 705
(anap.); πάντες οἱ ἐν ὥρᾳ Pl.R. 474d
; οὐκ ἐνὥ., = πρεσβύτερος, Id.Phdr. 240d; ἐὰν ἐπὶ ὥρᾳ ᾖ Id.R. 474e
; ἕως ἂν ἐν ὥρᾳ ὦσι Id.Men. 76b
; παυσαμένου τῆς ὥ. prob. in Id.Phdr. 234a; ἀνθεῖν ἐν ὥ. Id.R. 475a
; τὴν ὥ. διαφυλάξαι ἄβατον τοῖς πονηροῖς Isoc.10.58
; λήγειν ὥρας, opp. ἀνθεῖν, Pl.Alc.1.131e; ἑς ἐπιγινόμενόν τι τέλος, οἷον τοῖς ἀκμαίοις ἡ ὥρα Arist.EN 1174b33
, cf. 1157a8.

2 freq. involving an idea of beauty, φεῦ φεῦ τῆς ὥρας τοῦ κάλλους Ar.Av. 1724
(lyr.); ὥρᾳ.. ἡλικίας λαμπρός Th.6.54
; κάλλει καὶ ὥρᾳ διενεγκόντες Aeschin.1.134
, cf. ib.158; καλὸς ὥρᾳ τε κεκραμένος Pi.O.10(11).104
, cf. X.Mem. 2.1.22, Pl.Lg. 837b;
ἀφ' ὥρας ἐργάζεσθαι
quaestum corpore facere, Plu.
Tim..14, cf. X.Mem..1.6.13, Smp.8.21; τὴν ὥ. πεπωληκότες Phld.Rh.1.344
S.:—then,

b generally, beauty, grace, elegance of style, D.H.Pomp.2, Plu.2.874b, etc.; γλυκύτης καὶ ὥ. Hermog.Id.2.3
, cf. Men.Rh.p.335 S., Him.Or.1.2; of beauty in general, χάρις καὶ ὥρα Plu.2.128d
.

3 Ὥρα personified, like Ἥβη, Pi.N.8.1.

III = τὰ ὡραῖα, the produce of the season, fruits of the year, ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐτρέφοντο X.HG2.1.1
.

C personified, αἱὯραι, the Hours, keepers of heaven's cloudgate, Il.5.749, 8.393; and ministers of the gods, ib. 433; Ζεῦ, τεαὶ.. Ὧραι Pi.O.4.2
; esp. of Aphrodite, h.Hom.6.5,12; also Ὧ. Διονυσιάδες, Καρνειάδες, Simon.148, Call.Ap.87; three in number, Eunomia, Dike, Eirene, daughters of Zeus and Themis, Hes.Th. 901; Ωραι πολυάνθεμοι Pi.O.13.17
, cf. Alex.261.6, Theoc.1.150, etc.: freq. joined with the Χάριτες, h.Ap. 194, Hes.Op.75; worshipped at Athens, Paus.9.35.1; at Argos, Id.2.20.5; at Attaleia, BMus.Inscr. 1044 (i B. C.).

Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὥρα
35 aqua

ăqua, ae (ACVA, Inscr. Grut. 593, 5; gen. aquāï, Plaut. Mil. 2, 6, 71; Lucr. 1, 284; 1. 285; 1, 307; 1, 454 et saep.; Verg. A. 7, 464; poët. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 9, 15; Cic. Arat. 179; Prud. Apoth. 702; the dat. aquaï also was used acc. to Charis. p. 538; v. Neue, Formenl. I. pp. 9, 11, 12; pp. 14 sq.;
aquae, as trisyl.,
Lucr. 6, 552 Lachm.), f. [cf. Sanscr. ap = water; Wallach. apa, and Goth. ahva = river; old Germ. Aha; Celt. achi; and the Gr. proper names Mess-api-oi and gê Api-a, and the Lat. Apuli, Apiola; prob. ultimately con. with Sanscr. ācus = swift, ācer, and ôkus, from the notion of quickly, easily moving. Curtius.].
I.
A.. Water, in its most gen. signif. (as an element, rainwater, river-water, sea-water, etc.; in class. Lat. often plur. to denote several streams, springs, in one place or region, and com. plur. in Vulg. O. T. after the Hebrew):
aër, aqua, terra, vapores, Quo pacto fiant,
Lucr. 1, 567: SI. AQVA. PLVVIA. NOCET, Fragm. of the XII. Tab. ap. Dig. 40, 7, 21; cf. Dirks. Transl. p. 486; so also of titles in the Digg. 39, 3; cf. ib. 43, 20:
pluvialis,
rain-water, Ov. M. 8, 335, and Sen. Q. N. 3, 1; so,
aquae pluviae,
Cic. Mur. 9, 22; Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 233; Quint. 10, 1, 109 (and pluviae absol., Cic. Att. 15, 16, B; Lucr. 6, 519; Verg. G. 1, 92; Ov. F. 2, 71; Plin. 2, 106, 110, § 227); so,
caelestes aquae,
Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 135; Liv. 4, 30, 7; 5, 12, 2; Plin. 17, 2, 2, § 14; so,
aquae de nubibus,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 22, 12: aquae nivis, snow-water, ib. Job, 9, 30:
fluvialis,
river-water, Col. 6, 22; so,
aqua fluminis,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
aquaï fons,
Lucr. 5, 602:
fons aquae,
Vulg. Gen. 24, 13:
fontes aquarum, ib. Joel, 1, 20: flumen aquae,
Verg. A. 11, 495:
fluvius aquae,
Vulg. Apoc. 22, 1:
rivus aquae,
Verg. E. 8, 87:
rivi aquarum,
Vulg. Isa. 32, 2:
torrens aquae,
ib. Macc. 5, 40; and plur., ib. Jer. 31, 9: dulcis, fresh-water, Fr. eau douce, Lucr. 6, 890:
fons aquae dulcis,
Cic. Verr. 4, 118; and plur.:
aquae dulces,
Verg. G. 4, 61; id. A. 1, 167: marina, sea-water (v. also salsus, amarus), Cic. Att. 1, 16; so,
aquae maris,
Vulg. Gen. 1, 22; ib. Exod. 15, 19:
dulcis et amara aqua,
ib. Jac. 3, 11:
perennis,
never-failing, Liv. 1, 21; and plur.:
quo in summo (loco) est aequata agri planities et aquae perennes,
Cic. Verr. 4, 107:
aqua profluens,
running-water, id. Off. 1, 16, 52; so,
currentes aquae,
Vulg. Isa. 30, 25; so,
aqua viva,
living-water, Varr. L. L. 5, 26, 35; Vulg. Gen. 26, 19; and plur.:
aquae vivae,
ib. Num. 19, 17;
and in a spiritual sense: aqua viva,
ib. Joan. 4, 10; so,
vitae,
ib. Apoc. 22, 17:
aquae viventes,
ib. Lev. 14, 5:
stagna aquae,
standing-water, Prop. 4, 17, 2; and plur., Vulg. Psa. 106, 35; so, stativae aquae, Varr. ap. Non. p. 217, 2:
aquae de puteis,
well-water, Vulg. Num. 20, 17:
aqua de cisternā,
cisternwater, ib. 2 Reg. 23, 16; so,
aqua cisternae,
ib. Isa. 36, 16:
aquae pessimae,
ib. 4 Reg. 2, 19:
aqua recens,
Verg. A. 6, 636:
turbida,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
crassa,
ib. 2 Macc. 1, 20:
munda,
ib. Heb. 10, 22:
purissima,
ib. Ezech. 34, 18:
aquae calidae,
warm-water, ib. Gen. 36, 24; and absol.:
calida,
Cato, R. R. 156, 3; Plin. 25, 7, 38, § 77; Tac. G. 22;
and contr.: calda,
Col. 6, 13; Plin. 23, 4, 41, § 83: aqua fervens, boiling-water:
aliquem aquā ferventi perfundere,
Cic. Verr. 1, 67:
aqua frigida,
cold-water, Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 37; Vulg. Prov. 25, 23; ib. Matt. 10, 42; and absol.:
frigida,
Cels. 1, 5; Plin. Ep. 3, 5, 11; Quint. 5, 11, 31: aqua decocta, water boiled and then cooled with ice or snow, Mart. 14, 116; and absol.:
decocta,
Juv. 5, 50; Suet. Ner. 48 al.—
B.
Particular phrases.
1.
Praebere aquam, to invite to a feast, to entertain (with ref. to the use of water at table for washing and drinking), Hor. S. 1, 4, 88 (cf. id. ib. 2, 2, 69).—
2.
Aquam aspergere alicui, to give new life or courage, to animate, refresh, revive (the fig. taken from sprinkling one who is in a swoon):
ah, adspersisti aquam! Jam rediit animus,
Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 15.—
3.
Aqua et ignis, to express the most common necessaries of life:
non aquā, non igni, ut aiunt, locis pluribus utimur quam amicitiā,
Cic. Lael. 6, 22.—Hence aquā et igni interdicere alicui, to deny intercourse or familiarity with one, to exclude from civil society, to banish, Cic. Phil. 1, 9; so the bride, on the day of marriage, received from the bridegroom aqua et ignis, as a symbol of their union: aquā et igni tam interdici solet damnatis quam accipiunt nuptae, videlicet quia hae duae res humanam vitam maxime continent, Paul. ex Fest. p. 3 Müll. (this custom is differently explained in [p. 148] Varr. L. L. 5, 9, 18): aquam et terram petere, of an enemy (like gên kai hudôr aitein), to demand submission, Liv. 35, 17:
aquam ipsos (hostes) terramque poscentium, ut neque fontium haustum nec solitos cibos relinquerent deditis,
Curt. 3, 10, 8.— Provv.
a.
Ex uno puteo similior numquam potis Aqua aquaï
sumi quam haec est atque ista hospita,
you can't find two peas more like, Plaut. Mil. 1, 6, 70 sq. —
b.
In aquā scribere = kath hudatos graphein, to write in water, of something transient, useless:
cupido quod dicit amanti, In vento et rapidā scribere oportet aquā,
Cat. 70, 4 (cf. Keats' epitaph on himself: here lies one whose name was writ in water; and the Germ., etwas hinter die Feueresse schreiben).—
II.
Water, in a more restricted sense.
A.
The sea:
coge, ut ad aquam tibi frumentum Ennenses metiantur,
on the sea-coast, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 83:
laborum quos ego sum terrā, quos ego passus aquā,
Ov. P. 2, 7, 30:
findite remigio aquas!
id. F. 3, 586.— Trop.: Venimus in portum... Naviget hinc aliā jam mihi linter aquā, in other waters let my bark now sail (cf. Milton in the Lycidas:
To-morrow to fresh woods and pastures new),
Ov. F. 2, 864.—
B.
= la. cus, a lake:
Albanae aquae deductio,
Cic. Div. 1, 44 fin. —
C.
A stream, a river. in Tuscae gurgite mersus aquae, i. e. Albula, Ov. F. 4, 48:
alii in aquam caeci ruebant,
Liv. 1, 27:
sonitus multarum aquarum,
of many streams, Vulg. Isa. 17, 12; ib. Apoc. 1, 15; 19, 6:
lignum, quod plantatum est secus decursus aquarum,
along the watercourses, ib. Psa. 1, 3.—
D.
Rain:
cornix augur aquae,
Hor. C. 3, 17, 12:
deūm genitor effusis aethera siccat aquis,
Ov. F. 3, 286:
multā terra madescit aquā,
id. ib. 6, 198:
aquae magnae bis eo anno fuerunt,
heavy rains, a flood, inundation, Liv. 24, 9; 38, 28.—
E.
In the plur., medicinal springs, waters, baths.
1.
In gen.:
ad aquas venire,
Cic. Planc. 27, 65; id. Fam. 16, 24, 2:
aquae caldae,
Varr. L. L. 9, 69, p. 219 Müll.:
aquae calidae,
Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 227:
aquae medicatae,
Sen. Q. N. 3, 25:
aquae Salutiferae,
Mart. 5, 1.—Hence,
2.
As prop. noun, Waters. Some of the most important were.
a.
Ăquae Ăpollĭnāres, in Etruria, prob. the Phoebi vada of Mart. 6, 42, 7, now Bagni di Stigliano, Tab. Peut.—
b.
Ăquae Aurēlĭae, in the Black Forest in Germany, now Baden-Baden, Inscr.—
c.
Ăquae Baiae, in Campania, Prop. 1, 11, 30; earlier called Ăquae Cūmānae, Liv. 41, 16.—
d.
Ăquae Călĭdae,
(α).
In Britain, now Bath; also called Ăquae Sōlis, Itin Anton.—
(β).
In Zeugitana on the Gulf of Carthage, now Hammam Gurbos, Liv. 30, 24, 9; Tab. Peut.—
(γ).
In Gallia, now Vichy on the Allier, Tab. Theod.—
e.
Ăquae Cĭcĕrōnĭānae, at Cicero's villa at Puteoli, Plin. 31, 2, 3, § 6.—
f.
Ăquae Mattĭăcae, among the Mattiaci in Germany, now Wiesbaden, Amm. 29, 4, also called Fontes Mattĭăci in Plin. 31, 2, 17, § 20.—
g.
Ăquae Sextĭae, near Massilia, once a famous watering-place, now Aix, Liv Epit 61; Vell. 1, 15; Plin. 3, 4, 5, § 36.—
h.
Ăquae Tauri or Tauri Thermae, in Etruria, now Bagni di Ferrata, Plin. 3, 5, 8, § 52. V. Smith, Dict. Geog., s. v. Aquae.—
F.
The water in the water-clock. From the use of this clock in regulating the length of speeches, etc. (cf. clepsydra), arose the tropical phrases,
(α).
Aquam dare, to give the advocate time for speaking, Plin. Ep. 6, 2, 7.—
(β).
Aquam perdere, to spend time unprofitably, to waste it, Quint. 11, 3, 52.—
(γ).
Aqua haeret, the water stops, i.e. I am at a loss, Cic. Off. 3, 33, 117:
in hac causā mihi aqua haeret,
id. ad Q. Fr. 2, 7.—
G.
Aqua intercus, the water under the skin of a dropsical person;
hence, as med. t.,
the dropsy, Plaut. Men. 5, 4, 3:
medicamentum ad aquam intercutem dare,
Cic. Off. 3, 24, 92:
decessit morbo aquae intercutis,
Suet. Ner 5; cf. Cels. 2, 8.— Trop.: aquam in animo habere intercutem, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 37, 3.—
III.
Aqua, the name of a constellation, Gr. Hudôr:
hae tenues stellae perhibentur nomine Aquāī,
Cic. Arat. 179 (as translation of tous pantas kaleousin Hudôr); v. Orell. ad h. l.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > aqua
36 Aquae Apollinares

ăqua, ae (ACVA, Inscr. Grut. 593, 5; gen. aquāï, Plaut. Mil. 2, 6, 71; Lucr. 1, 284; 1. 285; 1, 307; 1, 454 et saep.; Verg. A. 7, 464; poët. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 9, 15; Cic. Arat. 179; Prud. Apoth. 702; the dat. aquaï also was used acc. to Charis. p. 538; v. Neue, Formenl. I. pp. 9, 11, 12; pp. 14 sq.;
aquae, as trisyl.,
Lucr. 6, 552 Lachm.), f. [cf. Sanscr. ap = water; Wallach. apa, and Goth. ahva = river; old Germ. Aha; Celt. achi; and the Gr. proper names Mess-api-oi and gê Api-a, and the Lat. Apuli, Apiola; prob. ultimately con. with Sanscr. ācus = swift, ācer, and ôkus, from the notion of quickly, easily moving. Curtius.].
I.
A.. Water, in its most gen. signif. (as an element, rainwater, river-water, sea-water, etc.; in class. Lat. often plur. to denote several streams, springs, in one place or region, and com. plur. in Vulg. O. T. after the Hebrew):
aër, aqua, terra, vapores, Quo pacto fiant,
Lucr. 1, 567: SI. AQVA. PLVVIA. NOCET, Fragm. of the XII. Tab. ap. Dig. 40, 7, 21; cf. Dirks. Transl. p. 486; so also of titles in the Digg. 39, 3; cf. ib. 43, 20:
pluvialis,
rain-water, Ov. M. 8, 335, and Sen. Q. N. 3, 1; so,
aquae pluviae,
Cic. Mur. 9, 22; Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 233; Quint. 10, 1, 109 (and pluviae absol., Cic. Att. 15, 16, B; Lucr. 6, 519; Verg. G. 1, 92; Ov. F. 2, 71; Plin. 2, 106, 110, § 227); so,
caelestes aquae,
Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 135; Liv. 4, 30, 7; 5, 12, 2; Plin. 17, 2, 2, § 14; so,
aquae de nubibus,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 22, 12: aquae nivis, snow-water, ib. Job, 9, 30:
fluvialis,
river-water, Col. 6, 22; so,
aqua fluminis,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
aquaï fons,
Lucr. 5, 602:
fons aquae,
Vulg. Gen. 24, 13:
fontes aquarum, ib. Joel, 1, 20: flumen aquae,
Verg. A. 11, 495:
fluvius aquae,
Vulg. Apoc. 22, 1:
rivus aquae,
Verg. E. 8, 87:
rivi aquarum,
Vulg. Isa. 32, 2:
torrens aquae,
ib. Macc. 5, 40; and plur., ib. Jer. 31, 9: dulcis, fresh-water, Fr. eau douce, Lucr. 6, 890:
fons aquae dulcis,
Cic. Verr. 4, 118; and plur.:
aquae dulces,
Verg. G. 4, 61; id. A. 1, 167: marina, sea-water (v. also salsus, amarus), Cic. Att. 1, 16; so,
aquae maris,
Vulg. Gen. 1, 22; ib. Exod. 15, 19:
dulcis et amara aqua,
ib. Jac. 3, 11:
perennis,
never-failing, Liv. 1, 21; and plur.:
quo in summo (loco) est aequata agri planities et aquae perennes,
Cic. Verr. 4, 107:
aqua profluens,
running-water, id. Off. 1, 16, 52; so,
currentes aquae,
Vulg. Isa. 30, 25; so,
aqua viva,
living-water, Varr. L. L. 5, 26, 35; Vulg. Gen. 26, 19; and plur.:
aquae vivae,
ib. Num. 19, 17;
and in a spiritual sense: aqua viva,
ib. Joan. 4, 10; so,
vitae,
ib. Apoc. 22, 17:
aquae viventes,
ib. Lev. 14, 5:
stagna aquae,
standing-water, Prop. 4, 17, 2; and plur., Vulg. Psa. 106, 35; so, stativae aquae, Varr. ap. Non. p. 217, 2:
aquae de puteis,
well-water, Vulg. Num. 20, 17:
aqua de cisternā,
cisternwater, ib. 2 Reg. 23, 16; so,
aqua cisternae,
ib. Isa. 36, 16:
aquae pessimae,
ib. 4 Reg. 2, 19:
aqua recens,
Verg. A. 6, 636:
turbida,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
crassa,
ib. 2 Macc. 1, 20:
munda,
ib. Heb. 10, 22:
purissima,
ib. Ezech. 34, 18:
aquae calidae,
warm-water, ib. Gen. 36, 24; and absol.:
calida,
Cato, R. R. 156, 3; Plin. 25, 7, 38, § 77; Tac. G. 22;
and contr.: calda,
Col. 6, 13; Plin. 23, 4, 41, § 83: aqua fervens, boiling-water:
aliquem aquā ferventi perfundere,
Cic. Verr. 1, 67:
aqua frigida,
cold-water, Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 37; Vulg. Prov. 25, 23; ib. Matt. 10, 42; and absol.:
frigida,
Cels. 1, 5; Plin. Ep. 3, 5, 11; Quint. 5, 11, 31: aqua decocta, water boiled and then cooled with ice or snow, Mart. 14, 116; and absol.:
decocta,
Juv. 5, 50; Suet. Ner. 48 al.—
B.
Particular phrases.
1.
Praebere aquam, to invite to a feast, to entertain (with ref. to the use of water at table for washing and drinking), Hor. S. 1, 4, 88 (cf. id. ib. 2, 2, 69).—
2.
Aquam aspergere alicui, to give new life or courage, to animate, refresh, revive (the fig. taken from sprinkling one who is in a swoon):
ah, adspersisti aquam! Jam rediit animus,
Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 15.—
3.
Aqua et ignis, to express the most common necessaries of life:
non aquā, non igni, ut aiunt, locis pluribus utimur quam amicitiā,
Cic. Lael. 6, 22.—Hence aquā et igni interdicere alicui, to deny intercourse or familiarity with one, to exclude from civil society, to banish, Cic. Phil. 1, 9; so the bride, on the day of marriage, received from the bridegroom aqua et ignis, as a symbol of their union: aquā et igni tam interdici solet damnatis quam accipiunt nuptae, videlicet quia hae duae res humanam vitam maxime continent, Paul. ex Fest. p. 3 Müll. (this custom is differently explained in [p. 148] Varr. L. L. 5, 9, 18): aquam et terram petere, of an enemy (like gên kai hudôr aitein), to demand submission, Liv. 35, 17:
aquam ipsos (hostes) terramque poscentium, ut neque fontium haustum nec solitos cibos relinquerent deditis,
Curt. 3, 10, 8.— Provv.
a.
Ex uno puteo similior numquam potis Aqua aquaï
sumi quam haec est atque ista hospita,
you can't find two peas more like, Plaut. Mil. 1, 6, 70 sq. —
b.
In aquā scribere = kath hudatos graphein, to write in water, of something transient, useless:
cupido quod dicit amanti, In vento et rapidā scribere oportet aquā,
Cat. 70, 4 (cf. Keats' epitaph on himself: here lies one whose name was writ in water; and the Germ., etwas hinter die Feueresse schreiben).—
II.
Water, in a more restricted sense.
A.
The sea:
coge, ut ad aquam tibi frumentum Ennenses metiantur,
on the sea-coast, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 83:
laborum quos ego sum terrā, quos ego passus aquā,
Ov. P. 2, 7, 30:
findite remigio aquas!
id. F. 3, 586.— Trop.: Venimus in portum... Naviget hinc aliā jam mihi linter aquā, in other waters let my bark now sail (cf. Milton in the Lycidas:
To-morrow to fresh woods and pastures new),
Ov. F. 2, 864.—
B.
= la. cus, a lake:
Albanae aquae deductio,
Cic. Div. 1, 44 fin. —
C.
A stream, a river. in Tuscae gurgite mersus aquae, i. e. Albula, Ov. F. 4, 48:
alii in aquam caeci ruebant,
Liv. 1, 27:
sonitus multarum aquarum,
of many streams, Vulg. Isa. 17, 12; ib. Apoc. 1, 15; 19, 6:
lignum, quod plantatum est secus decursus aquarum,
along the watercourses, ib. Psa. 1, 3.—
D.
Rain:
cornix augur aquae,
Hor. C. 3, 17, 12:
deūm genitor effusis aethera siccat aquis,
Ov. F. 3, 286:
multā terra madescit aquā,
id. ib. 6, 198:
aquae magnae bis eo anno fuerunt,
heavy rains, a flood, inundation, Liv. 24, 9; 38, 28.—
E.
In the plur., medicinal springs, waters, baths.
1.
In gen.:
ad aquas venire,
Cic. Planc. 27, 65; id. Fam. 16, 24, 2:
aquae caldae,
Varr. L. L. 9, 69, p. 219 Müll.:
aquae calidae,
Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 227:
aquae medicatae,
Sen. Q. N. 3, 25:
aquae Salutiferae,
Mart. 5, 1.—Hence,
2.
As prop. noun, Waters. Some of the most important were.
a.
Ăquae Ăpollĭnāres, in Etruria, prob. the Phoebi vada of Mart. 6, 42, 7, now Bagni di Stigliano, Tab. Peut.—
b.
Ăquae Aurēlĭae, in the Black Forest in Germany, now Baden-Baden, Inscr.—
c.
Ăquae Baiae, in Campania, Prop. 1, 11, 30; earlier called Ăquae Cūmānae, Liv. 41, 16.—
d.
Ăquae Călĭdae,
(α).
In Britain, now Bath; also called Ăquae Sōlis, Itin Anton.—
(β).
In Zeugitana on the Gulf of Carthage, now Hammam Gurbos, Liv. 30, 24, 9; Tab. Peut.—
(γ).
In Gallia, now Vichy on the Allier, Tab. Theod.—
e.
Ăquae Cĭcĕrōnĭānae, at Cicero's villa at Puteoli, Plin. 31, 2, 3, § 6.—
f.
Ăquae Mattĭăcae, among the Mattiaci in Germany, now Wiesbaden, Amm. 29, 4, also called Fontes Mattĭăci in Plin. 31, 2, 17, § 20.—
g.
Ăquae Sextĭae, near Massilia, once a famous watering-place, now Aix, Liv Epit 61; Vell. 1, 15; Plin. 3, 4, 5, § 36.—
h.
Ăquae Tauri or Tauri Thermae, in Etruria, now Bagni di Ferrata, Plin. 3, 5, 8, § 52. V. Smith, Dict. Geog., s. v. Aquae.—
F.
The water in the water-clock. From the use of this clock in regulating the length of speeches, etc. (cf. clepsydra), arose the tropical phrases,
(α).
Aquam dare, to give the advocate time for speaking, Plin. Ep. 6, 2, 7.—
(β).
Aquam perdere, to spend time unprofitably, to waste it, Quint. 11, 3, 52.—
(γ).
Aqua haeret, the water stops, i.e. I am at a loss, Cic. Off. 3, 33, 117:
in hac causā mihi aqua haeret,
id. ad Q. Fr. 2, 7.—
G.
Aqua intercus, the water under the skin of a dropsical person;
hence, as med. t.,
the dropsy, Plaut. Men. 5, 4, 3:
medicamentum ad aquam intercutem dare,
Cic. Off. 3, 24, 92:
decessit morbo aquae intercutis,
Suet. Ner 5; cf. Cels. 2, 8.— Trop.: aquam in animo habere intercutem, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 37, 3.—
III.
Aqua, the name of a constellation, Gr. Hudôr:
hae tenues stellae perhibentur nomine Aquāī,
Cic. Arat. 179 (as translation of tous pantas kaleousin Hudôr); v. Orell. ad h. l.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > Aquae Apollinares
37 Aquae Aureliae

ăqua, ae (ACVA, Inscr. Grut. 593, 5; gen. aquāï, Plaut. Mil. 2, 6, 71; Lucr. 1, 284; 1. 285; 1, 307; 1, 454 et saep.; Verg. A. 7, 464; poët. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 9, 15; Cic. Arat. 179; Prud. Apoth. 702; the dat. aquaï also was used acc. to Charis. p. 538; v. Neue, Formenl. I. pp. 9, 11, 12; pp. 14 sq.;
aquae, as trisyl.,
Lucr. 6, 552 Lachm.), f. [cf. Sanscr. ap = water; Wallach. apa, and Goth. ahva = river; old Germ. Aha; Celt. achi; and the Gr. proper names Mess-api-oi and gê Api-a, and the Lat. Apuli, Apiola; prob. ultimately con. with Sanscr. ācus = swift, ācer, and ôkus, from the notion of quickly, easily moving. Curtius.].
I.
A.. Water, in its most gen. signif. (as an element, rainwater, river-water, sea-water, etc.; in class. Lat. often plur. to denote several streams, springs, in one place or region, and com. plur. in Vulg. O. T. after the Hebrew):
aër, aqua, terra, vapores, Quo pacto fiant,
Lucr. 1, 567: SI. AQVA. PLVVIA. NOCET, Fragm. of the XII. Tab. ap. Dig. 40, 7, 21; cf. Dirks. Transl. p. 486; so also of titles in the Digg. 39, 3; cf. ib. 43, 20:
pluvialis,
rain-water, Ov. M. 8, 335, and Sen. Q. N. 3, 1; so,
aquae pluviae,
Cic. Mur. 9, 22; Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 233; Quint. 10, 1, 109 (and pluviae absol., Cic. Att. 15, 16, B; Lucr. 6, 519; Verg. G. 1, 92; Ov. F. 2, 71; Plin. 2, 106, 110, § 227); so,
caelestes aquae,
Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 135; Liv. 4, 30, 7; 5, 12, 2; Plin. 17, 2, 2, § 14; so,
aquae de nubibus,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 22, 12: aquae nivis, snow-water, ib. Job, 9, 30:
fluvialis,
river-water, Col. 6, 22; so,
aqua fluminis,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
aquaï fons,
Lucr. 5, 602:
fons aquae,
Vulg. Gen. 24, 13:
fontes aquarum, ib. Joel, 1, 20: flumen aquae,
Verg. A. 11, 495:
fluvius aquae,
Vulg. Apoc. 22, 1:
rivus aquae,
Verg. E. 8, 87:
rivi aquarum,
Vulg. Isa. 32, 2:
torrens aquae,
ib. Macc. 5, 40; and plur., ib. Jer. 31, 9: dulcis, fresh-water, Fr. eau douce, Lucr. 6, 890:
fons aquae dulcis,
Cic. Verr. 4, 118; and plur.:
aquae dulces,
Verg. G. 4, 61; id. A. 1, 167: marina, sea-water (v. also salsus, amarus), Cic. Att. 1, 16; so,
aquae maris,
Vulg. Gen. 1, 22; ib. Exod. 15, 19:
dulcis et amara aqua,
ib. Jac. 3, 11:
perennis,
never-failing, Liv. 1, 21; and plur.:
quo in summo (loco) est aequata agri planities et aquae perennes,
Cic. Verr. 4, 107:
aqua profluens,
running-water, id. Off. 1, 16, 52; so,
currentes aquae,
Vulg. Isa. 30, 25; so,
aqua viva,
living-water, Varr. L. L. 5, 26, 35; Vulg. Gen. 26, 19; and plur.:
aquae vivae,
ib. Num. 19, 17;
and in a spiritual sense: aqua viva,
ib. Joan. 4, 10; so,
vitae,
ib. Apoc. 22, 17:
aquae viventes,
ib. Lev. 14, 5:
stagna aquae,
standing-water, Prop. 4, 17, 2; and plur., Vulg. Psa. 106, 35; so, stativae aquae, Varr. ap. Non. p. 217, 2:
aquae de puteis,
well-water, Vulg. Num. 20, 17:
aqua de cisternā,
cisternwater, ib. 2 Reg. 23, 16; so,
aqua cisternae,
ib. Isa. 36, 16:
aquae pessimae,
ib. 4 Reg. 2, 19:
aqua recens,
Verg. A. 6, 636:
turbida,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
crassa,
ib. 2 Macc. 1, 20:
munda,
ib. Heb. 10, 22:
purissima,
ib. Ezech. 34, 18:
aquae calidae,
warm-water, ib. Gen. 36, 24; and absol.:
calida,
Cato, R. R. 156, 3; Plin. 25, 7, 38, § 77; Tac. G. 22;
and contr.: calda,
Col. 6, 13; Plin. 23, 4, 41, § 83: aqua fervens, boiling-water:
aliquem aquā ferventi perfundere,
Cic. Verr. 1, 67:
aqua frigida,
cold-water, Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 37; Vulg. Prov. 25, 23; ib. Matt. 10, 42; and absol.:
frigida,
Cels. 1, 5; Plin. Ep. 3, 5, 11; Quint. 5, 11, 31: aqua decocta, water boiled and then cooled with ice or snow, Mart. 14, 116; and absol.:
decocta,
Juv. 5, 50; Suet. Ner. 48 al.—
B.
Particular phrases.
1.
Praebere aquam, to invite to a feast, to entertain (with ref. to the use of water at table for washing and drinking), Hor. S. 1, 4, 88 (cf. id. ib. 2, 2, 69).—
2.
Aquam aspergere alicui, to give new life or courage, to animate, refresh, revive (the fig. taken from sprinkling one who is in a swoon):
ah, adspersisti aquam! Jam rediit animus,
Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 15.—
3.
Aqua et ignis, to express the most common necessaries of life:
non aquā, non igni, ut aiunt, locis pluribus utimur quam amicitiā,
Cic. Lael. 6, 22.—Hence aquā et igni interdicere alicui, to deny intercourse or familiarity with one, to exclude from civil society, to banish, Cic. Phil. 1, 9; so the bride, on the day of marriage, received from the bridegroom aqua et ignis, as a symbol of their union: aquā et igni tam interdici solet damnatis quam accipiunt nuptae, videlicet quia hae duae res humanam vitam maxime continent, Paul. ex Fest. p. 3 Müll. (this custom is differently explained in [p. 148] Varr. L. L. 5, 9, 18): aquam et terram petere, of an enemy (like gên kai hudôr aitein), to demand submission, Liv. 35, 17:
aquam ipsos (hostes) terramque poscentium, ut neque fontium haustum nec solitos cibos relinquerent deditis,
Curt. 3, 10, 8.— Provv.
a.
Ex uno puteo similior numquam potis Aqua aquaï
sumi quam haec est atque ista hospita,
you can't find two peas more like, Plaut. Mil. 1, 6, 70 sq. —
b.
In aquā scribere = kath hudatos graphein, to write in water, of something transient, useless:
cupido quod dicit amanti, In vento et rapidā scribere oportet aquā,
Cat. 70, 4 (cf. Keats' epitaph on himself: here lies one whose name was writ in water; and the Germ., etwas hinter die Feueresse schreiben).—
II.
Water, in a more restricted sense.
A.
The sea:
coge, ut ad aquam tibi frumentum Ennenses metiantur,
on the sea-coast, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 83:
laborum quos ego sum terrā, quos ego passus aquā,
Ov. P. 2, 7, 30:
findite remigio aquas!
id. F. 3, 586.— Trop.: Venimus in portum... Naviget hinc aliā jam mihi linter aquā, in other waters let my bark now sail (cf. Milton in the Lycidas:
To-morrow to fresh woods and pastures new),
Ov. F. 2, 864.—
B.
= la. cus, a lake:
Albanae aquae deductio,
Cic. Div. 1, 44 fin. —
C.
A stream, a river. in Tuscae gurgite mersus aquae, i. e. Albula, Ov. F. 4, 48:
alii in aquam caeci ruebant,
Liv. 1, 27:
sonitus multarum aquarum,
of many streams, Vulg. Isa. 17, 12; ib. Apoc. 1, 15; 19, 6:
lignum, quod plantatum est secus decursus aquarum,
along the watercourses, ib. Psa. 1, 3.—
D.
Rain:
cornix augur aquae,
Hor. C. 3, 17, 12:
deūm genitor effusis aethera siccat aquis,
Ov. F. 3, 286:
multā terra madescit aquā,
id. ib. 6, 198:
aquae magnae bis eo anno fuerunt,
heavy rains, a flood, inundation, Liv. 24, 9; 38, 28.—
E.
In the plur., medicinal springs, waters, baths.
1.
In gen.:
ad aquas venire,
Cic. Planc. 27, 65; id. Fam. 16, 24, 2:
aquae caldae,
Varr. L. L. 9, 69, p. 219 Müll.:
aquae calidae,
Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 227:
aquae medicatae,
Sen. Q. N. 3, 25:
aquae Salutiferae,
Mart. 5, 1.—Hence,
2.
As prop. noun, Waters. Some of the most important were.
a.
Ăquae Ăpollĭnāres, in Etruria, prob. the Phoebi vada of Mart. 6, 42, 7, now Bagni di Stigliano, Tab. Peut.—
b.
Ăquae Aurēlĭae, in the Black Forest in Germany, now Baden-Baden, Inscr.—
c.
Ăquae Baiae, in Campania, Prop. 1, 11, 30; earlier called Ăquae Cūmānae, Liv. 41, 16.—
d.
Ăquae Călĭdae,
(α).
In Britain, now Bath; also called Ăquae Sōlis, Itin Anton.—
(β).
In Zeugitana on the Gulf of Carthage, now Hammam Gurbos, Liv. 30, 24, 9; Tab. Peut.—
(γ).
In Gallia, now Vichy on the Allier, Tab. Theod.—
e.
Ăquae Cĭcĕrōnĭānae, at Cicero's villa at Puteoli, Plin. 31, 2, 3, § 6.—
f.
Ăquae Mattĭăcae, among the Mattiaci in Germany, now Wiesbaden, Amm. 29, 4, also called Fontes Mattĭăci in Plin. 31, 2, 17, § 20.—
g.
Ăquae Sextĭae, near Massilia, once a famous watering-place, now Aix, Liv Epit 61; Vell. 1, 15; Plin. 3, 4, 5, § 36.—
h.
Ăquae Tauri or Tauri Thermae, in Etruria, now Bagni di Ferrata, Plin. 3, 5, 8, § 52. V. Smith, Dict. Geog., s. v. Aquae.—
F.
The water in the water-clock. From the use of this clock in regulating the length of speeches, etc. (cf. clepsydra), arose the tropical phrases,
(α).
Aquam dare, to give the advocate time for speaking, Plin. Ep. 6, 2, 7.—
(β).
Aquam perdere, to spend time unprofitably, to waste it, Quint. 11, 3, 52.—
(γ).
Aqua haeret, the water stops, i.e. I am at a loss, Cic. Off. 3, 33, 117:
in hac causā mihi aqua haeret,
id. ad Q. Fr. 2, 7.—
G.
Aqua intercus, the water under the skin of a dropsical person;
hence, as med. t.,
the dropsy, Plaut. Men. 5, 4, 3:
medicamentum ad aquam intercutem dare,
Cic. Off. 3, 24, 92:
decessit morbo aquae intercutis,
Suet. Ner 5; cf. Cels. 2, 8.— Trop.: aquam in animo habere intercutem, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 37, 3.—
III.
Aqua, the name of a constellation, Gr. Hudôr:
hae tenues stellae perhibentur nomine Aquāī,
Cic. Arat. 179 (as translation of tous pantas kaleousin Hudôr); v. Orell. ad h. l.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > Aquae Aureliae
38 Aquae Baiae

ăqua, ae (ACVA, Inscr. Grut. 593, 5; gen. aquāï, Plaut. Mil. 2, 6, 71; Lucr. 1, 284; 1. 285; 1, 307; 1, 454 et saep.; Verg. A. 7, 464; poët. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 9, 15; Cic. Arat. 179; Prud. Apoth. 702; the dat. aquaï also was used acc. to Charis. p. 538; v. Neue, Formenl. I. pp. 9, 11, 12; pp. 14 sq.;
aquae, as trisyl.,
Lucr. 6, 552 Lachm.), f. [cf. Sanscr. ap = water; Wallach. apa, and Goth. ahva = river; old Germ. Aha; Celt. achi; and the Gr. proper names Mess-api-oi and gê Api-a, and the Lat. Apuli, Apiola; prob. ultimately con. with Sanscr. ācus = swift, ācer, and ôkus, from the notion of quickly, easily moving. Curtius.].
I.
A.. Water, in its most gen. signif. (as an element, rainwater, river-water, sea-water, etc.; in class. Lat. often plur. to denote several streams, springs, in one place or region, and com. plur. in Vulg. O. T. after the Hebrew):
aër, aqua, terra, vapores, Quo pacto fiant,
Lucr. 1, 567: SI. AQVA. PLVVIA. NOCET, Fragm. of the XII. Tab. ap. Dig. 40, 7, 21; cf. Dirks. Transl. p. 486; so also of titles in the Digg. 39, 3; cf. ib. 43, 20:
pluvialis,
rain-water, Ov. M. 8, 335, and Sen. Q. N. 3, 1; so,
aquae pluviae,
Cic. Mur. 9, 22; Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 233; Quint. 10, 1, 109 (and pluviae absol., Cic. Att. 15, 16, B; Lucr. 6, 519; Verg. G. 1, 92; Ov. F. 2, 71; Plin. 2, 106, 110, § 227); so,
caelestes aquae,
Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 135; Liv. 4, 30, 7; 5, 12, 2; Plin. 17, 2, 2, § 14; so,
aquae de nubibus,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 22, 12: aquae nivis, snow-water, ib. Job, 9, 30:
fluvialis,
river-water, Col. 6, 22; so,
aqua fluminis,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
aquaï fons,
Lucr. 5, 602:
fons aquae,
Vulg. Gen. 24, 13:
fontes aquarum, ib. Joel, 1, 20: flumen aquae,
Verg. A. 11, 495:
fluvius aquae,
Vulg. Apoc. 22, 1:
rivus aquae,
Verg. E. 8, 87:
rivi aquarum,
Vulg. Isa. 32, 2:
torrens aquae,
ib. Macc. 5, 40; and plur., ib. Jer. 31, 9: dulcis, fresh-water, Fr. eau douce, Lucr. 6, 890:
fons aquae dulcis,
Cic. Verr. 4, 118; and plur.:
aquae dulces,
Verg. G. 4, 61; id. A. 1, 167: marina, sea-water (v. also salsus, amarus), Cic. Att. 1, 16; so,
aquae maris,
Vulg. Gen. 1, 22; ib. Exod. 15, 19:
dulcis et amara aqua,
ib. Jac. 3, 11:
perennis,
never-failing, Liv. 1, 21; and plur.:
quo in summo (loco) est aequata agri planities et aquae perennes,
Cic. Verr. 4, 107:
aqua profluens,
running-water, id. Off. 1, 16, 52; so,
currentes aquae,
Vulg. Isa. 30, 25; so,
aqua viva,
living-water, Varr. L. L. 5, 26, 35; Vulg. Gen. 26, 19; and plur.:
aquae vivae,
ib. Num. 19, 17;
and in a spiritual sense: aqua viva,
ib. Joan. 4, 10; so,
vitae,
ib. Apoc. 22, 17:
aquae viventes,
ib. Lev. 14, 5:
stagna aquae,
standing-water, Prop. 4, 17, 2; and plur., Vulg. Psa. 106, 35; so, stativae aquae, Varr. ap. Non. p. 217, 2:
aquae de puteis,
well-water, Vulg. Num. 20, 17:
aqua de cisternā,
cisternwater, ib. 2 Reg. 23, 16; so,
aqua cisternae,
ib. Isa. 36, 16:
aquae pessimae,
ib. 4 Reg. 2, 19:
aqua recens,
Verg. A. 6, 636:
turbida,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
crassa,
ib. 2 Macc. 1, 20:
munda,
ib. Heb. 10, 22:
purissima,
ib. Ezech. 34, 18:
aquae calidae,
warm-water, ib. Gen. 36, 24; and absol.:
calida,
Cato, R. R. 156, 3; Plin. 25, 7, 38, § 77; Tac. G. 22;
and contr.: calda,
Col. 6, 13; Plin. 23, 4, 41, § 83: aqua fervens, boiling-water:
aliquem aquā ferventi perfundere,
Cic. Verr. 1, 67:
aqua frigida,
cold-water, Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 37; Vulg. Prov. 25, 23; ib. Matt. 10, 42; and absol.:
frigida,
Cels. 1, 5; Plin. Ep. 3, 5, 11; Quint. 5, 11, 31: aqua decocta, water boiled and then cooled with ice or snow, Mart. 14, 116; and absol.:
decocta,
Juv. 5, 50; Suet. Ner. 48 al.—
B.
Particular phrases.
1.
Praebere aquam, to invite to a feast, to entertain (with ref. to the use of water at table for washing and drinking), Hor. S. 1, 4, 88 (cf. id. ib. 2, 2, 69).—
2.
Aquam aspergere alicui, to give new life or courage, to animate, refresh, revive (the fig. taken from sprinkling one who is in a swoon):
ah, adspersisti aquam! Jam rediit animus,
Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 15.—
3.
Aqua et ignis, to express the most common necessaries of life:
non aquā, non igni, ut aiunt, locis pluribus utimur quam amicitiā,
Cic. Lael. 6, 22.—Hence aquā et igni interdicere alicui, to deny intercourse or familiarity with one, to exclude from civil society, to banish, Cic. Phil. 1, 9; so the bride, on the day of marriage, received from the bridegroom aqua et ignis, as a symbol of their union: aquā et igni tam interdici solet damnatis quam accipiunt nuptae, videlicet quia hae duae res humanam vitam maxime continent, Paul. ex Fest. p. 3 Müll. (this custom is differently explained in [p. 148] Varr. L. L. 5, 9, 18): aquam et terram petere, of an enemy (like gên kai hudôr aitein), to demand submission, Liv. 35, 17:
aquam ipsos (hostes) terramque poscentium, ut neque fontium haustum nec solitos cibos relinquerent deditis,
Curt. 3, 10, 8.— Provv.
a.
Ex uno puteo similior numquam potis Aqua aquaï
sumi quam haec est atque ista hospita,
you can't find two peas more like, Plaut. Mil. 1, 6, 70 sq. —
b.
In aquā scribere = kath hudatos graphein, to write in water, of something transient, useless:
cupido quod dicit amanti, In vento et rapidā scribere oportet aquā,
Cat. 70, 4 (cf. Keats' epitaph on himself: here lies one whose name was writ in water; and the Germ., etwas hinter die Feueresse schreiben).—
II.
Water, in a more restricted sense.
A.
The sea:
coge, ut ad aquam tibi frumentum Ennenses metiantur,
on the sea-coast, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 83:
laborum quos ego sum terrā, quos ego passus aquā,
Ov. P. 2, 7, 30:
findite remigio aquas!
id. F. 3, 586.— Trop.: Venimus in portum... Naviget hinc aliā jam mihi linter aquā, in other waters let my bark now sail (cf. Milton in the Lycidas:
To-morrow to fresh woods and pastures new),
Ov. F. 2, 864.—
B.
= la. cus, a lake:
Albanae aquae deductio,
Cic. Div. 1, 44 fin. —
C.
A stream, a river. in Tuscae gurgite mersus aquae, i. e. Albula, Ov. F. 4, 48:
alii in aquam caeci ruebant,
Liv. 1, 27:
sonitus multarum aquarum,
of many streams, Vulg. Isa. 17, 12; ib. Apoc. 1, 15; 19, 6:
lignum, quod plantatum est secus decursus aquarum,
along the watercourses, ib. Psa. 1, 3.—
D.
Rain:
cornix augur aquae,
Hor. C. 3, 17, 12:
deūm genitor effusis aethera siccat aquis,
Ov. F. 3, 286:
multā terra madescit aquā,
id. ib. 6, 198:
aquae magnae bis eo anno fuerunt,
heavy rains, a flood, inundation, Liv. 24, 9; 38, 28.—
E.
In the plur., medicinal springs, waters, baths.
1.
In gen.:
ad aquas venire,
Cic. Planc. 27, 65; id. Fam. 16, 24, 2:
aquae caldae,
Varr. L. L. 9, 69, p. 219 Müll.:
aquae calidae,
Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 227:
aquae medicatae,
Sen. Q. N. 3, 25:
aquae Salutiferae,
Mart. 5, 1.—Hence,
2.
As prop. noun, Waters. Some of the most important were.
a.
Ăquae Ăpollĭnāres, in Etruria, prob. the Phoebi vada of Mart. 6, 42, 7, now Bagni di Stigliano, Tab. Peut.—
b.
Ăquae Aurēlĭae, in the Black Forest in Germany, now Baden-Baden, Inscr.—
c.
Ăquae Baiae, in Campania, Prop. 1, 11, 30; earlier called Ăquae Cūmānae, Liv. 41, 16.—
d.
Ăquae Călĭdae,
(α).
In Britain, now Bath; also called Ăquae Sōlis, Itin Anton.—
(β).
In Zeugitana on the Gulf of Carthage, now Hammam Gurbos, Liv. 30, 24, 9; Tab. Peut.—
(γ).
In Gallia, now Vichy on the Allier, Tab. Theod.—
e.
Ăquae Cĭcĕrōnĭānae, at Cicero's villa at Puteoli, Plin. 31, 2, 3, § 6.—
f.
Ăquae Mattĭăcae, among the Mattiaci in Germany, now Wiesbaden, Amm. 29, 4, also called Fontes Mattĭăci in Plin. 31, 2, 17, § 20.—
g.
Ăquae Sextĭae, near Massilia, once a famous watering-place, now Aix, Liv Epit 61; Vell. 1, 15; Plin. 3, 4, 5, § 36.—
h.
Ăquae Tauri or Tauri Thermae, in Etruria, now Bagni di Ferrata, Plin. 3, 5, 8, § 52. V. Smith, Dict. Geog., s. v. Aquae.—
F.
The water in the water-clock. From the use of this clock in regulating the length of speeches, etc. (cf. clepsydra), arose the tropical phrases,
(α).
Aquam dare, to give the advocate time for speaking, Plin. Ep. 6, 2, 7.—
(β).
Aquam perdere, to spend time unprofitably, to waste it, Quint. 11, 3, 52.—
(γ).
Aqua haeret, the water stops, i.e. I am at a loss, Cic. Off. 3, 33, 117:
in hac causā mihi aqua haeret,
id. ad Q. Fr. 2, 7.—
G.
Aqua intercus, the water under the skin of a dropsical person;
hence, as med. t.,
the dropsy, Plaut. Men. 5, 4, 3:
medicamentum ad aquam intercutem dare,
Cic. Off. 3, 24, 92:
decessit morbo aquae intercutis,
Suet. Ner 5; cf. Cels. 2, 8.— Trop.: aquam in animo habere intercutem, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 37, 3.—
III.
Aqua, the name of a constellation, Gr. Hudôr:
hae tenues stellae perhibentur nomine Aquāī,
Cic. Arat. 179 (as translation of tous pantas kaleousin Hudôr); v. Orell. ad h. l.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > Aquae Baiae
39 Aquae Calidae

ăqua, ae (ACVA, Inscr. Grut. 593, 5; gen. aquāï, Plaut. Mil. 2, 6, 71; Lucr. 1, 284; 1. 285; 1, 307; 1, 454 et saep.; Verg. A. 7, 464; poët. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 9, 15; Cic. Arat. 179; Prud. Apoth. 702; the dat. aquaï also was used acc. to Charis. p. 538; v. Neue, Formenl. I. pp. 9, 11, 12; pp. 14 sq.;
aquae, as trisyl.,
Lucr. 6, 552 Lachm.), f. [cf. Sanscr. ap = water; Wallach. apa, and Goth. ahva = river; old Germ. Aha; Celt. achi; and the Gr. proper names Mess-api-oi and gê Api-a, and the Lat. Apuli, Apiola; prob. ultimately con. with Sanscr. ācus = swift, ācer, and ôkus, from the notion of quickly, easily moving. Curtius.].
I.
A.. Water, in its most gen. signif. (as an element, rainwater, river-water, sea-water, etc.; in class. Lat. often plur. to denote several streams, springs, in one place or region, and com. plur. in Vulg. O. T. after the Hebrew):
aër, aqua, terra, vapores, Quo pacto fiant,
Lucr. 1, 567: SI. AQVA. PLVVIA. NOCET, Fragm. of the XII. Tab. ap. Dig. 40, 7, 21; cf. Dirks. Transl. p. 486; so also of titles in the Digg. 39, 3; cf. ib. 43, 20:
pluvialis,
rain-water, Ov. M. 8, 335, and Sen. Q. N. 3, 1; so,
aquae pluviae,
Cic. Mur. 9, 22; Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 233; Quint. 10, 1, 109 (and pluviae absol., Cic. Att. 15, 16, B; Lucr. 6, 519; Verg. G. 1, 92; Ov. F. 2, 71; Plin. 2, 106, 110, § 227); so,
caelestes aquae,
Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 135; Liv. 4, 30, 7; 5, 12, 2; Plin. 17, 2, 2, § 14; so,
aquae de nubibus,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 22, 12: aquae nivis, snow-water, ib. Job, 9, 30:
fluvialis,
river-water, Col. 6, 22; so,
aqua fluminis,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
aquaï fons,
Lucr. 5, 602:
fons aquae,
Vulg. Gen. 24, 13:
fontes aquarum, ib. Joel, 1, 20: flumen aquae,
Verg. A. 11, 495:
fluvius aquae,
Vulg. Apoc. 22, 1:
rivus aquae,
Verg. E. 8, 87:
rivi aquarum,
Vulg. Isa. 32, 2:
torrens aquae,
ib. Macc. 5, 40; and plur., ib. Jer. 31, 9: dulcis, fresh-water, Fr. eau douce, Lucr. 6, 890:
fons aquae dulcis,
Cic. Verr. 4, 118; and plur.:
aquae dulces,
Verg. G. 4, 61; id. A. 1, 167: marina, sea-water (v. also salsus, amarus), Cic. Att. 1, 16; so,
aquae maris,
Vulg. Gen. 1, 22; ib. Exod. 15, 19:
dulcis et amara aqua,
ib. Jac. 3, 11:
perennis,
never-failing, Liv. 1, 21; and plur.:
quo in summo (loco) est aequata agri planities et aquae perennes,
Cic. Verr. 4, 107:
aqua profluens,
running-water, id. Off. 1, 16, 52; so,
currentes aquae,
Vulg. Isa. 30, 25; so,
aqua viva,
living-water, Varr. L. L. 5, 26, 35; Vulg. Gen. 26, 19; and plur.:
aquae vivae,
ib. Num. 19, 17;
and in a spiritual sense: aqua viva,
ib. Joan. 4, 10; so,
vitae,
ib. Apoc. 22, 17:
aquae viventes,
ib. Lev. 14, 5:
stagna aquae,
standing-water, Prop. 4, 17, 2; and plur., Vulg. Psa. 106, 35; so, stativae aquae, Varr. ap. Non. p. 217, 2:
aquae de puteis,
well-water, Vulg. Num. 20, 17:
aqua de cisternā,
cisternwater, ib. 2 Reg. 23, 16; so,
aqua cisternae,
ib. Isa. 36, 16:
aquae pessimae,
ib. 4 Reg. 2, 19:
aqua recens,
Verg. A. 6, 636:
turbida,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
crassa,
ib. 2 Macc. 1, 20:
munda,
ib. Heb. 10, 22:
purissima,
ib. Ezech. 34, 18:
aquae calidae,
warm-water, ib. Gen. 36, 24; and absol.:
calida,
Cato, R. R. 156, 3; Plin. 25, 7, 38, § 77; Tac. G. 22;
and contr.: calda,
Col. 6, 13; Plin. 23, 4, 41, § 83: aqua fervens, boiling-water:
aliquem aquā ferventi perfundere,
Cic. Verr. 1, 67:
aqua frigida,
cold-water, Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 37; Vulg. Prov. 25, 23; ib. Matt. 10, 42; and absol.:
frigida,
Cels. 1, 5; Plin. Ep. 3, 5, 11; Quint. 5, 11, 31: aqua decocta, water boiled and then cooled with ice or snow, Mart. 14, 116; and absol.:
decocta,
Juv. 5, 50; Suet. Ner. 48 al.—
B.
Particular phrases.
1.
Praebere aquam, to invite to a feast, to entertain (with ref. to the use of water at table for washing and drinking), Hor. S. 1, 4, 88 (cf. id. ib. 2, 2, 69).—
2.
Aquam aspergere alicui, to give new life or courage, to animate, refresh, revive (the fig. taken from sprinkling one who is in a swoon):
ah, adspersisti aquam! Jam rediit animus,
Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 15.—
3.
Aqua et ignis, to express the most common necessaries of life:
non aquā, non igni, ut aiunt, locis pluribus utimur quam amicitiā,
Cic. Lael. 6, 22.—Hence aquā et igni interdicere alicui, to deny intercourse or familiarity with one, to exclude from civil society, to banish, Cic. Phil. 1, 9; so the bride, on the day of marriage, received from the bridegroom aqua et ignis, as a symbol of their union: aquā et igni tam interdici solet damnatis quam accipiunt nuptae, videlicet quia hae duae res humanam vitam maxime continent, Paul. ex Fest. p. 3 Müll. (this custom is differently explained in [p. 148] Varr. L. L. 5, 9, 18): aquam et terram petere, of an enemy (like gên kai hudôr aitein), to demand submission, Liv. 35, 17:
aquam ipsos (hostes) terramque poscentium, ut neque fontium haustum nec solitos cibos relinquerent deditis,
Curt. 3, 10, 8.— Provv.
a.
Ex uno puteo similior numquam potis Aqua aquaï
sumi quam haec est atque ista hospita,
you can't find two peas more like, Plaut. Mil. 1, 6, 70 sq. —
b.
In aquā scribere = kath hudatos graphein, to write in water, of something transient, useless:
cupido quod dicit amanti, In vento et rapidā scribere oportet aquā,
Cat. 70, 4 (cf. Keats' epitaph on himself: here lies one whose name was writ in water; and the Germ., etwas hinter die Feueresse schreiben).—
II.
Water, in a more restricted sense.
A.
The sea:
coge, ut ad aquam tibi frumentum Ennenses metiantur,
on the sea-coast, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 83:
laborum quos ego sum terrā, quos ego passus aquā,
Ov. P. 2, 7, 30:
findite remigio aquas!
id. F. 3, 586.— Trop.: Venimus in portum... Naviget hinc aliā jam mihi linter aquā, in other waters let my bark now sail (cf. Milton in the Lycidas:
To-morrow to fresh woods and pastures new),
Ov. F. 2, 864.—
B.
= la. cus, a lake:
Albanae aquae deductio,
Cic. Div. 1, 44 fin. —
C.
A stream, a river. in Tuscae gurgite mersus aquae, i. e. Albula, Ov. F. 4, 48:
alii in aquam caeci ruebant,
Liv. 1, 27:
sonitus multarum aquarum,
of many streams, Vulg. Isa. 17, 12; ib. Apoc. 1, 15; 19, 6:
lignum, quod plantatum est secus decursus aquarum,
along the watercourses, ib. Psa. 1, 3.—
D.
Rain:
cornix augur aquae,
Hor. C. 3, 17, 12:
deūm genitor effusis aethera siccat aquis,
Ov. F. 3, 286:
multā terra madescit aquā,
id. ib. 6, 198:
aquae magnae bis eo anno fuerunt,
heavy rains, a flood, inundation, Liv. 24, 9; 38, 28.—
E.
In the plur., medicinal springs, waters, baths.
1.
In gen.:
ad aquas venire,
Cic. Planc. 27, 65; id. Fam. 16, 24, 2:
aquae caldae,
Varr. L. L. 9, 69, p. 219 Müll.:
aquae calidae,
Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 227:
aquae medicatae,
Sen. Q. N. 3, 25:
aquae Salutiferae,
Mart. 5, 1.—Hence,
2.
As prop. noun, Waters. Some of the most important were.
a.
Ăquae Ăpollĭnāres, in Etruria, prob. the Phoebi vada of Mart. 6, 42, 7, now Bagni di Stigliano, Tab. Peut.—
b.
Ăquae Aurēlĭae, in the Black Forest in Germany, now Baden-Baden, Inscr.—
c.
Ăquae Baiae, in Campania, Prop. 1, 11, 30; earlier called Ăquae Cūmānae, Liv. 41, 16.—
d.
Ăquae Călĭdae,
(α).
In Britain, now Bath; also called Ăquae Sōlis, Itin Anton.—
(β).
In Zeugitana on the Gulf of Carthage, now Hammam Gurbos, Liv. 30, 24, 9; Tab. Peut.—
(γ).
In Gallia, now Vichy on the Allier, Tab. Theod.—
e.
Ăquae Cĭcĕrōnĭānae, at Cicero's villa at Puteoli, Plin. 31, 2, 3, § 6.—
f.
Ăquae Mattĭăcae, among the Mattiaci in Germany, now Wiesbaden, Amm. 29, 4, also called Fontes Mattĭăci in Plin. 31, 2, 17, § 20.—
g.
Ăquae Sextĭae, near Massilia, once a famous watering-place, now Aix, Liv Epit 61; Vell. 1, 15; Plin. 3, 4, 5, § 36.—
h.
Ăquae Tauri or Tauri Thermae, in Etruria, now Bagni di Ferrata, Plin. 3, 5, 8, § 52. V. Smith, Dict. Geog., s. v. Aquae.—
F.
The water in the water-clock. From the use of this clock in regulating the length of speeches, etc. (cf. clepsydra), arose the tropical phrases,
(α).
Aquam dare, to give the advocate time for speaking, Plin. Ep. 6, 2, 7.—
(β).
Aquam perdere, to spend time unprofitably, to waste it, Quint. 11, 3, 52.—
(γ).
Aqua haeret, the water stops, i.e. I am at a loss, Cic. Off. 3, 33, 117:
in hac causā mihi aqua haeret,
id. ad Q. Fr. 2, 7.—
G.
Aqua intercus, the water under the skin of a dropsical person;
hence, as med. t.,
the dropsy, Plaut. Men. 5, 4, 3:
medicamentum ad aquam intercutem dare,
Cic. Off. 3, 24, 92:
decessit morbo aquae intercutis,
Suet. Ner 5; cf. Cels. 2, 8.— Trop.: aquam in animo habere intercutem, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 37, 3.—
III.
Aqua, the name of a constellation, Gr. Hudôr:
hae tenues stellae perhibentur nomine Aquāī,
Cic. Arat. 179 (as translation of tous pantas kaleousin Hudôr); v. Orell. ad h. l.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > Aquae Calidae
40 Aquae Ciceronianae

ăqua, ae (ACVA, Inscr. Grut. 593, 5; gen. aquāï, Plaut. Mil. 2, 6, 71; Lucr. 1, 284; 1. 285; 1, 307; 1, 454 et saep.; Verg. A. 7, 464; poët. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 9, 15; Cic. Arat. 179; Prud. Apoth. 702; the dat. aquaï also was used acc. to Charis. p. 538; v. Neue, Formenl. I. pp. 9, 11, 12; pp. 14 sq.;
aquae, as trisyl.,
Lucr. 6, 552 Lachm.), f. [cf. Sanscr. ap = water; Wallach. apa, and Goth. ahva = river; old Germ. Aha; Celt. achi; and the Gr. proper names Mess-api-oi and gê Api-a, and the Lat. Apuli, Apiola; prob. ultimately con. with Sanscr. ācus = swift, ācer, and ôkus, from the notion of quickly, easily moving. Curtius.].
I.
A.. Water, in its most gen. signif. (as an element, rainwater, river-water, sea-water, etc.; in class. Lat. often plur. to denote several streams, springs, in one place or region, and com. plur. in Vulg. O. T. after the Hebrew):
aër, aqua, terra, vapores, Quo pacto fiant,
Lucr. 1, 567: SI. AQVA. PLVVIA. NOCET, Fragm. of the XII. Tab. ap. Dig. 40, 7, 21; cf. Dirks. Transl. p. 486; so also of titles in the Digg. 39, 3; cf. ib. 43, 20:
pluvialis,
rain-water, Ov. M. 8, 335, and Sen. Q. N. 3, 1; so,
aquae pluviae,
Cic. Mur. 9, 22; Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 233; Quint. 10, 1, 109 (and pluviae absol., Cic. Att. 15, 16, B; Lucr. 6, 519; Verg. G. 1, 92; Ov. F. 2, 71; Plin. 2, 106, 110, § 227); so,
caelestes aquae,
Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 135; Liv. 4, 30, 7; 5, 12, 2; Plin. 17, 2, 2, § 14; so,
aquae de nubibus,
Vulg. 2 Reg. 22, 12: aquae nivis, snow-water, ib. Job, 9, 30:
fluvialis,
river-water, Col. 6, 22; so,
aqua fluminis,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
aquaï fons,
Lucr. 5, 602:
fons aquae,
Vulg. Gen. 24, 13:
fontes aquarum, ib. Joel, 1, 20: flumen aquae,
Verg. A. 11, 495:
fluvius aquae,
Vulg. Apoc. 22, 1:
rivus aquae,
Verg. E. 8, 87:
rivi aquarum,
Vulg. Isa. 32, 2:
torrens aquae,
ib. Macc. 5, 40; and plur., ib. Jer. 31, 9: dulcis, fresh-water, Fr. eau douce, Lucr. 6, 890:
fons aquae dulcis,
Cic. Verr. 4, 118; and plur.:
aquae dulces,
Verg. G. 4, 61; id. A. 1, 167: marina, sea-water (v. also salsus, amarus), Cic. Att. 1, 16; so,
aquae maris,
Vulg. Gen. 1, 22; ib. Exod. 15, 19:
dulcis et amara aqua,
ib. Jac. 3, 11:
perennis,
never-failing, Liv. 1, 21; and plur.:
quo in summo (loco) est aequata agri planities et aquae perennes,
Cic. Verr. 4, 107:
aqua profluens,
running-water, id. Off. 1, 16, 52; so,
currentes aquae,
Vulg. Isa. 30, 25; so,
aqua viva,
living-water, Varr. L. L. 5, 26, 35; Vulg. Gen. 26, 19; and plur.:
aquae vivae,
ib. Num. 19, 17;
and in a spiritual sense: aqua viva,
ib. Joan. 4, 10; so,
vitae,
ib. Apoc. 22, 17:
aquae viventes,
ib. Lev. 14, 5:
stagna aquae,
standing-water, Prop. 4, 17, 2; and plur., Vulg. Psa. 106, 35; so, stativae aquae, Varr. ap. Non. p. 217, 2:
aquae de puteis,
well-water, Vulg. Num. 20, 17:
aqua de cisternā,
cisternwater, ib. 2 Reg. 23, 16; so,
aqua cisternae,
ib. Isa. 36, 16:
aquae pessimae,
ib. 4 Reg. 2, 19:
aqua recens,
Verg. A. 6, 636:
turbida,
Vulg. Jer. 2, 18:
crassa,
ib. 2 Macc. 1, 20:
munda,
ib. Heb. 10, 22:
purissima,
ib. Ezech. 34, 18:
aquae calidae,
warm-water, ib. Gen. 36, 24; and absol.:
calida,
Cato, R. R. 156, 3; Plin. 25, 7, 38, § 77; Tac. G. 22;
and contr.: calda,
Col. 6, 13; Plin. 23, 4, 41, § 83: aqua fervens, boiling-water:
aliquem aquā ferventi perfundere,
Cic. Verr. 1, 67:
aqua frigida,
cold-water, Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 37; Vulg. Prov. 25, 23; ib. Matt. 10, 42; and absol.:
frigida,
Cels. 1, 5; Plin. Ep. 3, 5, 11; Quint. 5, 11, 31: aqua decocta, water boiled and then cooled with ice or snow, Mart. 14, 116; and absol.:
decocta,
Juv. 5, 50; Suet. Ner. 48 al.—
B.
Particular phrases.
1.
Praebere aquam, to invite to a feast, to entertain (with ref. to the use of water at table for washing and drinking), Hor. S. 1, 4, 88 (cf. id. ib. 2, 2, 69).—
2.
Aquam aspergere alicui, to give new life or courage, to animate, refresh, revive (the fig. taken from sprinkling one who is in a swoon):
ah, adspersisti aquam! Jam rediit animus,
Plaut. Truc. 2, 4, 15.—
3.
Aqua et ignis, to express the most common necessaries of life:
non aquā, non igni, ut aiunt, locis pluribus utimur quam amicitiā,
Cic. Lael. 6, 22.—Hence aquā et igni interdicere alicui, to deny intercourse or familiarity with one, to exclude from civil society, to banish, Cic. Phil. 1, 9; so the bride, on the day of marriage, received from the bridegroom aqua et ignis, as a symbol of their union: aquā et igni tam interdici solet damnatis quam accipiunt nuptae, videlicet quia hae duae res humanam vitam maxime continent, Paul. ex Fest. p. 3 Müll. (this custom is differently explained in [p. 148] Varr. L. L. 5, 9, 18): aquam et terram petere, of an enemy (like gên kai hudôr aitein), to demand submission, Liv. 35, 17:
aquam ipsos (hostes) terramque poscentium, ut neque fontium haustum nec solitos cibos relinquerent deditis,
Curt. 3, 10, 8.— Provv.
a.
Ex uno puteo similior numquam potis Aqua aquaï
sumi quam haec est atque ista hospita,
you can't find two peas more like, Plaut. Mil. 1, 6, 70 sq. —
b.
In aquā scribere = kath hudatos graphein, to write in water, of something transient, useless:
cupido quod dicit amanti, In vento et rapidā scribere oportet aquā,
Cat. 70, 4 (cf. Keats' epitaph on himself: here lies one whose name was writ in water; and the Germ., etwas hinter die Feueresse schreiben).—
II.
Water, in a more restricted sense.
A.
The sea:
coge, ut ad aquam tibi frumentum Ennenses metiantur,
on the sea-coast, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 83:
laborum quos ego sum terrā, quos ego passus aquā,
Ov. P. 2, 7, 30:
findite remigio aquas!
id. F. 3, 586.— Trop.: Venimus in portum... Naviget hinc aliā jam mihi linter aquā, in other waters let my bark now sail (cf. Milton in the Lycidas:
To-morrow to fresh woods and pastures new),
Ov. F. 2, 864.—
B.
= la. cus, a lake:
Albanae aquae deductio,
Cic. Div. 1, 44 fin. —
C.
A stream, a river. in Tuscae gurgite mersus aquae, i. e. Albula, Ov. F. 4, 48:
alii in aquam caeci ruebant,
Liv. 1, 27:
sonitus multarum aquarum,
of many streams, Vulg. Isa. 17, 12; ib. Apoc. 1, 15; 19, 6:
lignum, quod plantatum est secus decursus aquarum,
along the watercourses, ib. Psa. 1, 3.—
D.
Rain:
cornix augur aquae,
Hor. C. 3, 17, 12:
deūm genitor effusis aethera siccat aquis,
Ov. F. 3, 286:
multā terra madescit aquā,
id. ib. 6, 198:
aquae magnae bis eo anno fuerunt,
heavy rains, a flood, inundation, Liv. 24, 9; 38, 28.—
E.
In the plur., medicinal springs, waters, baths.
1.
In gen.:
ad aquas venire,
Cic. Planc. 27, 65; id. Fam. 16, 24, 2:
aquae caldae,
Varr. L. L. 9, 69, p. 219 Müll.:
aquae calidae,
Plin. 2, 103, 106, § 227:
aquae medicatae,
Sen. Q. N. 3, 25:
aquae Salutiferae,
Mart. 5, 1.—Hence,
2.
As prop. noun, Waters. Some of the most important were.
a.
Ăquae Ăpollĭnāres, in Etruria, prob. the Phoebi vada of Mart. 6, 42, 7, now Bagni di Stigliano, Tab. Peut.—
b.
Ăquae Aurēlĭae, in the Black Forest in Germany, now Baden-Baden, Inscr.—
c.
Ăquae Baiae, in Campania, Prop. 1, 11, 30; earlier called Ăquae Cūmānae, Liv. 41, 16.—
d.
Ăquae Călĭdae,
(α).
In Britain, now Bath; also called Ăquae Sōlis, Itin Anton.—
(β).
In Zeugitana on the Gulf of Carthage, now Hammam Gurbos, Liv. 30, 24, 9; Tab. Peut.—
(γ).
In Gallia, now Vichy on the Allier, Tab. Theod.—
e.
Ăquae Cĭcĕrōnĭānae, at Cicero's villa at Puteoli, Plin. 31, 2, 3, § 6.—
f.
Ăquae Mattĭăcae, among the Mattiaci in Germany, now Wiesbaden, Amm. 29, 4, also called Fontes Mattĭăci in Plin. 31, 2, 17, § 20.—
g.
Ăquae Sextĭae, near Massilia, once a famous watering-place, now Aix, Liv Epit 61; Vell. 1, 15; Plin. 3, 4, 5, § 36.—
h.
Ăquae Tauri or Tauri Thermae, in Etruria, now Bagni di Ferrata, Plin. 3, 5, 8, § 52. V. Smith, Dict. Geog., s. v. Aquae.—
F.
The water in the water-clock. From the use of this clock in regulating the length of speeches, etc. (cf. clepsydra), arose the tropical phrases,
(α).
Aquam dare, to give the advocate time for speaking, Plin. Ep. 6, 2, 7.—
(β).
Aquam perdere, to spend time unprofitably, to waste it, Quint. 11, 3, 52.—
(γ).
Aqua haeret, the water stops, i.e. I am at a loss, Cic. Off. 3, 33, 117:
in hac causā mihi aqua haeret,
id. ad Q. Fr. 2, 7.—
G.
Aqua intercus, the water under the skin of a dropsical person;
hence, as med. t.,
the dropsy, Plaut. Men. 5, 4, 3:
medicamentum ad aquam intercutem dare,
Cic. Off. 3, 24, 92:
decessit morbo aquae intercutis,
Suet. Ner 5; cf. Cels. 2, 8.— Trop.: aquam in animo habere intercutem, Lucil. ap. Non. p. 37, 3.—
III.
Aqua, the name of a constellation, Gr. Hudôr:
hae tenues stellae perhibentur nomine Aquāī,
Cic. Arat. 179 (as translation of tous pantas kaleousin Hudôr); v. Orell. ad h. l.

Lewis & Short latin dictionary > Aquae Ciceronianae

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

Morrow County, Oregon — Morrow County Courthouse in Heppner … Wikipedia
Morrow Plots — Morrow Plots, University of Illinois U.S. National Register of Historic Places U.S. National Historic Landmark … Wikipedia
Morrow Pivot II — Developer Morrow Designs The Morrow Pivot II, circa 1985, was a portable personal computer manufactured by Morrow Designs. With two drives, 320 kilobytes of memory, and a monochrome backlit liquid crystal display, the Pivot II had a list price of … Wikipedia
Morrow Point Dam — Morrow Point Dam … Wikipedia
Morrow Mountain State Park — North Carolina State Park Natural Monument (IUCN III) … Wikipedia
Morrow County, Ohio — Location in the state of Ohio … Wikipedia
Morrow, Ohio — Village Location of Morrow, Ohio Coordinate … Wikipedia
Morrow High School (Georgia) — Morrow High School Motto Where Failure Is NOT An Option! Established 1969 Type Public secondary Principal Pamela Pitts Students 2,100 … Wikipedia
Morrow, Georgia — City Location in … Wikipedia
Morrow, Arkansas — Unincorporated community … Wikipedia
Morrow House — may refer to: in the United States (by state then city) Morrow Hudson House, Tempe, Arizona, listed on the NRHP in Maricopa County, Arizona Morrow Hall, Batesville, Arkansas, listed on the NRHP in Independence County, Arkansas James Morrow House … Wikipedia

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

to-morrow+is+with+us

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Словари и энциклопедии на Академике

Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

to-morrow+is+with+us

См. также в других словарях:

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка: